2014 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.
/Canada-5772216) - Black plate (1,1)

2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
2014 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
eAssist Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Performance and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-15
Keys, Doors, and Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-27
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-40 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-46 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-33
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-45
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-66
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Trademarks and License Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-5772216) - Black plate (2,1)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
2014 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 OnStar Additional
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2
Special Application Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
2014 - 2nd crc - 1/7/14
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase or A French language manual can be
due to changes subsequent to the obtained from your dealer, at
printing of this owner manual. www.helminc.com, or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited For vehicles first sold in Canada, savant:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, substitute the name "General
the CHEVROLET Emblem, IMPALA, Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited" for Attention: Customer Service
and the IMPALA Emblem are Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
trademarks and/or service marks of 47911 Halyard Drive
appears in this manual. Plymouth, MI 48170
General Motors LLC, its
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference. Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 22825342 C Third Printing 2014 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
iv Introduction
Danger, Warnings, and information relating to a specific

Cautions
{ Caution component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
Text marked { Caution provides
{ Danger information that may indicate a
M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
hazard that could result in injury for additional instructions or
Text marked { Danger provides or death. It could also result in information.
information on risk of fatal injury. possible damage to the vehicle.
Disregarding this information may * : This symbol is shown when
endanger life. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
{ Warning
Here are some additional symbols
Text marked { Warning provides that may be found on the vehicle
information on risk of accident or and what they mean. For more
A circle with a slash through it is a information on the symbol, refer to
injury. Disregarding this safety symbol which means “Do
information may lead to injury. the Index.
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.” 9 : Airbag Readiness Light
G : Air Conditioning
Symbols Refrigerant Oil
The vehicle has components and ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
labels that use symbols instead of g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
text. Symbols are shown along with or OnStar®
the text describing the operation or
$: Brake System Warning Light
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Introduction v
" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
g : First Responder
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
( : Heated Steering Wheel
j: LATCH System Child
Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
O : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Steering Wheel Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-21

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Universal Remote System . . . 1-22
Instrument Panel Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-15
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 eAssist Features
Initial Drive Information Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 eAssist® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 High Voltage Safety
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Vehicle Features Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-18 Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . 1-25
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-19 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Performance and Maintenance
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Driver Information Traction Control/Electronic
Heated and Ventilated Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Forward Collision Alert (FCA) Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-26
Head Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-26
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Lane Departure E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Driving for Better Fuel
Passenger Sensing Side Blind Zone Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Roadside Assistance
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Rear Vision Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-3
1. Instrument Panel Illumination 9. Storage Area with USB Port 16. Cruise Control on page 9-35
Control on page 6-4. Inside (If Equipped). See (If Equipped).
2. Air Vents on page 8-7. Instrument Panel Storage on Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 4-1 and USB Port on page 9-37 (If Equipped).
3. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 7-14.
page 2-14. Heated Steering Wheel on
10. Infotainment on page 7-1. page 5-3 (If Equipped).
Parking Assist Button. See
Assistance Systems for Parking 11. CD Player on page 7-12. Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
or Backing on page 9-46 (If 12. Electric Parking Brake. See System on page 9-48 (If
Equipped). Parking Brake on page 9-31. Equipped).
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 13. Data Link Connector (Out of 17. Steering Wheel Controls on
Button. See Lane Departure View). See Malfunction page 5-3 (Out of View).
Warning (LDW) on page 9-54. Indicator Lamp on page 5-17. 18. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
4. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and 14. Hood Release. See Hood on page 5-2.
Lane-Change Signals on page 10-4. 19. Horn on page 5-3.
page 6-3. 15. Instrument Panel Storage on 20. Steering Wheel Controls on
5. Instrument Cluster on page 5-9. page 4-1 (If Equipped). page 5-3.
Driver Information Center (DIC) Fuse Cover. See Instrument Driver Information Center
on page 5-27. Panel Fuse Block on Buttons. See Driver Information
6. Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 10-40. Center (DIC) on page 5-27.
page 5-4. 21. Ignition Positions (Keyless
7. Hazard Warning Flashers on Access) on page 9-15 or
page 6-3. Ignition Positions (Key Access)
8. Light Sensor. See Automatic on page 9-17.
Headlamp System on page 6-2.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-4 In Brief
22. Shift Lever. See Automatic Initial Drive

Transmission on page 9-27.
23. Heated and Ventilated Seats
Information
on page 1-11 (If Equipped). This section provides a brief
24. Traction Control/Electronic overview about some of the
Stability Control on page 9-33. important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle.
25. Storage Area with Accessory
Power Outlet Inside. See For more detailed information, refer
Center Console Storage on to each of the features which can be
page 4-2 and Power Outlets on found later in this owner manual.
page 5-6.
Remote Keyless Entry
26. Climate Control Systems on
page 8-1. (RKE) System
Dual Automatic Climate Control The RKE transmitter may work up to
System on page 8-3. 60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.
The RKE transmitter can have one
of these two symbols for the remote
trunk release.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-5
See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-3.
Remote Vehicle Start

If equipped, the engine can be
started from outside of the vehicle.
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
With Remote Start Shown 2. Press and release Q.
Press the button to extend the key.
K: Press to unlock the driver door
or all doors. 3. Immediately, press and hold /
The key can be used for all locks. for at least four seconds or until
This key is also used for the Q: Press to lock all doors.
the turn signal lamps flash.
ignition, if the vehicle does not have Lock and unlock feedback can be
pushbutton start. When the vehicle starts, the parking
personalized.
lamps will turn on and remain on as
V or Y : Press and hold to long as the engine is running. The
release the trunk. doors will be locked and the climate
7 : Press and release one time to control system may come on.
initiate vehicle locator. Press and The engine will continue to run for
hold for at least three seconds to 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
sound the panic alarm. Press again 10-minute time extension. Remote
to cancel the panic alarm. start can be extended only once.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-6 In Brief
Canceling a Remote Start Door Locks passenger doors. See Remote

To cancel a remote start, do one of Keyless Access Operation on page 2-3.
the following:
This feature may be configured. See
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
Vehicle Personalization on
vehicle and press and hold / page 5-40.
until the parking lamps turn off.
Key Cylinder Access
. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers. Use the key in the driver door. The
key cylinder is covered by a cap.
. Turn the vehicle on and then See Door Locks on page 2-10.
back off.
Inside the Vehicle
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2-9. Push down on the door lock knob to
lock that door. Pull once on the door
handle to unlock the door and again
If equipped, use the Keyless Access to open the door. Press the power
system to lock and unlock the door. door lock switch to lock or unlock all
When the doors are locked and the doors. See Door Locks on
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) page 2-10 and Power Door Locks
transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the on page 2-12.
driver door handle, press the lock/
unlock button. When unlocking from
the driver door, the first press
unlocks that door; press again
within five seconds to unlock all
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-7
Power Door Locks Trunk trunk and lift to open. See Remote
When closing the trunk, use the
pull cup.
See Trunk on page 2-14.
Windows
K: Press to unlock.
To open the trunk:
Q: Press to lock.
. Press | on the driver door.
See Power Door Locks on
page 2-12. . Press and hold V or Y on
the RKE transmitter.
. If equipped, press the touch pad
on the underside of the trunk lid
after unlocking all doors. The power windows only operate
with the ignition in ACC/
If equipped with Keyless Access,
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
the RKE transmitter must be within
or when Retained Accessory Power
1 m (3 ft) of the trunk. Press the
touch pad on the underside of the
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-8 In Brief
(RAP) is active. See Retained Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster

Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9-24. Manual Front Seats
The power window switches on the
driver door control all the windows.
Each passenger door has a switch
that controls only that window.
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
See Power Windows on page 2-21.
Press and hold the top or bottom of

the switch to raise or lower the seat.
To adjust a manual seat: Release the switch when the
1. Pull the handle at the front of desired height is reached.
the seat. See Seat Adjustment on page 3-4.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the handle.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-9
Power Seats Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks
To adjust the seat: To adjust the lumbar support:

. Move the seat forward or . Press and hold the control To recline a manual seatback:
rearward by sliding the control forward to increase or rearward
forward or rearward. to decrease lumbar support. 1. Lift the lever.
. Raise or lower the front part of . Press and hold the control 2. Move the seatback to the
the seat cushion by moving the upward to raise or downward to desired position, and then
front of the control up or down. lower the height of the lumbar release the lever to lock the
support. seatback in place.
. Raise or lower the seat by
moving the rear of the control up See Lumbar Adjustment on 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
or down. page 3-6. make sure it is locked.
See Power Seat Adjustment on

page 3-5.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-10 In Brief
To return the seatback to the upright

. Tilt the top of the control forward See Memory Seats on page 3-7 and
position: to raise. Vehicle Personalization on
1. Lift the lever fully without See Reclining Seatbacks on page 5-40.
applying pressure to the page 3-6.
seatback, and the seatback will Second Row Seats
return to the upright position. Memory Features The rear seatbacks can be folded
2. Push and pull on the seatback to down to increase cargo space.
make sure it is locked. See Rear Seats on page 3-11.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
If equipped, the "1," "2," SET, and

B (Exit) buttons on the driver door
are used to manually save and
recall memory settings for the driver
To adjust a power seatback: seat, outside mirrors, and power tilt
. Tilt the top of the control and telescoping steering column (if
rearward to recline. equipped).
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-11
Heated and Ventilated C : If available, press to ventilate Safety Belts

Seats the driver or passenger seat.
A ventilated seat has a fan that pulls
or pushes air through the seat. The
air is not cooled.
An indicator light on the button turns
on when the heated or ventilated
seat is on.
See Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3-10.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Heated and Ventilated Seat Do not drive until the head restraints Refer to the following sections for
for all occupants are installed and important information on how to use
Buttons Shown, Heated Seat
adjusted properly. safety belts properly:
Buttons Similar
To achieve a comfortable seating . Safety Belts on page 3-13.
If available, the buttons are on the
position, change the seatback . How to Wear Safety Belts
center console. To operate, the
recline angle as little as necessary Properly on page 3-14.
ignition must be on.
while keeping the seat and the head
I: If available, press to heat the restraint height in the proper
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-15.
driver or passenger seatback only. position. . Lower Anchors and Tethers for
J: Press to heat the driver or See Head Restraints on page 3-2 Children (LATCH System) on
passenger seat cushion and and Seat Adjustment on page 3-4. page 3-41.
seatback.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-12 In Brief
Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status 3. Move the selector switch to ) to
indicator lights on the overhead deselect the mirror.
System console when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status The vehicle has manual folding
Indicator on page 5-16. mirrors. See Folding Mirrors on
page 2-20.
Mirror Adjustment Interior Mirrors
Exterior Mirrors Adjustment
United States Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear
view of the area behind the vehicle.
Manual Rearview Mirror
For vehicles with a manual rearview
mirror, push the tab forward for
daytime use and pull it for nighttime
use to avoid glare from the
Canada headlamps from behind. See
The passenger sensing system will Manual Rearview Mirror on
turn off the front outboard page 2-20.
passenger frontal airbag and knee Automatic Dimming Rearview
airbag under certain conditions. No Mirror
other airbag is affected by the 1. Move the selector switch to L
passenger sensing system. See (Left) or R (Right) to choose the For vehicles with an automatic
Passenger Sensing System on driver or passenger mirror. dimming rearview mirror, the mirror
page 3-27. 2. Press one of the four arrows to will automatically reduce the glare
move the mirror. from the headlamps from behind.
The dimming feature comes on
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-13
when the vehicle is started. See 4. Pull the lever up to lock the Interior Lighting
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror steering wheel in place.
on page 2-20. Dome Lamps
Power Tilt Wheel
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
If equipped with this feature, press The interior lamps control in the
the control to move the steering overhead console controls both the
wheel up and down or forward and front and rear interior lamps.
To adjust the steering wheel: rearward. To change the dome lamp settings,
Do not adjust the steering wheel press the following:
1. Pull the lever down.
while driving. OFF: Turns the lamp off, even
2. Move the steering wheel up when a door is open.
or down.
DOOR: The lamp comes on
3. Pull or push the steering wheel automatically when a door is
closer or away from you. opened.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-14 In Brief
ON: Turns the lamp on. Exterior Lighting

Reading Lamps
The exterior lamp control is on the

Rear Reading Lamps turn signal lever.
There are front and rear reading There are four positions.
lamps in the overhead console and
Front Reading Lamps
the headliner. O : Turns off the exterior lamps.
The knob returns to the AUTO
# or $ : Press the button near position after it is released. Turn to
each lamp to turn it on or off. O again to reactivate the
AUTO mode.
AUTO: Automatically turns the
exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
; : Turns on the parking lamps
including all lamps, except the
headlamps.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-15
2 : Turns on the headlamps

together with the parking lamps and
instrument panel lights.
See:
. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6-1
INT: Move the lever up to INT for
Windshield Wiper/Washer intermittent wipes, then turn the x
INT band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
wipes.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
8 : For a single wipe, briefly move
the lever down. For several wipes,
hold the lever down.
With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, nL: Pull the lever toward you to
move the lever to select the wiper spray windshield washer fluid and
speed. activate the wipers.
HI: Use for fast wipes. See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5-4.
LO: Use for slow wipes.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-16 In Brief
Climate Controls
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
these systems.
Climate Control System
1. Fan Control 5. Temperature Control

2. Air Conditioning 6. Recirculation
3. Air Delivery Modes 7. Rear Window Defogger
4. Defrost
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-17
Transmission
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
This feature allows for changing
gears similar to a manual
transmission. To use this feature:
1. Move the shift lever from
D (Drive) rearward to
M (Manual Mode).
2. Using the button on the top of
the shift lever, press the + (plus)
Dual Automatic Climate Control System end of the button to upshift,
or press the − (minus) end of the
1. Driver and Passenger 7. Air Delivery Modes button to downshift.
Temperature Controls 8. On/Off (Fan) See Manual Mode on page 9-29.
2. Air Conditioning or Comfort/Eco 9. Rear Window Defogger
Air Conditioning (eAssist Only)
10. SYNC
3. Fan Control
See Climate Control Systems on
4. Defrost page 8-1 or Dual Automatic Climate
5. AUTO (Automatic Operation) Control System on page 8-3 (if
6. Recirculation equipped).
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-18 In Brief
Vehicle Features Storing Radio Station Presets SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Up to 25 preset stations from all Service
Radio(s) bands can be stored in the favorite SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
lists in any order. Up to five stations based in the 48 contiguous United
O : Press to turn the system on. can be stored in each favorite page States and 10 Canadian provinces.
Press and hold to turn it off. When and the number of favorite pages SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
on, press to mute; press again to can be set. variety of programming and
unmute. Turn to increase or
To store the station to a position in commercial-free music, coast to
decrease the volume.
the list, while on the active source coast, and in digital-quality sound.
RADIO: Press to choose between main page, such as AM, FM, A fee is required to receive the
FM, AM, and SiriusXM®, or SiriusXM (if equipped), press and SiriusXM service.
if equipped. hold a Favorites/Soft Key button on For more information refer to:
MEDIA: Press to change the audio the faceplate. . www.siriusxm.com or call
source between CD, USB, SD card, See “Storing Radio Station Presets” 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).
and AUX. under AM-FM Radio on page 7-7. . www.xmradio.ca or call
{: Press to go to the Home Page.
Setting the Clock 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
MENU: Press to select a menu.
See Clock (Base Radio) on See Satellite Radio on page 7-9.
g: Press to seek the previous page 5-5 or Clock (Uplevel Radio)
station or track. on page 5-5. Portable Audio Devices
l: Press to seek the next station This vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
or track. Satellite Radio auxiliary input jack and USB port in
See Overview on page 7-3 about Vehicles with a SiriusXM® satellite the center console. If equipped with
these and other radio features. radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM storage behind the radio, there is a
satellite radio subscription can USB port inside. See Instrument
receive SiriusXM programming. Panel Storage on page 4-1.
External devices such as iPods®,
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-19
laptop computers, MP3 players, CD Steering Wheel Controls

changers, and USB storage devices
may be connected, depending on
the audio system.
See USB Port on page 7-14 and
Auxiliary Jack on page 7-17.
Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® system allows users
with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
to make and receive hands-free
calls using the vehicle audio system
The favorite and volume switches
and controls.
are on the back of the steering
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone Some audio controls can be wheel.
must be paired with the in-vehicle adjusted at the steering wheel. 1. Favorites: Press to select the
Bluetooth system before it can be
g: ®
For vehicles with OnStar or a next or previous favorite.
used in the vehicle. Not all phones
will support all functions. Bluetooth® system, press to interact 2. Volume: Press to increase or
with those systems. See OnStar decrease the volume.
See Bluetooth (Infotainment Overview on page 14-1 or
Controls) on page 7-20 or Bluetooth See Steering Wheel Controls on
“Bluetooth (Overview)” in the
(Voice Recognition) on page 7-24 or page 5-3.
infotainment manual.
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-18.
c : Press to reject an incoming
call, or end a current call. Press to
mute or unmute the infotainment
system when not on a call.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-20 In Brief
Cruise Control SET–: Press briefly to set the Driver Information

speed and activate cruise control.
If cruise control is already active,
Center (DIC)
use to decrease vehicle speed. The DIC display is in the instrument
*: Press to disengage cruise cluster. It shows the status of many
control without erasing the set vehicle systems.
speed from memory.
See Cruise Control on page 9-35 or
Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 9-37 (if equipped).
Infotainment System
The base radio information is
included in this manual, if equipped.
5 : Press to turn cruise control on See the infotainment manual for
or off. A white indicator comes on in information on the uplevel radios,
the instrument cluster. audio players, phone, navigation
system, and voice or speech
+RES: Press briefly to make the recognition. There is also
vehicle resume to a previously set information on settings and w or x : Press to move up or
speed, or press and hold to downloadable applications (if down in a list, or on the main view
accelerate. If cruise control is equipped). press to cycle through the different
already active, use to increase Info app pages.
vehicle speed.
o or p : Press o to open
application menus on the left. Press
p to open interaction menus on the
right.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-21
V : Press to select a menu item. Lane Departure See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
Press and hold to reset values on on page 9-52.
Warning (LDW)
certain screens, or on the main view
reset info pages to the original If equipped, LDW is intended to help Rear Vision
setting. avoid unintentional lane departures Camera (RVC)
at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or
See Instrument Cluster on page 5-9 greater. LDW uses a camera sensor If equipped, RVC displays a view of
and Driver Information Center (DIC) to detect the lane markings. The the area behind the vehicle, on the
on page 5-27. center stack display, when the
LDW indicator, @, appears green if
a lane marking is detected. If the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
Forward Collision Alert vehicle departs the lane, the See Assistance Systems for Parking
(FCA) System indicator will change to amber and or Backing on page 9-46.
If equipped, FCA is intended to help flash. In addition, beeps will sound.
avoid or reduce the harm caused by See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Ultrasonic Parking Assist
front-end crashes. FCA provides a on page 9-54. If equipped, Ultrasonic Rear Parking
green indicator when a vehicle is Assist (URPA) uses sensors on the
detected directly ahead. It provides Side Blind Zone rear bumper to assist with parking
a flashing visual alert and beeps
when approaching a vehicle directly Alert (SBZA) and avoiding objects while in
R (Reverse). It operates at speeds
ahead too quickly. FCA also If equipped, SBZA will detect less than 8 km/h (5 mph). URPA
provides a visual alert if following vehicles in the next lane over in the may display a warning triangle on
another vehicle much too closely. vehicle's side blind zone area. the Rear Vision Camera screen and
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) When this happens, the SBZA a graphic on the instrument cluster
System on page 9-48. display will light up in the to provide the object distance. In
corresponding outside side mirror addition, multiple beeps or pulses
and will flash if the turn signal is on. may occur if very close to an object.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-22 In Brief
See Driver Assistance Systems on Universal Remote System See Universal Remote System on
page 9-45. page 5-46.
Power Outlets Sunroof

The accessory power outlets can be If equipped, the ignition must be in
used to plug in electrical equipment, ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. or in Retained Accessory Power
The vehicle has three accessory (RAP) to operate the sunroof and
power outlets: power sunshade. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
. Inside the front storage area page 9-24.
below the climate control
system.
. Inside the center console.
. On the rear of the center This system provides a way to
console. replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
Lift the cover to access the devices such as garage door
accessory power outlet. openers, security systems, and
See Power Outlets on page 5-6. home automation devices.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
Universal Remote system. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person 1. ~ Sunroof Switch
available to assist with programming
the Universal Remote system. 2. Q Sunshade Switch
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-23
Sunroof Switch Sunshade Switch eAssist Features

Open/Close: Press and hold the Open/Close: Press and hold the
front or rear of ~ to open or close front or rear of Q to open or close eAssist® Overview
the sunroof. Release ~ at the the sunshade to the desired If the vehicle has eAssist, there are
desired position to stop movement. position. several additional features that
Vent Feature: Press the front or Express Open/Express Close: contribute to increased efficiency.
Fully press and release the front or
rear of ~ to the first detent to open Vehicles with eAssist have an
and close the vent feature. The rear of Q to express open or automatic engine start/stop feature.
sunshade partially opens and closes express close the sunshade. If the This feature saves fuel by shutting
automatically during the vent sunroof is open, the sunshade will the engine off when the vehicle is
operation. express close just short of the open stopped. When the engine shuts off
sunroof. automatically, all the accessories
Express Open/Express Close: will continue to operate normally. In
Fully press and release the front or See Sunroof on page 2-23.
very hot or cold conditions, the
rear of ~. The sunroof opens and engine will only shut off
closes automatically. automatically part of the time. See
Starting the Engine on page 9-19.
There are two air conditioning
settings available. The comfort
setting maximizes cabin comfort.
The eco setting maximizes
efficiency allowing more frequent,
and longer engine stops than the
comfort setting. See Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on
page 8-3.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-24 In Brief
eAssist vehicles have a Hill Start The cold air intake for the battery is Automatic Engine Start/
Assist (HSA) feature, which may be behind the rear seat, on the filler
useful when the vehicle is stopped panel. Do not cover the intake. See
Stop Feature
on a grade. See Hill Start Assist Battery on page 10-27. Vehicles with eAssist have an
(HSA) on page 9-33. automatic engine start/stop feature.
Vehicles with eAssist have a slightly High Voltage Safety After the engine is started and has
different instrument cluster, which Information reached operating temperature, the
includes an AUTO STOP indicator auto stop feature may cause the
Vehicles with eAssist have a engine to turn off when the brake
on the tachometer. See Instrument
standard 12-volt battery and a high pedal is applied and the vehicle
Cluster on page 5-9.
voltage battery. Only a trained comes to a complete stop. When
The eAssist system uses a high service technician with the proper the brake pedal is released, or the
voltage battery, which is cooled with knowledge and tools should inspect, accelerator pedal is applied, the
air drawn from the vehicle interior. test, or replace the high voltage engine will restart. The engine will
battery. See your dealer if the high continue to run until the next
voltage battery needs service. auto stop.
In emergency situations, first To restart the engine during the auto
responders can cut the two clearly stop, release the brake pedal or
labeled cut points in the engine press the accelerator pedal. The
compartment to disable the high engine starts immediately. The
voltage battery and air bag systems vehicle continues to run until the
— do not cut the high voltage cable. next stop.
AUTO STOP on the tachometer
signifies that the engine is in auto
stop mode. See Tachometer on
page 5-13 for more information.
A chime will sound when the driver
door is opened while in auto stop
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-25
mode. Remember to shift to P (Park) Vehicles with eAssist also have a Performance and
and turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF high voltage battery. Only a trained
before exiting the vehicle. service technician with the proper Maintenance
See Starting the Engine on knowledge and tools should inspect,
page 9-19. test, or replace the high voltage Traction Control/
battery. See your dealer if the high
voltage battery needs service. See
Electronic Stability
Regenerative Braking Battery on page 10-27. Control
Regenerative braking takes some of The Traction Control System (TCS)
the energy from the moving vehicle Service limits wheel spin. The system turns
and turns it into electrical energy. on automatically every time the
This energy is then stored in the Never try to do your own service on
eAssist components. You can be vehicle is started.
vehicle's high voltage battery
system, contributing to increased injured and the vehicle can be The StabiliTrak system assists with
fuel efficiency. damaged if you try to do your own directional control of the vehicle in
service work. Service and repair of difficult driving conditions. The
The system works whenever the these high voltage components system also turns on automatically
accelerator pedal is released, and should only be performed by a every time the vehicle is started.
increases the energy captured as trained service technician with the . To turn off traction control, press
more brake pedal is applied. proper knowledge and tools. See
Doing Your Own Service Work on and release the g button on the
Battery page 10-3. center console. The Traction Off
This vehicle has a standard 12-volt Light i illuminates.
battery. Refer to the replacement . To turn off both traction control
number on the original battery label and StabiliTrak, press and hold
when a new standard 12-volt battery the g button, until the Traction
is needed.
Off Light i and the StabiliTrak
Off Light g illuminate.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-26 In Brief
. Press and release the g button The low tire pressure warning light Resetting the Oil Life System
again to turn on both systems. may come on in cool weather when 1. Using the DIC controls on the
the vehicle is first started, and then right side of the steering wheel,
See Traction Control/Electronic
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This display REMAINING OIL LIFE
Stability Control on page 9-33.
may be an early indicator that the on the DIC. See Driver
tire pressures are getting low and
Tire Pressure Monitor the tires need to be inflated to the
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5-27. When remaining oil
This vehicle may have a Tire proper pressure. life is low, the CHANGE
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS does not replace normal ENGINE OIL SOON message
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain will appear on the display. See
the correct tire pressures. Engine Oil Messages on
See Tire Pressure Monitor System page 5-33.
on page 10-51. 2. Press V on the DIC controls and
hold down for a few seconds to
Engine Oil Life System clear the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
The low tire pressure warning light The engine oil life system calculates SOON message and reset the
alerts to a significant loss in engine oil life based on vehicle use oil life at 100%.
pressure of one of the vehicle's and displays the CHANGE ENGINE Be careful not to reset the oil life
tires. If the warning light comes on, OIL SOON message when it is time display accidentally at any time
stop as soon as possible and inflate to change the engine oil and filter. other than after the oil is
the tires to the recommended The oil life system should be reset changed. It cannot be reset
pressure shown on the Tire and to 100% only following an oil accurately until the next oil
Loading Information label. See change. change.
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.
The warning light will remain on until
the tire pressure is corrected.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In Brief 1-27
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
The oil life system can also be reset Driving for Better Fuel the same TPC Spec number
as follows:
Economy molded into the tire's sidewall
1. Turn the ignition on with the near the size.
engine off. Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips . Follow recommended scheduled
2. Fully press and release the to get the best fuel economy maintenance.
accelerator pedal three times possible.
within five seconds. . Avoid fast starts and accelerate Roadside Assistance
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL smoothly. Program
SOON message is not on, the
system is reset.
. Brake gradually and avoid U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
abrupt stops.
See Engine Oil Life System on TTY Users (U.S. Only):
page 10-14.
. Avoid idling the engine for long 1-888-889-2438
periods of time.
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
E85 or FlexFuel . When road and weather
As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
conditions are appropriate, use
Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can cruise control. you are automatically enrolled in the
use either unleaded gasoline or Roadside Assistance program.
ethanol fuel containing up to 85% . Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when See Roadside Assistance Program
ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuel
conditions require. on page 13-5.
on page 9-58. For all other vehicles,
use only the unleaded gasoline . Keep vehicle tires properly
described under Recommended inflated.
Fuel on page 9-56.
. Combine several trips into a
single trip.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1-28 In Brief
OnStar®
If equipped, this vehicle has a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live Advisor
for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Connection, and Diagnostic
Services. See OnStar Overview on
page 14-1.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Immobilizer Operation (Key
Keys and Locks
Windows Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Immobilizer Operation Keys
(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys and Locks Exterior Mirrors
{ Warning
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 an ignition key or Remote
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 dangerous and children or others
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-9 could be seriously injured or
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Interior Mirrors killed. They could operate the
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-20 power window or other controls or
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-20 make the vehicle move. The
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-13 Automatic Dimming Rearview windows will function with the key
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 in the ignition or with the RKE
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 transmitter in the vehicle, and
Windows
Doors children or others could be caught
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 in the path of a closing window.
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Do not leave children in a vehicle
Vehicle Security with the ignition key or an RKE
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Roof transmitter.
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-16 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
With an active OnStar subscription,

an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
Overview on page 14-1.
Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13-15.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
The key that is part of the Remote RKE With Remote Start Shown, . Check the distance. The
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can Without Similar transmitter may be too far from
be used for the ignition and all locks Press the button on the RKE the vehicle.
if the vehicle is a Key Access transmitter to extend the key. Press
vehicle. If the vehicle has the
. Check the location. Other
the button and the key blade to vehicles or objects may be
keyless ignition, the key can be retract the key.
used for the locks. blocking the signal.
If the vehicle has an ignition and it . Check the transmitter's battery.
becomes difficult to turn the key, See “Battery Replacement” later
inspect the key blade for debris. in this section.
Periodically clean with a brush
or pick. . If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
See your dealer if a new key is dealer or a qualified technician
needed. for service.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Remote Keyless Entry If the passenger door is open when

(RKE) System Operation Q is pressed, all doors lock.
The transmitter functions may work Pressing Q may also arm the
up to 60 m (197 ft) away from the theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
vehicle. Alarm System on page 2-16.
Keep in mind that other conditions, K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
such as those previously stated, can driver door or all doors. See “Power
impact the performance of the Door Locks” under Vehicle
transmitter. Personalization on page 5-40.
The RKE transmitter can have one The turn signal indicators may flash
of the two symbols for the remote to indicate unlocking. See “Remote
With Remote Start Shown Unlock Light Feedback” under
trunk release.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-40.
The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound to Pressing K will disarm the
indicate locking. See “Remote Lock, theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
Unlock, Start” under Vehicle Alarm System on page 2-16.
Personalization on page 5-40.
Memory seat positions may be
If Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out is recalled when unlocking the vehicle.
enabled through Vehicle See Memory Seats on page 3-7 and
Personalization and the driver door “Auto Memory Recall” under Vehicle
is open when Q is pressed, all Personalization on page 5-40.
doors lock and the driver door will V or Y (Remote Trunk
immediately unlock. See “Remote Release): Press and hold to
Lock, Unlock, Start” under Vehicle release the trunk.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic the trunk without removing the RKE

Alarm): Press and release one transmitter from your pocket, purse,
time to initiate vehicle locator. The briefcase, etc. The RKE transmitter
exterior lamps flash and the horn must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the door
chirps three times. being unlocked. If the vehicle has
this feature, there will be a button on
Press and hold 7 for at least the outside door handles.
three seconds to sound the panic
The Keyless Access can be
alarm. The horn sounds and the
programmed to unlock all doors on
turn signals flash for about
the first unlock/lock button press
30 seconds until 7 is pressed again from the driver door. See Vehicle
or the vehicle is started. Personalization on page 5-40.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from Similar
If equipped, press Q and release the Driver Door
and then immediately press and Pressing the lock/unlock button will
When the doors are locked and the
hold / for four seconds to start the cause all doors to lock if any of the
RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)
engine from outside the vehicle following occur:
of the driver door handle, pressing
using the RKE transmitter. See the lock/unlock button on the driver . It has been more than
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-9. door handle will unlock the driver five seconds since the first lock/
If equipped with a keyed ignition, door. If the lock/unlock button is unlock button press.
the buttons on the keys are disabled pressed again within five seconds, . Two lock/unlock button presses
when there is a key in the ignition. all passenger doors will unlock. Pull were used to unlock all doors.
the door handle to unlatch the door.
Keyless Access Operation . Any vehicle door has opened
and all doors are now closed.
Some vehicles have the Keyless
Access system that lets you lock
and unlock the doors and access
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the vehicle, or none remain in the replacement can be purchased and
Passenger Doors vehicle interior, the doors will lock programmed through your dealer.
When the doors are locked and the after several seconds. The vehicle can be reprogrammed
RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) Temporarily disable the locking so that lost or stolen transmitters no
of the door handle, pressing the longer work. Any remaining
feature by pressing and holding K transmitters will need to be
lock/unlock button on that door on the door for several seconds with
handle will unlock all doors. reprogrammed. Each vehicle can
a door open. Passive locking will have up to eight transmitters
Pressing the lock/unlock button will then remain disabled until Q is matched to it.
cause all doors to lock if any of the pressed, or until the vehicle is
following occur: Programming with a Recognized
turned on.
Transmitter (Key Vehicles Only)
. The lock/unlock button was used To customize whether the doors
to unlock all doors. To program a new key:
automatically lock when you exit the
. Any vehicle door has opened vehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock, 1. Insert the original, already
and all doors are now closed. Start” under Vehicle Personalization programmed key in the ignition
on page 5-40. and turn to the key to the ON/
Passive Locking RUN position.
Keyless Trunk Opening
If the vehicle has the Keyless 2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and
Access system, this feature allows Press the touch pad on the trunk lid remove the key.
you to select whether the doors to open the trunk if the RKE
transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the 3. Insert the new key to be
automatically lock during normal
trunk. programmed and turn it to the
vehicle exit. When the vehicle is
ON/RUN position within
turned off and all doors are closed, Programming Transmitters to five seconds.
the vehicle will determine how many
RKE transmitters remain inside the
the Vehicle The security light will turn off
vehicle. If at least one RKE Only RKE transmitters programmed once the key has been
transmitter has been removed from to the vehicle will work. If a programmed.
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
4. Repeat Steps 1–3 if additional 3. Wait 10 minutes until the 2. Remove the key lock cylinder
keys are to be programmed. security light turns off. cap. See Door Locks on
If a key is lost or damaged, see your 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. page 2-10. Then insert the
dealer to have a new key made. vehicle key into the key lock
5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two more cylinder on the driver door
Programming without a times. After the third time, turn to handle and turn the key,
Recognized Transmitter (Key ON/RUN; the key is learned and counterclockwise, to the unlock
Vehicles Only) all previously known keys will no position five times within
longer work with the vehicle. 10 seconds.
Program a new key to the vehicle
when a recognized key is not Remaining keys can be learned by The Driver Information Center
available. Canadian regulations following the procedure in (DIC) displays READY FOR
require that owners see their dealer. “Programming with a REMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5.
Recognized Key.”
If there are no currently recognized
keys available, follow this procedure Programming with a Recognized
to program the 1st key. Transmitter (Keyless Access
This procedure will take Vehicles Only)
approximately 30 minutes to A new transmitter can be
complete for the first key. The programmed to the vehicle when
vehicle must be off and all of the there is one recognized transmitter.
keys you wish to program must be To program, the vehicle must be off
with you. and at least one currently
1. Insert the new vehicle key into recognized transmitter and all new
the ignition. transmitters, must be with you.
2. Turn to ON/RUN. The security 1. Place the recognized

light will come on. transmitter(s) in the cupholder.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
3. Place the new transmitter into available in Canada. This procedure 3. Repeat Step 2 two additional
the transmitter pocket. The will take approximately 30 minutes times. After the third time, all
transmitter pocket is located to complete. The vehicle must be off previously known transmitters
inside the center console and all of the transmitters you wish will no longer work with the
storage area. to program must be with you. vehicle. Remaining transmitters
4. Press the ENGINE START/ 1. Remove the key lock cylinder can be relearned during the next
STOP button. When the cap. See Door Locks on steps.
transmitter is learned, the DIC page 2-10. Then insert the The DIC display should now
will show that it is ready to vehicle key into the key lock show READY FOR REMOTE
program the next transmitter. cylinder on the driver door # 1.
5. Remove the transmitter from the handle and turn the key, 4. Place the new transmitter into
counterclockwise, to the unlock
transmitter pocket and press K. position five times within
the transmitter pocket. The
transmitter pocket is inside the
To program additional 10 seconds. center console storage area.
transmitters, repeat Steps 3–5. The Driver Information Center 5. Press the ENGINE START/
When all additional transmitters (DIC) displays REMOTE LEARN STOP button. When the
are programmed, press and hold PENDING, PLEASE WAIT. transmitter is learned the DIC
the ENGINE START/STOP 2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DIC will show that it is ready to
button for 12 seconds to exit displays PRESS ENGINE program the next transmitter.
programming mode. START BUTTON TO LEARN
Programming without a and then press the ENGINE
Recognized Transmitter (Keyless START/STOP button.
Access Vehicles Only) The DIC displays will again
If there are no currently recognized show REMOTE LEARN
transmitters available, follow this PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.
procedure to program up to eight
transmitters. This feature is not
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
6. Remove the transmitter from the To start the vehicle: Battery Replacement
transmitter pocket and press K. Replace the battery if the DIC
To program additional indicates that battery replacement is
transmitters, repeat Steps 4–6. necessary. See Key and Lock
Messages on page 5-34.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and hold
the ENGINE START/STOP { Caution
button for 12 seconds to exit
When replacing the battery, do
programming mode.
not touch any of the circuitry on
Starting the Vehicle with a Low the transmitter. Static from your
Transmitter Battery or Wireless body could damage the
Interference transmitter.
If the transmitter battery is weak or 1. Open the center console and
there is wireless interference, the place the transmitter in the The battery is not rechargeable. To
DIC may display NO REMOTE transmitter pocket with the replace the battery:
DETECTED or PLACE buttons facing the front of the 1. Press the button on the
TRANSMITTER IN POCKET TO vehicle. transmitter to extend the key
START when you try to start the blade.
vehicle. The REPLACE BATTERY 2. With the vehicle in P (Park) or
IN REMOTE KEY message may N (Neutral), press the brake
also be displayed at this time. pedal and press the ENGINE
START/STOP button. See
Starting the Engine on
page 9-19.
Replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Remote Vehicle Start to have the vehicle in view. Check

local regulations for any
The vehicle may have this feature requirements.
that allows the engine to be started
from outside the vehicle. Other conditions can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
button will be on the RKE System on page 2-2.
transmitter if the vehicle has remote
start. Starting the Vehicle
The climate control system will use To start the engine using the remote
the previous settings during a start feature:
remote start. The rear window 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
2. Remove the battery cover by defogger may come on during a vehicle.
prying it with a finger. remote start based on cold ambient
3. Remove the battery by pushing conditions. The rear defog indicator 2. Press and release Q.
on the battery and sliding it light does not come on during a 3. Immediately after completing
remote start.
toward the key blade. Step 2, press and hold / for at
4. Insert the new battery, positive If the vehicle has heated and/or least four seconds or until the
side facing up. Push the battery ventilated seats, they may come on turn signal lamps flash. The turn
down until it is held in place. during a remote start. See Heated signal lamps flashing confirms
Replace with a CR2032 or and Ventilated Front Seats on the request to remote start the
equivalent battery. page 3-10. vehicle has been received.
5. Snap the battery cover back on Laws in some local communities When the engine starts, the parking
to the transmitter. may restrict the use of remote lamps will turn on and remain on as
starters. For example, some laws long as the engine is running. The
require a person using remote start doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
The engine will continue to run for The vehicle's ignition must be
. The malfunction indicator lamp
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a turned on and then back off before is on.
10-minute time extension. Remote the remote start procedure can be . The engine coolant temperature
start can be extended only once. used again. is too high.
To drive the vehicle, turn the ignition Canceling a Remote Start . The oil pressure is low.
to ON/RUN for Key Access
vehicles, or press the brake pedal To cancel a remote start, do one of . Two remote vehicle starts, or a
and the ENGINE START/STOP the following: single remote start with an
button for Keyless Access vehicles. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the extension, have already
been used.
Extending Engine Run Time vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
. The vehicle is not in P (Park).
For a 10-minute extension, repeat
Steps 1–3 while the engine is still
flashers.
Door Locks
running. The remote start can be
extended once. . Turn the vehicle on and then off.
{ Warning
When the remote start is extended, Conditions in Which Remote Start
the second 10 minutes will start Will Not Work Unlocked doors can be
immediately. dangerous.
The remote vehicle start feature will
For example, if the engine has been not operate if:
. Passengers, especially
running for five minutes, and children, can easily open the
10 minutes are added, the engine
. The key is in the ignition (Key doors and fall out of a moving
will run for a total of 15 minutes. Access) or if the key is in the vehicle. The chance of being
vehicle (Keyless Access). thrown out of the vehicle in a
A maximum of two remote starts,
or a single start with an extension,
. The hood is not closed. crash is increased if the
is allowed between ignition cycles. doors are not locked. So, all
. The hazard warning flashers
passengers should wear
are on.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Keyless Access Key Cylinder Access

Warning (Continued)
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
. Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it. If equipped, use the Keyless Access To access the key cylinder:
. Outsiders can easily enter system to lock and unlock the door. 1. Pull the door handle (1) to the
through an unlocked door When the doors are locked and the open position.
when slowing or stopping the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
vehicle. Lock the doors to transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the 2. Insert the key (4) into the slot (3)
help prevent this from driver door handle, press the lock/ on the bottom of the cap (2) and
happening. unlock button. When unlocking from pry outward.
the driver door, the first press 3. Move the cap (2) rearward and
unlocks that door; press again remove.
within five seconds to unlock all
passenger doors. See Remote 4. Use the key (4) in the cylinder.
Keyless Entry (RKE) System To replace the cap:
1. Pull the door handle to the open
position.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Power Door Locks
3. Move the cap forward and press

to snap the cap in place.
4. Release the door handle.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
Inside the Vehicle
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
Push down on the door lock knob to doors.
lock the door manually. Pull once on
the door handle to unlock the door Delayed Locking
and again to open the door.
This feature is activated through
Press the power door lock switch to Vehicle Personalization. See
lock or unlock all doors Vehicle Personalization on
automatically. See Power Door page 5-40.
2. Insert the two tabs (7) at the Locks on page 2-12.
back of the cap (8) between the
seal (5) and the metal base (6).
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
When delayed locking is active and The power door locks can be transmitter is detected and the
Q is pressed on the door lock programmed through the Driver number of RKE transmitters has not
switch while the door is open, a Information Center (DIC). See reduced, the driver door will unlock.
chime will sound three times. Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-40. Lockout Protection Override
When all the doors are closed, the
doors will lock automatically after Lockout protection can be manually
five seconds. If a door is reopened Lockout Protection overridden with the driver door open
before five seconds have elapsed, by pressing and holding Q on the
Key Access
the five-second timer will reset once power door lock switch.
all the doors are closed again. If the key is in the ignition and the
power door lock switch is pressed Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
Press Q on the door lock switch with the driver door open, all doors When this feature is on and door
again or press Q on the RKE will lock and only the driver door will locking is requested with the driver
transmitter to override this feature unlock. door open, all doors will lock and
and lock the doors immediately. only the driver door will unlock. The
Keyless Access
driver door must be closed before
Automatic Door Locks If equipped with keyless access, locking is requested for all doors to
when the vehicle is in ACC/ remain locked. When this feature is
The doors will lock automatically ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START off, the Delayed Door Lock menu
when all doors are closed, the and the power door lock switch is will be available.
ignition is on, and the shift lever is pressed with the driver door open,
moved out of P (Park). This feature can also be
all doors will lock and only the driver
programmed. See Vehicle
To unlock the doors: door will unlock.
If the vehicle is off and locking is
. Press K on a door. requested while a door is open,
. Shift the transmission into when all doors are closed the
P (Park). vehicle will check for RKE
transmitters inside. If an RKE
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Safety Locks The rear door power windows are Doors

also disabled. See Power Windows
The rear door safety locks prevent on page 2-21.
passengers from opening the rear Trunk
doors from inside the vehicle. Press Z { again to deactivate the
safety locks. { Warning
If a rear door handle is being pulled
at the same time the safety lock is Exhaust gases can enter the
deactivated, that door will remain vehicle if it is driven with the
locked and the indicator light may liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
flash. Release the handle, then any objects that pass through the
press the safety lock twice to seal between the body and the
deactivate the safety locks. trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with
Press Z { to activate the safety the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
locks on the rear doors. The
indicator light in the switch will
. Close all of the windows.
illuminate when activated. . Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
trunk and lift to open. See Remote

Warning (Continued) Keyless Entry (RKE) System
. Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that When closing the trunk, use the
brings in only outside air and pull cup.
set the fan speed to the
Emergency Trunk Release
highest setting. See “Climate
Control Systems” in the Handle
Index.
. If the vehicle is equipped with
{ Caution
a power liftgate, disable the Do not use the emergency trunk
power liftgate function. release handle as a tie-down or
To open the trunk:
For more information about anchor point when securing items
carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Press | on the driver door in the trunk as it could damage
Exhaust on page 9-26. with the transmission in the handle.
P (Park).
. Press and hold V or Y on
the RKE transmitter.
. If equipped, press the touch pad
on the underside of the trunk lid
after unlocking all doors.
If equipped with Keyless Access,
the RKE transmitter must be within
1 m (3 ft) of the trunk. Press the
touch pad on the underside of the
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
the vehicle impossible to steal.
Vehicle Alarm System

This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.
Arming the System
To arm the system, press Q on the
There is a glow-in-the-dark RKE transmitter. The security indicator light on the
emergency trunk release handle on instrument panel flashes.
the trunk lid. This handle will glow The alarm automatically arms after
following exposure to light. Pull the about 30 seconds. Press and hold V or Y on the
release handle to open the trunk RKE transmitter to open the trunk
from the inside. without setting off the alarm. The
system rearms when the trunk is
closed.
Disarming the System
To disarm the system, do one of the
following:
. Press K on the RKE transmitter.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. If the vehicle has Keyless
Access, unlock the vehicle using
Immobilizer Operation The security light in the instrument
cluster comes on if there is a
the door handle lock/unlock (Key Access) problem with arming or disarming
button with the RKE transmitter This vehicle has a passive the theft-deterrent system.
within 1 m (3 ft) of the vehicle. theft-deterrent system. When trying to start the vehicle, the
. Start the engine. The system does not have to be security light comes on briefly when
The alarm automatically disarms. manually armed or disarmed. the ignition is turned on.
How to Detect a Tamper The vehicle is automatically If the engine does not start and the
immobilized when the key is security light stays on, there is a
Condition problem with the system. Turn the
removed from the ignition.
If K is pressed and the horn The system is automatically
ignition off and try again.
sounds, an attempted break-in disarmed when the vehicle is If the engine still does not start, and
occurred while the system was started with the correct key. The key the key appears to be undamaged
armed. uses a transponder that matches an or the light continues to stay on, try
If the alarm has been activated, a immobilizer control unit in the another ignition key.
message will appear on the DIC. vehicle and automatically disarms If the engine still does not start with
See Security Messages on the system. Only the correct key the other key, the vehicle needs
page 5-37. starts the vehicle. The vehicle may service. If the vehicle does start, the
not start if the key is damaged. first key may be damaged. See your
Immobilizer dealer who can service the
theft-deterrent system and have a
See Radio Frequency Statement on
new key made.
page 13-15.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Immobilizer Operation The system has one or more If the engine does not start with the
transmitters matched to an other transmitter or when the
(Keyless Access) immobilizer control unit in your transmitter is in the pocket in the
This vehicle has a passive vehicle. Only a correctly matched center console, your vehicle needs
theft-deterrent system. transmitter will start the vehicle. service. See your dealer who can
If the transmitter is ever damaged, service the theft-deterrent system
The system does not have to be
you may not be able to start your and have a new transmitter
manually armed or disarmed.
vehicle. programmed to the vehicle.
The vehicle is automatically
When trying to start the vehicle, the Do not leave the transmitter or
immobilized when the transmitter
security light comes on briefly when device that disarms or deactivates
leaves the vehicle.
the ignition is turned on. the theft-deterrent system in the
The immobilization system is vehicle.
If the engine does not start and the
disarmed when the ignition button is
security light stays on, there is a
pushed in and a valid transmitter is
problem with the system. Turn the
found in the vehicle.
vehicle off and try again.
If the RKE transmitter appears to be
undamaged, try another transmitter.
Or, you may try placing the
transmitter in the transmitter pocket
in the center console. See “Starting
the Vehicle with a Low Transmitter
The security light in the instrument Battery or Wireless Interference”
cluster comes on When there is a under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
problem with arming or disarming System Operation on page 2-3.
the theft-deterrent system.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors Exterior Automatic Dimming

Mirror
Convex Mirrors The vehicle may have a driver
exterior automatic dimming mirror
that will automatically adjust for the
{ Caution glare of headlamps behind.
A convex mirror can make things, Memory Mirrors
like other vehicles, look farther
The vehicle may have memory
away than they really are. If you
mirrors. See Memory Seats on
cut too sharply into the right lane, page 3-7.
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
glance over your shoulder before The vehicle may have SBZA. See
changing lanes. Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
1. Move the selector switch to L
(Left) or R (Right) to choose the page 9-52.
The passenger side mirror is convex driver or passenger mirror. Turn Signal Indicator
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is 2. Press one of the four arrows to
curved so more can be seen from The vehicle has a turn signal
move the mirror. indicator on the mirror housings.
the driver seat.
3. Move the selector switch to ) to The indicator will flash when a turn
deselect the mirror. signal or the hazard warning
flashers are used.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Puddle Light Reverse Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors

The vehicle has a puddle light on If equipped with the memory
the mirror housings. The light will package, the passenger and/or Interior Rearview Mirrors
illuminate the ground when the door driver mirror tilts to a preselected
is opened. Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear
position when the vehicle is in view of the area behind your
R (Reverse). This feature allows the vehicle.
Folding Mirrors driver to view the curb when parallel
parking. The mirror(s) return to the Do not spray glass cleaner directly
Manual Folding Mirrors original position when the vehicle is on the mirror. Use a soft towel
The vehicle has manual folding shifted out of R (Reverse), the dampened with water.
mirrors. These mirrors can be folded ignition is turned off or to OFF/
inward to prevent damage when LOCK, or if the vehicle is driven in Manual Rearview Mirror
going through an automatic car reverse above a predetermined
If equipped with a manual rearview
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward speed.
mirror, push the tab forward for
the vehicle. Push the mirror outward Turn this feature on or off through daytime use and pull it for nighttime
to return it to the original position. vehicle personalization. See Vehicle use to avoid glare from the
Personalization on page 5-40. headlamps from behind.
Heated Mirrors
= (Rear Window Defogger): Automatic Dimming
If equipped, press to heat the Rearview Mirror
mirrors.
If equipped, automatic dimming
See Dual Automatic Climate Control reduces the glare of headlamps
System on page 8-3. from behind. The dimming feature
comes on when the vehicle is
started.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Windows The vehicle aerodynamics are

designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
{ Warning pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
Never leave a child, a helpless windows are up. To reduce the
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, sound, open either a front window
especially with the windows or the sunroof, if equipped.
closed in warm or hot weather.
They can be overcome by the Power Windows
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. { Warning
The power windows only operate
Children could be seriously with the ignition in ACC/
injured or killed if caught in the ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
path of a closing window. Never or when Retained Accessory Power
leave the Remote Keyless Entry (RAP) is active. See Retained
(RKE) transmitter in a vehicle with Accessory Power (RAP) on
children. When there are children page 9-24.
in the rear seat, use the window The power window switches on the
lockout switch to prevent driver door control all the windows.
operation of the windows. See Each passenger door has a switch
Keys on page 2-1. that controls only that window.
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Express-Down/Up Windows Express Window Anti-Pinch Programming the Power

If equipped, this feature allows the Override Windows
windows to be raised and lowered If the vehicle battery has been
all the way without holding the { Warning recharged or disconnected, or is not
switch. working, the front power windows
If express override is activated, will need to be reprogrammed for
Press or pull the switch fully and the window will not reverse
release it to activate the express the express-up feature to work.
automatically. You or others could Before reprogramming, replace or
feature.
be injured and the window could recharge the vehicle's battery.
The express mode can be canceled be damaged. Before you use
by briefly pressing or pulling the To program:
express override, make sure that
switch. all people and obstructions are 1. With the ignition in ON/RUN or
clear of the window path. ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
Express Window Anti-Pinch RAP is active, close all doors.
Feature
The anti-pinch feature can be 2. Press and hold the power
If any object is in the path of the window switch until the window
window when the express-up is overridden. Hold the window switch
all the way up to the second is fully open.
active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a position. The window will rise for as 3. Pull the power window switch up
preset factory position. Weather long as the switch is held. Once the until the window is fully closed.
conditions such as severe icing may switch is released, the express
mode is reactivated. 4. Continue holding the switch up
also cause the window to for approximately two seconds
auto-reverse. The window will return In this mode, the window can close after the window is completely
to normal operation after the on an object in its path. Use care closed.
obstruction or condition is removed. when using the override mode.
The window is now reprogrammed.
Repeat the process for the other
windows.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Window Lockout If the indicator light flashes, the Roof

feature may not be working properly.
Sun Visors Sunroof

For vehicles equipped with a
sunroof, the ignition must be in ON/
RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) to
operate the sunroof and power
sunshade. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9-24.
This feature prevents the rear Pull the sun visor down to block
passenger windows from operating, glare. Detach the sun visor from the
except from the driver position. center mount to pivot to the side
window, or to extend along the rod.
Press Z { to activate the window
lockout. The indicator light in the
switch will illuminate when
activated.
The rear door locks are also
disabled. See Safety Locks on
page 2-14. 1. ~ Sunroof Switch
Press Z { again to deactivate the 2. Q Sunshade Switch
lockout switch.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Sunroof Switch sunroof is open, the sunshade will operation or noise. It could also plug
Open/Close: Press and hold the express close just short of the open the water drainage system.
sunroof. Periodically open the sunroof and
front or rear of ~ to open or close remove any obstacles or loose
the sunroof. Release ~ at the Anti-Pinch Feature debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
desired position to stop movement. If an object is in the path of the roof sealing area using a clean
sunroof/sunshade when it is closing, cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
Vent Feature: Press the front or
the anti-pinch feature will detect the remove grease from the sunroof.
rear of ~ to the first detent to open object and stop the sunroof/
and close the vent feature. The If water is seen dripping into the
sunshade from closing at the point water drainage system, this is
sunshade partially opens and closes of the obstruction. The sunroof/
automatically during the vent normal.
sunshade will then return to the
operation. full-open position. To close the
Express Open/Express Close: sunroof/sunshade, see “Express
Fully press and release the front or Open/Express Close” earlier in this
rear of ~. The sunroof opens and section.
closes automatically.
Sunshade Switch
Open/Close: Press and hold the
front or rear of Q to open or close
the sunshade to the desired
position.
Express Open/Express Close:
Fully press and release the front or
rear of Q to express open or Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof seal or in the track. This
express close the sunshade. If the
could cause an issue with sunroof
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Adding Equipment to the

Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-32
Restraints Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-33
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Replacing Airbag System
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-19 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Head Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Replacing Safety Belt System Child Restraints
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Front Seats Infants and Young
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Airbag System Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-5 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-38
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-22 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-40
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 When Should an Airbag Lower Anchors and Tethers
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 for Children (LATCH
Heated and Ventilated Front What Makes an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Replacing LATCH System
How Does an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
What Will You See after an (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-48
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
How to Wear Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the To raise or lower the head restraint,
If your vehicle has rear head top of the restraint is at the same press the button located on the side
restraints that fold down, always height as the top of the occupant's of the head restraint, and pull up or
return them to the full upright head. This position reduces the push the head restraint down. Pull
position whenever an occupant is chance of a neck injury in a crash. and push on the head restraint after
seated in the seat. the button is released to make sure
Front Seats it is locked in place.
The vehicle's front seats have The front seat outboard head
adjustable head restraints in the restraints are not designed to be
outboard seating positions. removed.
Two-Way Head Restraints
The height of the head restraint can
be adjusted.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Four-Way Head Restraints Rear Seats

The height of the head restraint can The vehicle's rear seats have
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint adjustable head restraints in the
up to raise it. Try to move the head outboard seating positions.
restraint to make sure that it is
The height of the head restraint can
locked in place.
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The head restraints can be adjusted

forward or rearward. To adjust the
head restraint forward, grasp the
head restraint and pull it forward to
the desired locking position. To
adjust the head restraint rearward,
press the button located on the side
To lower the head restraint, press of the head restraint and move the
the button located on the side of the head restraint rearward until the
desired locking position is reached.
head restraint, push the head
restraint down, and release the Try to move the head restraint after
the button is released to make sure To lower the head restraint, press
button. Pull and push on the head
that it is locked in place. the button, located on the top of the
restraint after the button is released
The front seat outboard head seatback, and push the head
to make sure that it is locked in
restraints are not designed to be restraint down. Try to move the
place.
removed.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
head restraint after the button is When an occupant or child restraint Front Seats
released to make sure that it is is in the seat, always return the
locked in place. head restraint to the full upright
position. Push down on the head Seat Adjustment
restraint to release the locking
mechanism. Then, pull the head { Warning
restraint up and push it rearward
until it is in the full upright position. You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
Always adjust the head restraint so
seat while the vehicle is moving.
that the top of the restraint is at the
Adjust the driver seat only when
same height as the top of the
occupant's head. the vehicle is not moving.
Rear outboard head restraints are

not designed to be removed.
On some models, the rear head

restraints can be folded forward to
allow for better visibility when the
rear seat is unoccupied. To fold the
head restraint, grasp the top of the
head restraint and pull the head
restraint forward and down until it
locks in place.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
To adjust a manual seat: Power Seat Adjustment To adjust the seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front of . Move the seat forward or
the seat. { Warning rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
You can lose control of the .
position and release the handle. Raise or lower the front part of
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver the seat cushion by moving the
3. Try to move the seat back and seat while the vehicle is moving.
forth to be sure it is locked in front of the control up or down.
Adjust the driver seat only when
place. the vehicle is not moving.
. Raise or lower the seat by
moving the rear of the control up
Seat Height Adjuster or down.
To adjust the seatback, see
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3-6.
To adjust the lumbar support, see
Lumbar Adjustment on page 3-6.
Press and hold the top or bottom of

the switch to raise or lower the seat.
Release the switch when the
desired height is reached.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks
{ Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you Do not have a seatback reclined if
could go into it, receiving neck or the vehicle is moving.
other injuries.
To adjust the lumbar support: Manual Reclining Seatbacks
The lap belt could go up over
. Press and hold the control
your abdomen. The belt forces
forward to increase or rearward
to decrease lumbar support.
would be there, not at your pelvic { Warning
bones. This could cause serious
. Press and hold the control If either seatback is not locked, it
internal injuries.
upward to raise or downward to could move forward in a sudden
lower the height of the lumbar For proper protection when the stop or crash. That could cause
support. vehicle is in motion, have the injury to the person sitting there.
seatback upright. Then sit well Always push and pull on the
back in the seat and wear the seatbacks to be sure they are
safety belt properly. locked.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
2. Push and pull on the seatback to Memory Seats

make sure it is locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.
If equipped, the "1," "2," SET, and
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
B (Exit) buttons on the driver door
To adjust a power seatback: are used to manually save and
release the lever to lock the
recall memory settings for the driver
seatback in place. . Tilt the top of the control seat, outside mirrors, and power tilt
3. Push and pull on the seatback to rearward to recline. and telescoping steering column (if
make sure it is locked. . Tilt the top of the control forward equipped).
To return the seatback to the upright to raise.
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Storing Memory Positions Manually Recalling Memory by pressing the appropriate memory
To save positions to the “1” and “2” Positions button. If the memory position is still
buttons: If the vehicle is off, or in ON/RUN/ not recalling, see your dealer for
START but not in P (Park), press service.
1. Adjust the driver seat, outside
mirrors, and the power tilt and and hold "1," "2," or B to manually Automatically Recalling Memory
telescoping steering column (if recall the previously stored memory Positions (Auto Memory Recall)
equipped) to the desired driving positions. Releasing "1,” "2," or B The Auto (Automatic) Memory
positions. before the stored positions are Recall feature automatically recalls
2. Press and holdSET and “1” at reached stops the recall. the current driver’s previously stored
the same time until a beep “1” or “2” position when entering the
If the vehicle is in ON/RUN/START
sounds. vehicle.
and in P (Park), press and release
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a “1,” “2,” or B to manually recall the Depending upon the Auto Memory
second driver using “2.” previously stored memory positions. Recall feature enabled in the vehicle
Placing the ignition in OFF before personalization menu, memory “1”
To save positions to the B (Exit) the stored positions are reached or “2” positions are recalled in the
button and easy exit features: stops the recall. following ways:
1. Adjust the driver seat, power tilt If something has blocked the driver To activate the recall when On -
and telescoping steering column seat and/or power tilt and Driver Door Open is selected in the
(if equipped), and the outside telescoping steering column (if personalization menu, do one of the
mirrors on some vehicles to the equipped) while recalling a memory following:
desired positions for getting out position, the recall may stop.
of the vehicle.
. On vehicles with RKE, press K
Remove the obstruction; then press on the RKE transmitter and open
2. Press and hold SET and B at and hold the appropriate manual the driver door.
the same time until a beep control for the memory item that is
. On vehicles with Keyless
sounds. not recalling for two seconds. Try
recalling the memory position again Access, press the lock/unlock
button on the outside driver door
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
handle and open the driver door. position, the recall may stop. Easy exit recall automatically
The RKE transmitter must be Remove the obstruction; then press activates when one of the following
present for the recall to activate. and hold the appropriate manual occurs:
. If the driver door is already control for the memory item that is . The vehicle is turned off and the
not recalling for two seconds. Try
open, press K on the RKE recalling the memory position again
driver door is opened within a
transmitter to activate the recall. short time.
by opening the driver door and
To activate the recall when On - At pressing K on the RKE transmitter.
. The vehicle is turned off with the
Ignition On is selected in the vehicle If the memory position is still not driver door open.
personalization menu: recalling, see your dealer for If something has blocked the driver
. Place the ignition in ON/RUN/ service. seat and/or power tilt and
START. telescoping steering column (if
Easy Exit Recall equipped) while recalling the exit
See Vehicle Personalization on If programmed on in the vehicle position, the recall may stop.
page 5-40. personalization menu, the easy exit Remove the obstruction; then press
To stop recall movement, press one feature automatically moves the and hold the appropriate manual
of the memory, power mirror or driver seat, power tilt and control for the exit feature not
power seat controls; or press the telescoping steering column (if recalling for two seconds. Try
power tilt and telescoping steering equipped), and outside mirrors on recalling the exit position again.
column control (if equipped). If On - some vehicles to the memory If the exit position is still not
At Ignition On is selected in the positions saved to the B (Exit) recalling, see your dealer for
vehicle personalization menu, button. See “Storing Memory service.
placing the ignition in OFF/LOCK Positions” listed previously. See
also stops the recall. also Vehicle Personalization on
If something has blocked the driver page 5-40.
seat and/or the power tilt and
telescoping steering column (if
equipped) while recalling a memory
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Heated and Ventilated C (Ventilated Seat): If available,

Front Seats press to ventilate the driver or
passenger seat. A ventilated seat
has a fan that pulls or pushes air
{ Warning through the seat. The air is not
cooled.
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the An indicator light on the button turns
seat heater may cause burns. To on when the heated or ventilated
reduce the risk of burns, people seat is on.
with such a condition should use Press the button once for the
care when using the seat heater, highest setting. With each press of
especially for long periods of Heated and Ventilated Seat the button, the seat will change to
time. Do not place anything on Buttons Shown, Heated Seat the next lower setting, and then to
the seat that insulates against Buttons Similar the off setting. The lights near the
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, button indicate three for the highest
cover, or similar item. This may If available, the buttons are on the setting and one for the lowest. If the
cause the seat heater to center console. To operate, the heated seats are on high, the level
overheat. An overheated seat ignition must be on. may automatically be lowered after
heater may cause a burn or may I (Heated Seatback): If available, approximately 30 minutes.
damage the seat. press to heat the driver or The passenger seat may take
passenger seatback only. longer to heat up.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Remote Start Auto Heated and
Press to heat the driver or Ventilated Seats
passenger seat cushion and
seatback. During a remote start, the heated or
ventilated seats (if available) can be
turned on automatically. When it is
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
cold outside, the heated seats turn Rear Seats To fold the seatback:
on, and when it is hot outside the
ventilated seats turn on. The heated Folding the Seatback
or ventilated seats are canceled
when the ignition is turned on. Press Either side of the seatback can be
the button to use the heated or folded for more cargo space. Fold a
ventilated seats after the vehicle is seatback only when the vehicle is
started. not moving.
The heated or ventilated seat

indicator lights on the button do not
{ Caution
turn on during a remote start. Folding a rear seat with the safety
The heated seat temperature belts still fastened may cause
performance of an unoccupied seat damage to the seat or the safety
may be reduced. This is normal. belts. Always unbuckle the safety Rear Seat with Folding Head
belts and return them to their Restraints Shown, Non-Folding
The heated or ventilated seats will
not turn on during a remote start normal stowed position before Head Restraints Similar
unless they are enabled in the folding a rear seat. 1. Lift the lever on top of the
vehicle personalization menu. See seatback to unlock it.
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-9
A tab near the seatback lever
and Vehicle Personalization on
raises when the seatback is
page 5-40.
unlocked.
2. Fold the seatback forward.
Repeat the steps to fold the
other seatback, if desired.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Raising the Seatback To raise a seatback: Rear Seat Armrest

1. Lift the seatback up and push it
{ Warning rearward to lock it in place.
If either seatback is not locked, it A tab near the seatback lever
could move forward in a sudden retracts when the seatback is
stop or crash. That could cause locked in place.
injury to the person sitting there. 2. Push and pull the top of the
Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked
seatbacks to be sure they are into position.
locked. 3. Repeat the steps to raise the
other seatback, if necessary.
When the seat is not in use, it
{ Warning should be kept in the upright, locked
The rear seat has an armrest in the
position.
A safety belt that is improperly center of the seatback. Lower the
routed, not properly attached, armrest to access the two
or twisted will not provide the cupholders.
protection needed in a crash. The To fold, lift the armrest up and push
person wearing the belt could be it rearward until it is flush with the
seriously injured. After raising the seatback.
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Safety Belts Why Safety Belts Work

Warning (Continued)
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts are more likely to be seriously
properly. It also describes some injured or killed. Do not allow
things not to do with safety belts. passengers to ride in any area of
the vehicle that is not equipped
{ Warning with seats and safety belts.
Always wear a safety belt, and
Do not let anyone ride where a check that all passenger(s) are
safety belt cannot be worn restrained properly too.
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, injuries can be much This vehicle has indicators as a
worse than if you are wearing reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on When riding in a vehicle, you travel
safety belts. You can be seriously as fast as the vehicle does. If the
page 5-15.
injured or killed by hitting things vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
inside the vehicle harder or by going until something stops you.
being ejected from the vehicle. In It could be the windshield, the
addition, anyone who is not instrument panel, or the safety belts!
buckled up can strike other
When you wear a safety belt, you
passengers in the vehicle.
and the vehicle slow down together.
It is extremely dangerous to ride There is more time to stop because
in a cargo area, inside or outside you stop over a longer distance and,
of a vehicle. In a collision, when worn properly, your strongest
passengers riding in these areas bones take the forces from the
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
safety belts. That is why wearing Also, in nearly all states and in
safety belts makes such good all Canadian provinces, the law
sense. requires wearing safety belts.
Questions and Answers About How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts
Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a This section is only for people of
safety belt? adult size.
A: You could be — whether you are There are special things to know
wearing a safety belt or not. about safety belts and children. And
Your chance of being conscious there are different rules for smaller
during and after a crash, so you children and infants. If a child will be . Sit up straight and always keep
can unbuckle and get out, is riding in the vehicle, see Older your feet on the floor in front
much greater if you are belted. Children on page 3-34 or Infants of you.
and Young Children on page 3-36. . Always use the correct buckle
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Follow those rules for everyone's
should I have to wear safety for your seating position.
protection.
belts? . Wear the lap part of the belt low
It is very important for all occupants and snug on the hips, just
A: Airbags are supplemental to buckle up. Statistics show that
systems only; so they work with touching the thighs. In a crash,
unbelted people are hurt more often this applies force to the strong
safety belts — not instead of in crashes than those who are
them. Whether or not an airbag pelvic bones and you would be
wearing safety belts. less likely to slide under the lap
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the There are important things to know belt. If you slid under it, the belt
most protection. about wearing a safety belt properly. would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
These parts of the body are best All seating positions in the vehicle get twisted.
able to take belt restraining have a lap-shoulder belt.
forces. The shoulder belt locks if The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
The following instructions explain you pull the belt across you very
there is a sudden stop or crash. how to wear a lap-shoulder belt quickly. If this happens, let the
properly. belt go back slightly to unlock it.
{ Warning 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is Then pull the belt across you
You can be seriously injured, adjustable, so you can sit up more slowly.
or even killed, by not wearing straight. To see how, see “Seats” If the shoulder portion of a
your safety belt properly. in the Index. passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
. Never allow the lap or locking feature may be engaged.
shoulder belt to become If this happens, let the belt go
loose or twisted.
back all the way and start again.
. Never wear the shoulder belt
under both arms or behind
your back.
. Never route the lap or
shoulder belt over an
armrest.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
To unlatch the belt, push the button

on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
3. Push the latch plate into the 4. To make the lap part tight, pull right front passenger seating
buckle until it clicks. up on the shoulder belt. positions.
Pull up on the latch plate to Adjust the height so the shoulder
make sure it is secure. portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
Position the release button on
should be close to, but not
the buckle so that the safety belt
contacting, the neck. Improper
could be quickly unbuckled if
shoulder belt height adjustment
necessary.
could reduce the effectiveness of
If equipped with a shoulder belt the safety belt in a crash. See How
height adjuster, move it to the to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
height that is right for you. See page 3-14.
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
later in this section for
instructions on use and
important safety information.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
They can help tighten the safety properly adjusted, the comfort guide
belts during the early stages of a positions the belt away from the
moderate to severe frontal, near neck and head.
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold There is one guide for each outside
conditions for pretensioner passenger position in the rear seat.
activation are met. Here is how to install a comfort
And, if the vehicle has side impact guide to the safety belt:
airbags and roof-rail airbags, safety
belt pretensioners can help tighten
the safety belts in a side crash or
rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
Press the release button and move pretensioners activate in a crash,
the height adjuster to the desired the pretensioners and probably
position. The adjuster can be moved other parts of the vehicle's safety
up by pushing the slide/trim up. belt system will need to be replaced.
After the adjuster is set to the See Replacing Safety Belt System
desired position, try to move it down Parts after a Crash on page 3-20.
without pushing the release button
to make sure it has locked into Rear Safety Belt Comfort
position. Guides 1. Remove the guide from its
Safety Belt Pretensioners This vehicle may have rear shoulder storage pocket on the side of
belt comfort guides. If not, they are the seat.
This vehicle has safety belt available through your dealer. The
pretensioners for front outboard guides may provide added safety
occupants. Although the safety belt belt comfort for older children who
pretensioners cannot be seen, they have outgrown booster seats and
are part of the safety belt assembly. for some adults. When installed and
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Warning (Continued)
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt, 3. Be sure that the belt is not
and insert the two edges of the twisted and it lies flat. The
belt into the slots of the guide. elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
{ Warning
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the 4. Buckle, position, and release the
protection needed in a crash. The safety belt as described
person wearing the belt could be previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt is on the shoulder and not
belt should go over the shoulder
falling off of it. The belt should
(Continued) be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts,
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety anchorages are all working properly.
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them Look for any other loose or
wear safety belts. properly. damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5-15.
long enough for you. To help avoid
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
personal injury, do not let someone
See Safety Belt Care on page 3-19.
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
A pregnant woman should wear a has been designed for adults. Never Safety Belt Care
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap use it for securing child seats. To
portion should be worn as low as Keep belts clean and dry.
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
possible, below the rounding, belt. See the instruction sheet that
throughout the pregnancy. comes with the extender.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
{ Warning Warning (Continued) Airbag System

The vehicle has the following
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. inspected and any necessary airbags:
It may severely weaken them. In replacements made as soon as
a crash, they might not be able to possible.
. A frontal airbag for the driver.
provide adequate protection. . A frontal airbag for the front
Clean safety belts only with mild After a minor crash, replacement of outboard passenger.
soap and lukewarm water. safety belts may not be necessary. . A knee airbag for the driver.
But the safety belt assemblies that . A knee airbag for the front
Replacing Safety Belt were used during any crash may outboard passenger.
have been stressed or damaged.
System Parts after a See your dealer to have the safety . A seat-mounted side impact
Crash belt assemblies inspected or airbag for the driver.
replaced. . A seat-mounted side impact
{ Warning New parts and repairs may be airbag for the front outboard
necessary even if the safety belt passenger.
A crash can damage the safety system was not being used at the . Seat-mounted side impact
belt system in the vehicle. time of the crash. airbags for the second row
A damaged safety belt system outboard passengers.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
may not properly protect the
checked if the vehicle has been in a . A roof-rail airbag for the driver
person using it, resulting in crash, or if the airbag readiness light
serious injury or even death in a and the passenger seated
stays on after you start the vehicle directly behind the driver.
crash. To help make sure the or while you are driving. See Airbag
safety belt systems are working Readiness Light on page 5-15.
properly after a crash, have them
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. A roof-rail airbag for the front the risk of injury from the force of an
outboard passenger and the inflating bag, all airbags must inflate Warning (Continued)
passenger seated directly very quickly to do their job.
behind the front outboard vehicle should wear a safety belt
passenger. Here are the most important things properly, whether or not there is
to know about the airbag system: an airbag for that person.
All vehicle airbags have the word
AIRBAG on the trim or on a label
near the deployment opening. { Warning
For frontal airbags, the word You can be severely injured or { Warning
AIRBAG is on the center of the killed in a crash if you are not
steering wheel for the driver and on wearing your safety belt, even Because airbags inflate with great
the instrument panel for the front with airbags. Airbags are force and faster than the blink of
outboard passenger. designed to work with safety an eye, anyone who is up
belts, not replace them. Also, against, or very close to any
For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG
airbags are not designed to inflate airbag when it inflates can be
is on the lower part of the
in every crash. In some crashes seriously injured or killed. Do not
instrument panel.
safety belts are the only restraint. sit unnecessarily close to any
For seat-mounted side impact airbag, as you would be if sitting
See When Should an Airbag
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the on the edge of the seat or leaning
side of the seatback closest to Inflate? on page 3-24.
forward. Safety belts help keep
the door. Wearing your safety belt during a you in position before and during
For roof-rail airbags, the word crash helps reduce the chance of a crash. Always wear a safety
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim. hitting things inside the vehicle or belt, even with airbags. The driver
being ejected from it. Airbags are should sit as far back as possible
Airbags are designed to supplement “supplemental restraints” to the
the protection provided by safety while still maintaining control of
safety belts. Everyone in the the vehicle.
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce (Continued) (Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Warning (Continued)
Where Are the Airbags?
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
There is an airbag readiness light
and/or roof-rail airbags.
on the instrument cluster, which
shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag electrical
{ Warning system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical
Children who are up against, problem. See Airbag Readiness
or very close to, any airbag when Light on page 5-15 for more
it inflates can be seriously injured information.
The driver frontal airbag is in the
or killed. Always secure children center of the steering wheel.
properly in the vehicle. To read
how, see Older Children on The front outboard passenger
page 3-34 or Infants and Young frontal airbag is in the passenger
Children on page 3-36. side instrument panel.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
The driver knee airbag is below the Driver Side Shown, Passenger Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,
steering column. The front outboard Side Similar Passenger Side Similar
passenger knee airbag is below the The seat-mounted side impact The second row seat-mounted side
glove box. airbags for the driver and front impact airbags are in the sides of
outboard passenger are in the side the rear seatback closest to
of the seatbacks closest to the door. the door.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
front outboard passenger, and { Warning
second row outboard passengers
are in the ceiling above the side If something is between an
windows. occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Warning (Continued)
When Should an Airbag It depends on what is hit, the
direction of the impact, and how
Inflate? quickly the vehicle slows down.
or even death. The path of an This vehicle is equipped with
inflating airbag must be kept Frontal airbags may inflate at
airbags. See Airbag System on different crash speeds depending on
clear. Do not put anything page 3-20. Airbags are designed to
between an occupant and an whether the vehicle hits an object
inflate if the impact exceeds the straight on or at an angle, and
airbag, and do not attach or put specific airbag system's deployment
anything on the steering wheel whether the object is fixed or
threshold. Deployment thresholds moving, rigid or deformable, narrow
hub or on or near any other are used to predict how severe a or wide.
airbag covering. crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain Frontal airbags are not intended to
Do not use seat accessories that inflate during vehicle rollovers, in
block the inflation path of a the occupants. The vehicle has
electronic sensors that help the rear impacts, or in many side
seat-mounted side impact airbag. impacts.
airbag system determine the
Never secure anything to the roof severity of the impact. Deployment In addition, the vehicle has
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags thresholds can vary with specific advanced technology frontal
by routing a rope or tie‐down vehicle design. airbags. Advanced technology
through any door or window Frontal airbags are designed to frontal airbags adjust the restraint
opening. If you do, the path of an inflate in moderate to severe frontal according to crash severity.
inflating roof-rail airbag will be or near frontal crashes to help Knee airbags are designed to inflate
blocked. reduce the potential for severe in moderate to severe frontal or
injuries, mainly to the driver's or near frontal impacts. Knee airbags
front outboard passenger's head are not designed to inflate during
and chest. vehicle rollovers, in rear impacts,
Whether the frontal airbags will or or in many side impacts.
should inflate is not based primarily
on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Seat-mounted side impact airbags In any particular crash, no one can moderate to severe side collisions,
are designed to inflate in moderate say whether an airbag should have even belted occupants can contact
to severe side crashes depending inflated simply because of the the inside of the vehicle.
on the location of the impact. vehicle damage or repair costs. Airbags supplement the protection
Seat-mounted side impact airbags provided by safety belts by
are not designed to inflate in frontal What Makes an Airbag distributing the force of the impact
impacts, near frontal impacts,
rollovers, or rear impacts.
Inflate? more evenly over the
occupant's body.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag In a deployment event, the sensing
is designed to inflate on the side of system sends an electrical signal Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
the vehicle that is struck. triggering a release of gas from the are designed to help contain the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the head and chest of occupants in the
Roof-rail airbags are designed to outboard seating positions in the
airbag causing the bag to break out
inflate in moderate to severe side first and second rows. The rollover
of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
crashes depending on the location capable roof-rail airbags are
and related hardware are all part of
of the impact. In addition, these designed to help reduce the risk of
the airbag module.
roof-rail airbags are designed to full or partial ejection in rollover
inflate during a rollover or in a For airbag locations, see Where Are
events, although no system can
severe frontal impact. Roof-rail the Airbags? on page 3-22.
prevent all such ejections.
airbags are not designed to inflate in
rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags How Does an Airbag But airbags would not help in many
will inflate when either side of the types of collisions, primarily
vehicle is struck, if the sensing
Restrain? because the occupant's motion is
system predicts that the vehicle is In moderate to severe frontal or not toward those airbags. See When
about to roll over on its side, or in a near frontal collisions, even belted Should an Airbag Inflate? on
severe frontal impact. occupants can contact the steering page 3-24.
wheel or the instrument panel. In Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
What Will You See after the hazard warning flashers by

an Airbag Inflates?
{ Warning using the controls for those
features.
After the frontal airbags and When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so could cause breathing problems { Warning
quickly that some people may not for people with a history of A crash severe enough to inflate
even realize an airbag inflated. asthma or other breathing trouble. the airbags may have also
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least To avoid this, everyone in the damaged important functions in
partially inflated for some time after vehicle should get out as soon as the vehicle, such as the fuel
they inflate. Some components of it is safe to do so. If you have system, brake and steering
the airbag module may be hot for breathing problems but cannot systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
several minutes. For location of the get out of the vehicle after an appears to be drivable after a
airbags, see Where Are the airbag inflates, then get fresh air moderate crash, there may be
Airbags? on page 3-22. by opening a window or a door. concealed damage that could
The parts of the airbag that come If you experience breathing make it difficult to safely operate
into contact with you may be warm, problems following an airbag the vehicle.
but not too hot to touch. There may deployment, you should seek
be some smoke and dust coming medical attention. Use caution if you should attempt
from the vents in the deflated to restart the engine after a crash
airbags. Airbag inflation does not has occurred.
The vehicle has a feature that may
prevent the driver from seeing out of automatically unlock the doors, turn
the windshield or being able to steer on the interior lamps, turn on the
the vehicle, nor does it prevent hazard warning flashers, and shut
people from leaving the vehicle. off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
off the interior lamps, and turn off
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
In many crashes severe enough to

. Let only qualified technicians
inflate the airbag, windshields are work on the airbag systems.
broken by vehicle deformation. Improper service can mean that
Additional windshield breakage may an airbag system will not work
also occur from the front outboard properly. See your dealer for
passenger airbag. service.
. Airbags are designed to inflate United States
only once. After an airbag
Passenger Sensing
inflates, you will need some new System
parts for the airbag system. The vehicle has a passenger
If you do not get them, the sensing system for the front
airbag system will not be there outboard passenger position. The
to help protect you in another passenger airbag status indicator
crash. A new system will include will light on the overhead console
airbag modules and possibly Canada
when the vehicle is started.
other parts. The service manual The words ON and OFF or the
for the vehicle covers the need symbol for on and off will be visible
to replace other parts. during the system check. See
. The vehicle has a crash sensing Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
and diagnostic module which on page 5-16.
records information after a The passenger sensing system
crash. See Vehicle Data turns off the front outboard
Recording and Privacy on passenger frontal airbag and knee
page 13-13 and Event Data airbag, under certain conditions. No
Recorders on page 13-14. other airbag is affected by the
passenger sensing system.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
The passenger sensing system

works with sensors that are part of { Warning Warning (Continued)
the front outboard passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints
the presence of a properly seated restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the
occupant and determine if the front or killed if the passenger frontal airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
outboard passenger frontal airbag airbag inflates. This is because forward-facing child restraint in
and knee airbag should be allowed the back of the rear-facing child the front outboard passenger
to inflate or not. restraint would be very close to seat, always move the seat as far
the inflating airbag. A child in a back as it will go. It is better to
According to accident statistics,
forward-facing child restraint can secure the child restraint in a
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in a correct be seriously injured or killed if the rear seat.
child restraint for their weight passenger frontal airbag inflates
and size. and the passenger seat is in a The passenger sensing system is
forward position. designed to turn off the front
Whenever possible, children aged
12 and under should be secured in Even if the passenger sensing outboard passenger airbag and
a rear seating position. system has turned off the front knee airbag if:
outboard passenger airbag(s), no . The front outboard passenger
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
system is fail-safe. No one can seat is unoccupied.
the front. This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not . The system determines that an
if the airbag inflates. inflate under some unusual
infant is present in a child
circumstance, even though the restraint.
airbag(s) are off.
. A front outboard passenger
(Continued)
takes his/her weight off of the
seat for a period of time.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. There is a critical problem with off the front outboard passenger If the On Indicator Is Lit for a
the airbag system or the frontal airbag and knee airbag, Child Restraint
passenger sensing system. depending upon the person’s
seating posture and body build. The passenger sensing system is
When the passenger sensing designed to turn off the front
system has turned off the front Everyone in the vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should outboard passenger frontal airbag
outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag if the system
and knee airbag, the off indicator wear a safety belt properly —
whether or not there is an airbag for determines that an infant is present
will light and stay lit to remind you in a child restraint. If a child restraint
that the airbags are off. See that person.
has been installed and the on
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator indicator is lit:
on page 5-16. { Warning 1. Turn the vehicle off.
The passenger sensing system is
If the airbag readiness light ever 2. Remove the child restraint from
designed to turn on the front
comes on and stays on, it means the vehicle.
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag anytime the system that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help 3. Remove any additional items
senses that a person of adult size is from the seat such as blankets,
sitting properly in the front outboard avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right cushions, seat covers, seat
passenger seat. heaters, or seat massagers.
away. See Airbag Readiness
When the passenger sensing Light on page 5-15 for more 4. Reinstall the child restraint
system has allowed the airbags to following the directions provided
information, including important
be enabled, the on indicator will light by the child restraint
safety information.
and stay lit as a reminder that the manufacturer and refer to
airbags are active. Securing Child Restraints (Front
For some children, including Passenger Seat) on page 3-48
children in child restraints, and for or Securing Child Restraints
very small adults, the passenger (Rear Seat) on page 3-51.
sensing system may or may not turn
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an 2. Remove any additional material
restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant from the seat, such as blankets,
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, cushions, seat covers, seat
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly heaters, or seat massagers. Also
recline the vehicle seatback and remove laptops, or other
adjust the seat cushion, electronic devices.
if adjustable, to make sure that 3. Place the seatback in the fully
the vehicle seatback is not upright position.
pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion. 4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
Also make sure the child cushion, with legs comfortably
restraint is not trapped under the extended.
vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
restraint. See Head Restraints person remain in this position for
on page 3-2. two to three minutes after the on
If a person of adult size is sitting in
indicator is lit.
6. Restart the vehicle. the front outboard passenger seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could be
The passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the
because that person is not sitting { Warning
properly in the seat. Use the
airbags for a child in a child If the front outboard passenger
following steps to allow the system
restraint depending upon the airbag is turned off for an
to detect that person and enable the
child's size. It is better to secure adult-sized occupant, the airbag
front outboard passenger frontal
a child restraint in a rear seat. will not be able to inflate and help
airbag and knee airbag:
protect that person in a crash,
1. Turn the vehicle off. resulting in an increased risk of
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
operates. We recommend that you child restraint or child occupant

Warning (Continued) not use seat covers or other is on the seat. If the passenger
aftermarket equipment except when frontal airbag and passenger
serious injury or even death. An approved by GM for your specific knee airbag are turned on, the
adult-sized occupant should not vehicle. See Adding Equipment to on indicator will be lit.
ride in the front outboard the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
passenger seat, if the passenger If the front passenger seat gets wet,
page 3-32 for more information dry the seat immediately. If the
airbag off indicator is lit. about modifications that can affect airbag readiness light is lit, do not
how the system operates. install a child restraint or allow
Additional Factors Affecting A wet seat can affect the anyone to occupy the seat. See
System Operation performance of the passenger Airbag Readiness Light on
sensing system. Here is how: page 5-15 for important safety
Safety belts help keep the
. The passenger sensing system information.
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and may turn off the passenger The on indicator may be lit if an
braking, which helps the passenger frontal airbag and passenger object, such as a briefcase,
sensing system maintain the knee airbag when liquid is handbag, grocery bag, laptop,
passenger airbag status. See soaked into the seat. If this or other electronic device, is put on
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” happens, the off indicator will be an unoccupied seat. If this is not
in the Index for additional lit, and the airbag readiness light desired, remove the object from
information about the importance of on the instrument panel will also the seat.
proper restraint use. be lit.
A thick layer of additional material, . Liquid pooled on the seat that
such as a blanket or cushion, has not soaked in may make it
or aftermarket equipment such as more likely that the passenger
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat sensing system will turn on the
massagers can affect how well the passenger frontal airbag and
passenger sensing system passenger knee airbag while a
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
diagnostic module, steering wheel,

{ Warning { Warning instrument panel, roof-rail airbag
modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
Stowing of articles under the For up to 10 seconds after the garnish trim, overhead console,
passenger seat or between the vehicle is turned off and the front sensors, side impact sensors,
passenger seat cushion and battery is disconnected, an airbag or airbag wiring.
seatback may interfere with the can still inflate during improper
proper operation of the passenger service. You can be injured if you Your dealer and the service manual
sensing system. are close to an airbag when it have information about the location
of the airbag sensors, sensing and
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
diagnostic module, and airbag
They are probably part of the
Servicing the airbag system. Be sure to follow
wiring.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle proper service procedures, and In addition, the vehicle has a
make sure the person performing passenger sensing system for the
Airbags affect how the vehicle front outboard passenger position,
should be serviced. There are parts work for you is qualified to do so.
which includes sensors that are part
of the airbag system in several of the passenger seat. The
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have
Adding Equipment to the passenger sensing system may not
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle operate properly if the original seat
information about servicing the trim is replaced with non-GM
vehicle and the airbag system. To Adding accessories that change the covers, upholstery, or trim; or with
purchase a service manual, see vehicle's frame, bumper system, GM covers, upholstery, or trim
Service Publications Ordering height, front end, or side sheet designed for a different vehicle. Any
Information on page 13-11. metal, may keep the airbag system object, such as an aftermarket seat
from working properly. The heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
operation of the airbag system can or device, installed under or on top
also be affected by changing or of the seat fabric, could also
moving any parts of the front seats, interfere with the operation of the
safety belts, the airbag sensing and passenger sensing system. This
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
could either prevent proper Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger The airbag system does not need Parts after a Crash
sensing system from properly regularly scheduled maintenance or
turning off the passenger airbag(s). replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
{ Warning
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3-27. Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the airbag
page 5-15. systems in the vehicle.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail A damaged airbag system may
airbags, see Different Size Tires
and Wheels on page 10-59 for { Caution not work properly and may not
protect you and your
additional important information. If an airbag covering is damaged, passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
If you have to modify your vehicle opened, or broken, the airbag in serious injury or even death. To
because you have a disability and may not work properly. Do not help make sure the airbag
you have questions about whether open or break the airbag systems are working properly
the modifications will affect the coverings. If there are any after a crash, have them
vehicle's airbag system, or if you opened or broken airbag inspected and any necessary
have questions about whether the coverings, have the airbag replacements made as soon as
airbag system will be affected if the covering and/or airbag module possible.
vehicle is modified for any other replaced. For the location of the
reason, call Customer Assistance. airbags, see Where Are the
See Customer Assistance Offices If an airbag inflates, you will need to
Airbags? on page 3-22. See your
on page 13-3. replace airbag system parts. See
dealer for service. your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly. Have
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
the vehicle serviced right away. See Child Restraints The manufacturer instructions that
Airbag Readiness Light on come with the booster seat state the
page 5-15 for more information. weight and height limitations for that
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a
Vehicles with eAssist have a high
voltage battery and a standard 12‐ lap-shoulder belt until the child
volt battery. If an airbag inflates or passes the fit test below:
the vehicle has been in a crash, the . Sit all the way back on the seat.
vehicle's sensing system may shut Do the knees bend at the seat
down the high voltage system. edge? If yes, continue. If no,
When this occurs, the high voltage return to the booster seat.
battery is disconnected and the . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
vehicle is not charging the 12‐volt Does the shoulder belt rest on
battery or the electrical system. The the shoulder? If yes, continue.
vehicle may start but it shuts down If no, try using the rear safety
once the 12‐volt battery is depleted. belt comfort guide. See “Rear
When the 12‐volt battery is Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
depleted, the vehicle will not start under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
and the on‐board jump start feature Older children who have outgrown
page 3-15. If the shoulder belt
is disabled. The airbag readiness booster seats should wear the
still does not rest on the
light and/or the 12‐volt battery vehicle safety belts.
shoulder, then return to the
warning light are displayed. Before booster seat.
the vehicle can be operated again, it
must be serviced at your dealer. . Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Can proper safety belt fit be According to accident statistics,
maintained for the length of the children are safer when properly
trip? If yes, continue. If no, restrained in a rear seating position.
return to the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not
Q: What is the proper way to buckled up can strike other people
wear safety belts? who are buckled up, or can be
A: An older child should wear a thrown out of the vehicle. Older
lap-shoulder belt and get the children need to use safety belts
additional restraint a shoulder properly.
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or { Warning
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just Never allow more than one child
touching the top of the thighs. to wear the same safety belt. The { Warning
This applies belt force to the safety belt cannot properly spread Never allow a child to wear the
child's pelvic bones in a crash. the impact forces. In a crash, they safety belt with the shoulder belt
It should never be worn over the can be crushed together and behind their back. A child can be
abdomen, which could cause seriously injured. A safety belt seriously injured by not wearing
severe or even fatal internal must be used by only one person
injuries in a crash. the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
at a time. crash, the child would not be
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort restrained by the shoulder belt.
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on The child could move too far
page 3-15. forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Warning (Continued)
Infants and Young Every time infants and young
children ride in vehicles, they should
Children have the protection provided by
belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs appropriate child restraints. Neither
applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants and the vehicle's safety belt system nor
That could cause serious or fatal all other children. Neither the its airbag system is designed
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and for them.
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the
the chest. Children who are not restrained
need, for everyone, to use safety properly can strike other people,
restraints. In fact, the law in every or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be { Warning
restrained while in a vehicle.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
{ Warning crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
Children can be seriously injured
possible to hold it during a crash.
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
For example, in a crash at only
wrapped around their neck and
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
the safety belt continues to
infant will suddenly become a
tighten. Never leave children
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
unattended in a vehicle and never
arms. An infant should be
allow children to play with the
secured in an appropriate
safety belts.
restraint.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
weight, height, and age but also

Warning (Continued) whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
seat, always move the front vehicle in which it will be used.
passenger seat as far back as it
will go. For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
{ Warning The restraint manufacturer
Children who are up against, instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
or very close to, any airbag when
height limitations for a particular
it inflates can be seriously injured
child restraint. In addition, there
or killed. Never put a rear-facing are many kinds of restraints
child restraint in the right front available for children with
seat. Secure a rear-facing child Q: What are the different types of
special needs.
restraint in a rear seat. It is also add-on child restraints?
better to secure a forward-facing A: Add-on child restraints, which
child restraint in a rear seat. If you are purchased by the vehicle
must secure a forward-facing owner, are available in four basic
child restraint in the right front types. Selection of a particular
(Continued) restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Child Restraint Systems

{ Warning { Warning
To reduce the risk of neck and A young child's hip bones are still
head injury during a crash, infants so small that the vehicle's regular
need complete support. In a safety belt may not remain low on
crash, if an infant is in a the hip bones, as it should.
rear-facing child restraint, the Instead, it may settle up around
crash forces can be distributed the child's abdomen. In a crash,
across the strongest part of an the belt would apply force on a
infant's body, the back and body area that is unprotected by
shoulders. Infants should always any bony structure. This alone
be secured in rear-facing child could cause serious or fatal
restraints. injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a Rear-Facing Infant Seat
crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat provides
always be secured in appropriate restraint with the seating surface
child restraints. against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ Warning
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
Forward-Facing Child Seat Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat provides A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
restraint for the child's body with the designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury,
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3-41.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Children can be endangered in a Administration (NHTSA) website to Whenever possible, children aged
crash if the child restraint is not locate the nearest child safety seat 12 and under should be secured in
properly secured in the vehicle. inspection station. For CPST a rear seating position.
When securing an add-on child availability in Canada, check with Never put a rear-facing child seat in
restraint, refer to the instructions Transport Canada or the Provincial the front. This is because the risk to
that come with the restraint which Ministry of Transportation office. the rear-facing child is so great if the
may be on the restraint itself or in a Securing the Child Within the airbag deploys.
booklet, or both, and to this manual. Child Restraint
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
{ Warning
available, obtain a replacement { Warning A child in a rear-facing child
copy from the manufacturer. A child can be seriously injured or restraint can be seriously injured
Keep in mind that an unsecured killed in a crash if the child is not or killed if the front passenger
child restraint can move around in a properly secured in the child airbag inflates. This is because
collision or sudden stop and injure restraint. Secure the child the back of the rear-facing child
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly following the instructions restraint would be very close to
properly secure any child restraint in that came with that child restraint. the inflating airbag. A child in a
the vehicle — even when no child is forward-facing child restraint can
in it. be seriously injured or killed if the
In some areas of the United States Where to Put the front passenger airbag inflates
and Canada, Certified Child Restraint and the passenger seat is in a
Passenger Safety Technicians forward position.
(CPSTs) are available to inspect children and infants are safer when Even if the passenger sensing
and demonstrate how to correctly properly restrained in a child system has turned off the front
use and install child restraints. In restraint system or infant restraint passenger frontal airbag, no
the U.S., refer to the National system secured in a rear seating
Highway Traffic Safety (Continued)
position.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Warning (Continued)
Child restraints and booster seats Lower Anchors and
vary considerably in size, and some
may fit in certain seating positions
Tethers for Children
system is fail-safe. No one can better than others. Always make (LATCH System)
guarantee that an airbag will not sure the child restraint is properly
deploy under some unusual The LATCH system secures a child
secured. restraint during driving or in a crash.
circumstance, even though it is
turned off. Depending on where you place the LATCH attachments on the child
child restraint and the size of the restraint are used to attach the child
Secure rear-facing child restraints child restraint, you may not be able restraint to the anchors in the
in a rear seat, even if the airbag to access adjacent safety belt vehicle. The LATCH system is
is off. If you secure a assemblies or LATCH anchors for designed to make installation of a
forward-facing child restraint in additional passengers or child child restraint easier.
the front seat, always move the restraints. Adjacent seating In order to use the LATCH system in
front passenger seat as far back positions should not be used if the your vehicle, you need a child
as it will go. It is better to secure child restraint prevents access to or restraint that has LATCH
the child restraint in a rear seat. interferes with the routing of the attachments. LATCH-compatible
safety belt. rear-facing and forward-facing child
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3-27 for additional Wherever a child restraint is seats can be properly installed
information. installed, be sure to secure the child using either the LATCH anchors or
restraint properly. the vehicle’s safety belts. Do not
use both the safety belts and the
When securing a child restraint in a Keep in mind that an unsecured
LATCH anchorage system to secure
rear seating position, study the child restraint can move around in a
a rear-facing or forward-facing
instructions that came with the child collision or sudden stop and injure
child seat.
restraint to make sure it is people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in Booster seats use the vehicle’s
compatible with this vehicle.
the vehicle — even when no child is safety belts to secure the child in
in it. the booster seat. If the manufacturer
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
recommends that the booster seat The following explains how to attach Top Tether Anchor
be secured with the LATCH system, a child restraint with these
this can be done as long as the attachments in the vehicle.
booster seat can be positioned Not all vehicle seating positions or
properly and there is no interference child restraints have lower anchors
with the proper positioning of the and attachments or top tether
lap-shoulder belt on the child. anchors and attachments.
Make sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint, Lower Anchors
and also the instructions in this
manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of
child restraint. A child restraint must the child restraint to the vehicle.
never be installed using only the top A top tether anchor is built into the
tether and anchor. vehicle. The top tether
attachment (2) on the child restraint
The LATCH anchorage system can connects to the top tether anchor in
be used until the combined weight the vehicle in order to reduce the
of the child plus the child restraint is forward movement and rotation of
29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety belt Lower anchors (1) are metal bars the child restraint during driving or in
alone instead of the LATCH built into the vehicle. There are two a crash.
anchorage system once the lower anchors for each LATCH
combined weight is more than seating position that will
29.5 kg (65 lbs). accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (2).
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
The child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Anchor Locations
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with To assist in locating the lower
or without the top tether being anchors, each rear anchor position
attached. Others require the top has a label, near the crease
tether always to be attached. In between the seatback and the seat
Canada, the law requires that cushion.
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the child
Rear Seat
restraint.
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating To assist in locating the top tether
positions with two lower anchors. anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is on the cover.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

children and infants are safer when { Warning
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint Do not attach more than one child
system secured in a rear seating restraint to a single anchor.
position. See Where to Put the Attaching more than one child
Restraint on page 3-40 for restraint to a single anchor could
additional information. cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
Securing a Child Restraint during a crash. A child or others
Designed for the LATCH could be injured. To reduce the
System risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
The top tether anchors are under
the covers, behind the rear seat, on { Warning child restraint per anchor.
the filler panel. Be sure to use an If a LATCH-type child restraint is
anchor on the same side of the not attached to anchors, the child
vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be
restraint will not be able to protect { Warning
the child correctly. In a crash, the
placed. Children can be seriously injured
child could be seriously injured or
Do not secure a child restraint in a or strangled if a shoulder belt is
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
position without a top tether anchor wrapped around their neck and
restraint properly using the
if a national or local law requires the safety belt continues to
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
that the top tether be attached, or if tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts to secure the restraint,
the instructions that come with the belts behind the child restraint so
following the instructions that
child restraint say that the top tether children cannot reach them. Pull
came with the child restraint and
must be attached. the shoulder belt all the way out
the instructions in this manual.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
If you need to secure more than one

Warning (Continued) child restraint in the rear seat, see
Where to Put the Restraint on
of the retractor to set the lock, page 3-40.
if the vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed. You cannot secure three child
restraints using the LATCH anchors
in the rear seat at the same time,
but you can install two of them.
{ Caution If you want to do this, install one
LATCH child restraint in the right
Do not let the LATCH rear seating position, and install the
attachments rub against the other one either in the left rear
vehicle’s safety belts. This may seating position or in the center There are five lower LATCH anchors
damage these parts. If necessary, seating position. If you need to in the rear seat.
move buckled safety belts to install child restraints in both the
center and left rear seating
. Use anchors 1 and 2 when
avoid rubbing the LATCH
positions, the one in the center installing a child restraint using
attachments. LATCH in the right rear seating
seating position will need to be
Do not fold the empty rear seat secured using the vehicle safety position.
with a safety belt buckled. This belts instead of the LATCH anchors. . Use anchors 3 and 4 when
could damage the safety belt or installing a child restraint using
the seat. Unbuckle and return the Refer to the following illustration to
learn which anchors to use. LATCH in the center rear seating
safety belt to its stowed position, position.
before folding the seat. . Use anchors 4 and 5 when
installing a child restraint using
LATCH in left rear seating
position.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Installing child restraints using child restraint manufacturer 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
LATCH in the center and left rear instructions and the instructions recommends that the top tether
seating positions at the same time is in this manual. be attached, attach and tighten
prohibited. 1.1. Find the lower anchors for the top tether to the top tether
Make sure to attach the child the desired seating anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
restraint at the proper anchor position. child restraint instructions and
location. the following steps:
1.2. For outboard rear seating
This system is designed to make positions, put the head 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
installation of child restraints easier. restraint in the upright Open the cover to expose
When using lower anchors, do not position. See Head the anchor.
use the vehicle's safety belts. Restraints on page 3-2. 2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
Instead use the vehicle's anchors 1.3. Put the child restraint on the top tether according to
and child restraint attachments to the seat. the child restraint
secure the restraints. Some instructions and the
restraints also use another vehicle 1.4. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child following instructions:
anchor to secure a top tether.
restraint to the lower
1. Attach and tighten the lower anchors.
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to the
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
If the position you are using If the position you are using
does not have a head has an adjustable head
restraint and you are using restraint and you are using
a single tether, route the a dual tether, route the
tether over the seatback. tether under the head
restraint and around the
head restraint posts.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
If the position you are using securely held in place. To check,
has an adjustable head grasp the child restraint at the
restraint and you are using LATCH path and attempt to
a single tether, route the move it side to side and back
tether under the head and forth. There should be no
restraint and in between the more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
If the position you are using head restraint posts. movement for proper installation.
does not have a head
restraint and you are using
a dual tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints

Parts After a Crash (Front Passenger Seat)
{ Warning
This vehicle has airbags. A rear A child in a rear-facing child
{ Warning seat is a safer place to secure a restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
forward-facing child restraint. See
A crash can damage the LATCH Where to Put the Restraint on passenger airbag inflates. This is
system in the vehicle. A damaged page 3-40. because the back of the
LATCH system may not properly rear-facing child restraint would
secure the child restraint, In addition, the vehicle has a be very close to the inflating
resulting in serious injury or even passenger sensing system which is
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
designed to turn off the front
death in a crash. To help make child restraint can be seriously
sure the LATCH system is injured or killed if the right front
and knee airbag under certain
working properly after a crash, conditions. See Passenger Sensing passenger airbag inflates and the
see your dealer to have the System on page 3-27 and passenger seat is in a forward
system inspected and any Passenger Airbag Status Indicator position.
necessary replacements made as on page 5-16 for more information, Even if the passenger sensing
soon as possible. including important safety system has turned off the right
information. front passenger frontal airbag, no
If the vehicle has the LATCH system A label on the sun visor says, system is fail-safe. No one can
and it was being used during a “Never put a rear-facing child seat in guarantee that an airbag will not
crash, new LATCH system parts the front.” This is because the risk to deploy under some unusual
may be needed. the rear-facing child is so great, circumstance, even though it is
New parts and repairs may be if the airbag deploys. turned off.
necessary even if the LATCH (Continued)
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Do not secure a child seat in a the vehicle. See Passenger

Warning (Continued) position without a top tether anchor Airbag Status Indicator on
if a national or local law requires page 5-16.
Secure rear-facing child restraints that the top tether be anchored, or if
in a rear seat, even if the airbag 2. Put the child restraint on
the instructions that come with the the seat.
is off. If you secure a child restraint say that the top strap
forward-facing child restraint in must be anchored. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the right front seat, always move the lap and shoulder portions of
the front passenger seat as far In Canada, the law requires that the vehicle's safety belt through
forward-facing child restraints have or around the restraint. The child
back as it will go. It is better to
a top tether, and that the tether be restraint instructions will show
secure the child restraint in a
attached. you how.
rear seat.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
See Passenger Sensing System belt to secure the child restraint in
on page 3-27 for additional this position. Follow the instructions
information. that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
If the child restraint has the LATCH will go before securing the
system, see Lower Anchors and forward-facing child restraint.
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-41 for how and When the passenger sensing
where to install the child restraint system has turned off the front
using LATCH. If a child restraint is outboard passenger frontal
secured using a safety belt and it airbag and knee airbag, the off
uses a top tether, see Lower indicator on the passenger
Anchors and Tethers for Children airbag status indicator should
(LATCH System) on page 3-41 for light and stay lit when you start
top tether anchor locations.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
4. Push the latch plate into the 7. Before placing a child in the
buckle until it clicks. child restraint, make sure it is
Position the release button on securely held in place. To check,
the buckle so that the safety belt grasp the child restraint at the
could be quickly unbuckled if safety belt path and attempt to
necessary. move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
6. To tighten the belt, push down status indicator will come on and
on the child restraint, pull the stay on when the vehicle is started.
shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
and feed the shoulder belt back On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
into the retractor. When installing Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
a forward-facing child restraint, it System on page 3-27.
may be helpful to use your knee
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way To remove the child restraint,
out of the retractor to set the to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
lock. When the retractor lock is let it return to the stowed position.
set, the belt can be tightened but Try to pull the belt out of the
not pulled out of the retractor. retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints have
(Rear Seat) a top tether, and that the tether be
When securing a child restraint in a attached.
rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be
restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position.
If the child restraint has the LATCH Be sure to follow the instructions
system, see Lower Anchors and that came with the child restraint.
Tethers for Children (LATCH Secure the child in the child restraint
System) on page 3-41 for how and when and as the instructions say.
where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the
using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear buckle until it clicks.
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on
safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3-40. the buckle so that the safety belt
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
1. Put the child restraint on could be quickly unbuckled if
Children (LATCH System) on
the seat. necessary.
page 3-41 for top tether anchor
locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of
position without a top tether anchor the vehicle safety belt through or
if a national or local law requires around the restraint. The child
that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
the instructions that come with the you how.
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-41 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed,
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint,
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage If equipped with storage behind the

fuse box, push on the cover and
Compartments release to open.
Storage Compartments
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1 { Warning
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Do not store heavy or sharp
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 objects in storage compartments.
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 In a crash, these objects may
Umbrella Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 cause the cover to open and
could result in injury.
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Management
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Instrument Panel Storage
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
If equipped with storage behind the

radio, press P and hold to open.
There is a USB port inside. See the
infotainment manual.
Press P and hold again to close.
Keep the storage area closed when
not in use.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
4-2 Storage
The storage area cannot be Cupholders Center Console Storage

operated with P when valet mode
is enabled. See “Valet Mode” in
page 5-40.
Glove Box
Pull the rear seat armrest down to Push the cover down and release to
access. access. To close, push the cover
again and release. There is an
accessory power outlet inside.
Pull the handle up to open.

2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Storage 4-3
See Power Outlets on page 5-6, Additional Storage

Auxiliary Jack on page 7-17, and
USB Port on page 7-14. If equipped Features
with uplevel auxiliary players, see
the infotainment manual. Cargo Management
System
Umbrella Storage
Press the button and lift to access.

There is a removable tray on the top
of the console. There is an auxiliary
input jack, USB port, and accessory
power outlet inside.
If equipped, there may be an
additional USB port and an SD card
reader inside. There is storage under the load floor
Slide an umbrella into the opening for small items. Pull the load floor
The rear of the center console has a on the driver or passenger door.
storage area and an accessory handle to access.
power outlet. Secure the load floor handle to seal
the access to the spare tire.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
4-4 Storage
Convenience Net
The vehicle may have a

convenience net in the trunk. The
net (1) attaches to the convenience
net hooks (2). Put small loads
behind the net. Do not use the net
for heavy loads.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15

Passenger Airbag Status
Information Displays
Power Flows
Controls Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-17
(eAssist Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Energy Information
Malfunction (eAssist Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Controls Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Driver Information
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Brake System Warning Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Electric Parking Brake Vehicle Messages
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Service Electric Parking Brake Battery Voltage and Charging
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Brake System Messages . . . . 5-31
Clock (Base Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Clock (Uplevel Radio) . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Lane Departure Warning Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-31
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-32
(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-22 Engine Cooling System
Indicators Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Warning Lights, Gauges, and StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-23 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-33
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Traction Control System Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-34
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-23 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-34
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-34
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-24 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-24 Object Detection System
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Ride Control System
Engine Coolant Temperature Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-37
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-37 Controls Power Tilt Wheel

Starting the Vehicle
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Steering Wheel
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-39 Adjustment
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-39
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-40
Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-40
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-46 If equipped with this feature, press
Universal Remote System the control to move the steering
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 wheel up and down or forward and
Universal Remote System rearward.
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
To adjust the steering wheel: Do not adjust the steering wheel
1. Pull the lever down. while driving.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Steering Wheel Controls Heated Steering Wheel
The favorite and volume switches

are on the back of the steering
Some audio controls can be wheel.
adjusted at the steering wheel. 1. Favorites: Press to select the ( (Heated Steering Wheel): For
next or previous favorite when vehicles with a heated steering
g (Talk): For vehicles with OnStar® wheel, press to turn on or off. A light
or a Bluetooth® system, press to listening to AM, FM,
or SiriusXM® (if equipped), on the button displays when the
interact with those systems. See feature is turned on.
OnStar Overview on page 14-1 or or the next or previous track
“Bluetooth (Overview)” in the when listening to a media The steering wheel takes about
infotainment manual. source. three minutes to start heating.
c (Phone/Mute): Press to reject 2. Volume: Press to increase or
an incoming call, or end a current decrease the volume. Horn
call. Press to mute or unmute the Press a on the steering wheel pad
infotainment system when not on to sound the horn.
a call.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Windshield Wiper/Washer INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Move If the windshield wiper lever is then
the lever up to INT for intermittent moved to OFF before the driver
wipes, then turn the x INT band door is opened or within 10 minutes,
up for more frequent wipes or down the wipers will restart and move to
for less frequent wipes. the base of the windshield.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off. If the ignition is put in OFF while the
wipers are performing wipes due to
8 (Mist): For a single wipe, briefly windshield washing, the wipers
move the wiper lever down. For continue to run until they reach the
With the ignition in ACC/ several wipes, hold the wiper base of the windshield.
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, lever down.
move the windshield wiper lever to n L (Windshield Washer): Pull
select the wiper speed. Clear snow and ice from the wiper the windshield wiper lever toward
blades and windshield before using you to spray washer fluid and
HI: Use for fast wipes. them. If frozen to the windshield, activate the wipers. The wipers will
LO: Use for slow wipes. carefully loosen or thaw them. continue until the lever is released
Damaged blades should be or the maximum wash time is
replaced. See Wiper Blade reached. When the lever is
Replacement on page 10-29. released, additional wipes may
Heavy snow or ice can overload the occur depending on how long the
wiper motor. windshield washer had been
activated. See Washer Fluid on
Wiper Parking page 10-24 for information on filling
If the ignition is put in OFF while the the windshield washer fluid
wipers are on LO, HI, or INT, they reservoir.
will immediately stop.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
will automatically determine when a If auto timing is set, the time

{ Warning GPS signal is restored and provide displayed on the clock may not
a heading again. See Compass update immediately when driving
In freezing weather, do not use Messages on page 5-31 for the into a new time zone.
the washer until the windshield is messages that may be displayed for
warmed. Otherwise the washer To set the clock display:
the compass.
fluid can form ice on the 1. Select Settings from the Home
windshield, blocking your vision. Clock (Base Radio) Page, then select Time and Date
Settings.
Setting the Time and Date 2. Select Clock Display.
Compass
To set the time or date: 3. Turn the MENU knob to Off
The vehicle may have a compass
display on the Driver Information 1. Select SETTINGS from the or On.
Center (DIC). The compass receives Home Page, then select Time 4. Press the MENU knob to select.
its heading and other information and Date Settings.
from the Global Positioning 2. Select the desired function. Press q BACK to go to the last
System (GPS) antenna, menu and save the changes.
3. Turn the MENU knob to increase
StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speed
or decrease the value. Clock (Uplevel Radio)
information.
4. Press the MENU knob to go to
The compass system is designed to Setting the Time and Date
the next value. After the last
operate for a certain number of
value is selected the system will To set the time or date:
miles or degrees of turn before
update and return to the
needing a signal from the GPS 1. Select Settings from the Home
satellites. When the compass SETTINGS menu. Press q Page, then select Time and Date
display shows CAL, drive the BACK to go to the last menu and Settings.
vehicle for a short distance in an save the changes.
2. Select the desired function.
open area where it can receive a
GPS signal. The compass system
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Inside the center console.
To set the time or date, press « or
ª to change the hour, minutes, . On the rear of the center { Caution
AM, or PM. console. Hanging heavy equipment from
To change the 12-24Hr setting, The outlet is powered when the the power outlet can cause
press the 12-24Hr button. ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ damage not covered by the
ACCESSORY, or until the driver vehicle warranty. The power
To turn Auto Set on and off, press
door is opened within 10 minutes of outlets are designed for
the Auto Set button.
turning off the vehicle. See Retained accessory power plugs only, such
If auto timing is set, the time Accessory Power (RAP) on as cell phone charge cords.
displayed on the clock may not page 9-24.
update immediately when driving
Open the protective cover to use the Always unplug electrical equipment
into a new time zone.
accessory power outlet. when not in use and do not plug in
Press q BACK to go to the last Certain electrical accessories may equipment that exceeds the
menu and save the changes or { to not be compatible with the maximum 20 amps rating.
return to the Home Page. accessory power outlets and could
overload vehicle or adapter fuses. Power Outlet 120 Volt
If there is a problem, see your Alternating Current
Power Outlets
dealer. The vehicle may have a power
The accessory power outlets can be outlet that can be used to plug in
used to plug in electrical equipment, When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the installation electrical equipment that uses a
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. maximum limit of 150 watts.
instructions included with the
There are three accessory power equipment. See Add-On Electrical
outlets: Equipment on page 9-66.
. Inside the front storage area
below the climate control
system.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
The indicator light does not come on The power outlet is not designed for
if the ignition is in LOCK/OFF; if no and may not work properly, if the
equipment is plugged into the outlet; following are plugged in:
or if the equipment is plugged in, but . Equipment with high initial peak
not fully seated in the outlet. wattage, such as
If equipment is connected using compressor-driven refrigerators
more than 150 watts or a system and electric power tools.
fault is detected, the equipment may . Other equipment requiring an
operate briefly then turn off. extremely stable power supply,
A protection circuit shuts off the such as
power supply and the indicator light microcomputer-controlled
turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug electric blankets or touch sensor
The power outlet is on the rear of the item and plug it back in or turn lamps.
the center console. the Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) off and then back on. See
An indicator light on the outlet turns Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on to show it is in use. The light on page 9-24. The power restarts
comes on when the ignition is in when equipment using 150 watts or
ON/RUN and equipment requiring less is plugged into the outlet and a
less than 150 watts is plugged into system fault is not detected.
the outlet, and no system fault is
detected.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Warning Lights, Warning lights come on when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
Gauges, and function. Some warning lights come driving, or when one of the gauges
on briefly when the engine is started shows there may be a problem,
Indicators to indicate they are working. check the section that explains what
Warning lights and gauges can Gauges can indicate when there to do. Follow this manual's advice.
signal that something is wrong could be a problem with a vehicle Waiting to do repairs can be costly
before it becomes serious enough function. Often gauges and warning and even dangerous.
to cause an expensive repair or lights work together to indicate a
replacement. Paying attention to the problem with the vehicle.
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Instrument Cluster
English Shown, Metric Similar

2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
English eAssist Shown, Metric eAssist Similar

2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Cluster Menu
. Info app. This is where you can Phone
view the selected Driver
There is an interactive display area Information Center (DIC) Press V to select the Phone app,
in the center of the instrument displays. See Driver Information then press p to enter the Phone
cluster. Center (DIC) on page 5-27. menu. In the Phone menu, if there is
. Audio no active phone call, view recent
calls, scroll through contacts,
. Phone or select from the favorites. If there
. Navigation is an active call, mute or unmute the
phone or switch to handset or
. Settings
handsfree operation.
Audio
Navigation
In the main view of the Audio app,
press w or x to scroll through Press V to select the Navigation
radio stations or move to the next/ app, then press p to enter the
previous track of a CD/USB/ Navigation menu. If there is no
Bluetooth device that is connected active route, you can resume the
to the vehicle. Press V to select the last route and turn the voice
Use the right steering wheel control
prompts on/off. If there is an active
to open and scroll through the Audio app, then press p to enter
different items and displays. route, press V to cancel route
the Audio menu. In the Audio menu
browse for music, select from the guidance or turn the voice prompts
Press o to access the cluster on/off.
favorites, or change the audio
applications. Use w or x to scroll source. Settings
through the list of available
applications. Not all applications will Press V to select the Settings app.
be available on all vehicles. Use w or x to scroll through the
items in the Settings menu.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Units: Press p while Units is Compass: In certain vehicles the Odometer

displayed to enter the Units menu. compass setting will allow for
manually setting the compass. The The odometer shows how far the
Choose English or metric units by vehicle has been driven, in either
user can set the zone and calibrate
pressing V while the desired item is kilometers or miles.
the compass. This setting page is
highlighted. only available on vehicles that are This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
Info Pages: Press p while Info equipped with Remote Compass odometer. If the vehicle needs a
Pages is displayed to enter the Info Module. new cluster installed, the new
Pages menu and select the items to Jump Start: The Jump Start odometer is set to the mileage of
be displayed in the Info App. See display is used to perform an the old odometer. If this is not
Driver Information Center (DIC) on on-board jump start for eAssist possible, it is set at zero and a label
page 5-27. vehicles. See “Jump Starting is put on the driver door to show the
(On-board with eAssist Only)” in the old mileage reading.
Speed Warning: The Speed
Warning display allows the driver to Index.
set a speed that they do not want to
Trip Odometer
exceed. To set the Speed Warning, Speedometer The trip odometer can show how far
press p when Speed Warning is The speedometer shows the the vehicle has been driven since
the trip odometer was last reset.
displayed. Press w or x to adjust vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per The trip odometer is accessed and
the value. Press V to set the speed.
hour (mph). reset through the Driver Information
Once the speed is set, this feature
Center (DIC). See Driver
can be turned off by pressing V Information Center (DIC) on
while viewing this page. If the page 5-27.
selected speed limit is exceeded, a
pop-up warning is displayed with a
chime.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Tachometer Fuel Gauge When the ignition is on, the fuel

gauge indicates about how much
The tachometer displays the engine fuel is left in the tank.
speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm). An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates the side of the vehicle the
For eAssist vehicles, when the fuel door is on.
ignition is in ON/RUN, the
tachometer indicates the vehicle When the indicator nears empty, the
status. When pointing to AUTO low fuel light comes on. There is still
STOP, the engine is off but the a little fuel left, but the fuel tank
vehicle is on and can move. The should be filled soon.
engine could auto start at any time. Here are four things that some
When the indicator points to OFF, owners ask about. None of these
the vehicle is off. show a problem with the fuel gauge:
Metric
When the engine is on, the . At the service station, the fuel
tachometer will indicate the engine’s pump shuts off before the gauge
revolutions per minute (rpm). The reads full.
tachometer may vary by several . It takes a little more or less fuel
hundred rpm’s, during auto stop
mode, when the engine is shutting to fill up than the gauge
off and restarting. indicated. For example, the
gauge indicated the tank was
A slight bump may be felt when the half full, but it actually took a
transmission is determining the little more or less than half the
most fuel efficient operating range. tank's capacity to fill the tank.
English
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
Engine Coolant
.
Temperature Gauge
The gauge takes a few seconds
to stabilize after the ignition is
turned on, and goes back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
English
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature.
Metric
If the gauge pointer moves toward
the shaded area, the engine is
too hot.
This reading indicates the same
thing as the warning light. It means
that the engine coolant has
overheated. If the vehicle has been
operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle, and turn off the engine as
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
soon as possible. See Engine If the driver safety belt is buckled, If the passenger safety belt is
Overheating on page 10-22 for more neither the light nor the chime buckled, neither the chime nor the
information. comes on. light comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt
Safety Belt Reminders warning light and chime may turn on
Reminder Light
Driver Safety Belt Reminder if an object is put on the seat such
There is a passenger safety belt as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
Light reminder light near the passenger bag, laptop, or other electronic
There is a driver safety belt airbag status indicator. See device. To turn off the warning light
reminder light on the instrument Passenger Sensing System on and/or chime, remove the object
cluster. page 3-27. from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light

This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag
system. The system check includes
the airbag sensor(s), passenger
When the vehicle is started, this When the vehicle is started, this
sensing system, the pretensioners,
light flashes and a chime may come light flashes and a chime may come
the airbag modules, the wiring, and
on to remind the driver to fasten on to remind passengers to fasten
the crash sensing and diagnostic
their safety belt. Then the light stays their safety belt. Then the light stays
module. For more information on the
on solid until the belt is buckled. on solid until the belt is buckled.
airbag system, see Airbag System
This cycle may continue several This cycle continues several times if
on page 3-20.
times if the driver remains or the passenger remains or becomes
becomes unbuckled while the unbuckled while the vehicle is
vehicle is moving. moving.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
If there is a problem with the airbag

system, a Driver Information Center
(DIC) message may also come on.
See Airbag System Messages on
page 5-37.
The airbag readiness light comes on Passenger Airbag Status United States
for several seconds when the Indicator
vehicle is started. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed The vehicle has a passenger
immediately. sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3-27 for
important safety information. The
{ Warning passenger airbag status indicator is
in the overhead console. Canada
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or When the vehicle is started, the
comes on while driving, it means passenger airbag status indicator
the airbag system might not be will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
working properly. The airbags in for on and off, for several seconds
the vehicle might not inflate in a as a system check. Then, after
crash, or they could even inflate several more seconds, the status
without a crash. To help avoid indicator will light either ON or OFF,
injury, have the vehicle serviced or the on or off symbol, to let you
right away. know the status of the front
and knee airbag.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
If the word ON or the on symbol is system. Have it checked by your

lit on the passenger airbag status Warning (Continued) dealer. Driving while this light is on
indicator, it means that the front could drain the battery.
outboard passenger frontal airbag have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness When this light comes on, the Driver
and knee airbag are allowed to Information Center (DIC) also
inflate. Light on page 5-15 for more
information, including important displays a message.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is safety information. See Battery Voltage and Charging
lit on the airbag status indicator, it Messages on page 5-30.
means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front Charging System Light If a short distance must be driven
outboard passenger frontal airbag with the light on, be sure to turn off
and knee airbag. all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a Malfunction
problem with the lights or the Indicator Lamp
passenger sensing system. See A computer system called OBD II
your dealer for service. The charging system light comes on (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
briefly when the ignition is turned Generation) monitors the operation
{ Warning on, but the engine is not running, as of the vehicle to ensure emissions
a check to show the light is working. are at acceptable levels, helping to
If the airbag readiness light ever It should go out when the engine is maintain a clean environment. The
comes on and stays on, it means started. malfunction indicator lamp comes
that something may be wrong If the light stays on, or comes on on when the vehicle is placed in
with the airbag system. To help while driving, there may be a ON/RUN for Key Access or Service
avoid injury to yourself or others, problem with the electrical charging Only Mode for Keyless Access, as a
(Continued) check to show it is working. If it
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
does not, have the vehicle serviced

by your dealer. See Ignition { Caution Caution (Continued)
Positions (Keyless Access) on
page 9-15 or Ignition Positions (Key If the vehicle is continually driven could lead to costly repairs not
Access) on page 9-17 for more with this light on, the emission covered by the vehicle warranty.
information. controls might not work as well, This could also result in a failure
the vehicle fuel economy might to pass a required Emission
not be as good, and the engine Inspection/Maintenance test. See
might not run as smoothly. This Accessories and Modifications on
could lead to costly repairs that page 10-3.
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
If the malfunction indicator lamp
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
comes on while the engine is
running, this indicates that the OBD
{ Caution has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
II system has detected a problem Modifications made to the engine, could damage the emission control
and diagnosis and service might be transmission, exhaust, intake, system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
required. or fuel system of the vehicle or and service might be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the replacement of the original
To prevent more serious damage to
the system before any problem is tires with other than those of the
the vehicle:
apparent. Being aware of the light same Tire Performance Criteria
can prevent more serious damage (TPC) can affect the vehicle's . Reduce vehicle speed.
to the vehicle. This system also emission controls and can cause . Avoid hard accelerations.
assists the dealer technician in this light to come on. . Avoid steep uphill grades.
correctly diagnosing any Modifications to these systems
malfunction.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
If the light continues to flash, find a

. Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and
safe place to stop and park the used. Poor fuel quality causes Maintenance Programs
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at the engine not to run as
least 10 seconds, and restart the efficiently as designed and may Depending on where you live, your
engine. If the light is still flashing, cause stalling after start-up, vehicle may be required to
follow the previous steps and see stalling when the vehicle is participate in an emission control
your dealer for service as soon as changed into gear, misfiring, system inspection and maintenance
possible. hesitation on acceleration, program. For the inspection, the
or stumbling on acceleration. emission system test equipment will
Light On Steady: An emission These conditions might go away likely connect to the vehicle's Data
control system malfunction has once the engine is warmed up. Link Connector (DLC).
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
required. occurs, change the fuel brand used.
It may require at least one full tank
The following may correct an of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
emission control system
malfunction: See Recommended Fuel on
page 9-56.
. Check that the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on If none of the above have made the The DLC is under the instrument
page 9-59. The diagnostic light turn off, your dealer can check panel next to the steering wheel.
system can determine if the fuel the vehicle. The dealer has the See your dealer if assistance is
cap has been left off or proper test equipment and needed.
improperly installed. A loose or diagnostic tools to fix any
missing fuel cap allows fuel to mechanical or electrical problems
evaporate into the atmosphere. that might have developed.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
The vehicle may not pass still does not pass the inspection This light comes on briefly when the
inspection if: for lack of OBD II system vehicle is turned on. If it does not
. The malfunction indicator lamp is readiness, your dealer can come on then, have it fixed so it will
on while the engine is running, prepare the vehicle for be ready to warn if there is a
or the malfunction indicator lamp inspection. problem.
is not on while the vehicle is in If the light comes on and stays on,
ON/RUN or Service Only Mode. Brake System Warning there is a base brake problem.
See your dealer for assistance in Light
verifying proper operation of the
malfunction indicator lamp.
The vehicle brake system consists { Warning
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
. The OBD II (On-Board circuit is not working, the remaining The brake system might not be
Diagnostics) system determines circuit can still work to stop the working properly if the brake
that critical emission control vehicle. For normal braking system warning light is on.
systems have not been performance, both circuits need to Driving with the brake system
completely diagnosed by the be working. warning light on can lead to a
system. If this were to occur, the crash. If the light is still on after
If the warning light comes on, there the vehicle has been pulled off
vehicle would be considered not
is a brake problem. Have the brake
ready for inspection. This can the road and carefully stopped,
system inspected right away.
happen if the 12-volt battery has have the vehicle towed for
recently been replaced or service.
run down.
The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take Metric English
several days of driving. If this
has been done and the vehicle
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Electric Parking Brake Service Electric Parking the Driver Information Center (DIC),
see Brake System Messages on
Light Brake Light page 5-31.
Antilock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light
Metric English
This light should come on briefly
This light comes on when the
when the vehicle is in ON/RUN. If it
parking brake is applied. If the light
does not come on, have it fixed so it
continues flashing after the parking
will be ready to warn if there is a
brake is released, or while driving, This light comes on briefly when the
problem.
there is a problem with the Electric engine is started.
Parking Brake system or another If this light stays on, there is a
system. A message may also problem with the Electric Parking If the light does not come on, have it
display in the Driver Information Brake system or another system on fixed so it will be ready to warn if
Center (DIC). See Brake System the vehicle that is causing the there is a problem.
Messages on page 5-31. parking brake system to work at a If the ABS light stays on, turn the
reduced level. The vehicle can still ignition off.
If the light does not come on,
be driven, but should be taken to a
or remains flashing, see your dealer. If the light comes on while driving,
dealer as soon as possible. See the
information for the Electric Parking stop as soon as it is safely possible
Brake under Parking Brake on and turn off the vehicle. Then start
page 9-31. If a message displays in the engine again to reset the
system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
vehicle needs service. A chime may If equipped, this light briefly comes This light will display amber when
also sound when the light comes on on while starting the vehicle. you are following a vehicle ahead
steady. If it does not, have the vehicle much too closely.
If the ABS light is the only light on, serviced by your dealer. If the See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
the vehicle has regular brakes, but system is working normally, the System on page 9-48.
the antilock brakes are not indicator light then turns off.
functioning. This light comes on green when the Traction Off Light
If both the ABS and the brake system is on and ready to operate.
system warning light are on, the When the system determines that
vehicle's antilock brakes are not the vehicle is leaving its lane
functioning and there is a problem without using the turn signal, this
with the regular brakes. See your light will change to amber and flash.
dealer for service. See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
See Brake System Warning Light on on page 9-54.
page 5-20 and Brake System This light comes on briefly while
Messages on page 5-31. Vehicle Ahead Indicator starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
Lane Departure Warning dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light then
(LDW) Light turns off.
The traction off light comes on when
the Traction Control System (TCS)
has been turned off by pressing and
If equipped, this light in the Driver releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak
Information Center (DIC) displays button.
green when a vehicle is detected
ahead.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
This light and the StabiliTrak OFF If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off, message may display. Check the
light come on when StabiliTrak is the system does not assist in DIC messages to determine which
turned off. controlling the vehicle. Turn on the feature(s) is no longer functioning
If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not TCS and the StabiliTrak systems and whether the vehicle requires
limited. Adjust driving accordingly. and the warning light turns off. service.
See Traction Control/Electronic See Traction Control/Electronic If the indicator/warning light is on

Stability Control on page 9-33. Stability Control on page 9-33. and flashing, the TCS and/or the
StabiliTrak system is actively
StabiliTrak® OFF Light Traction Control System working.
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light See Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control on page 9-33.
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly while

starting the engine. If it does not, This light comes on briefly when the
have the vehicle serviced by your engine is started.
dealer. If the light does not come on, have
This light comes on when the the vehicle serviced by your dealer. For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
StabiliTrak system is turned off. If the system is working normally, Monitor System (TPMS), this light
If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction the indicator light turns off. comes on briefly when the engine is
Control System (TCS) is also off. started. It provides information
If the light is on and not flashing, the about tire pressures and the TPMS.
TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak
system have been disabled. A DIC
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
When the Light Is On Steady Engine Oil Pressure Light This light should come on briefly as
This indicates that one or more of the engine is started. If it does not
come on, have the vehicle serviced
the tires are significantly
underinflated.
{ Caution by your dealer.
A Driver Information Center (DIC) Lack of proper engine oil If the light comes on and stays on, it
tire pressure message may also maintenance can damage the means that oil is not flowing through
display. See Tire Messages on engine. Driving with the engine the engine properly. The vehicle
page 5-38. Stop as soon as oil low can also damage the could be low on oil and might have
possible, and inflate the tires to the engine. The repairs would not be some other system problem. See
pressure value shown on the Tire covered by the vehicle warranty. your dealer.
and Loading Information label. See Check the oil level as soon as
Tire Pressure on page 10-50. possible. Add oil if required, but if Low Fuel Warning Light
the oil level is within the operating
When the Light Flashes First and range and the oil pressure is still
Then Is On Steady
low, have the vehicle serviced.
If the light flashes for about a minute Always follow the maintenance
and then stays on, there may be a schedule for changing engine oil.
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle. This light is near the fuel gauge and
See Tire Pressure Monitor comes on briefly when the ignition is
Operation on page 10-52. turned on as a check to show it is
working.
It also comes on when the fuel tank
is low on fuel. The light turns off
when fuel is added. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Security Light High-Beam On Light Cruise Control Light
The security light should come on This light comes on when the This light in the Driver Information
briefly as the engine is started. If it high-beam headlamps are in use. Center (DIC) is white when the
does not come on, have the vehicle See Headlamp High/Low-Beam cruise control is on and ready, and
serviced by your dealer. If the Changer on page 6-1. turns green when the cruise control
system is working normally, the is set and active.
indicator light turns off.
Lamps On Reminder See Cruise Control on page 9-35.
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a Adaptive Cruise Control Light
problem with the theft-deterrent
system. See Immobilizer Operation
(Key Access) on page 2-17 or
Immobilizer Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2-18.
This light comes on when the
exterior lamps are in use. See
This light in the Driver Information
Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.
Center (DIC) is white when the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (if
equipped) is on and ready, and
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
turns green when the ACC is set Information Displays Auto Stop – Vehicle is stationary
and active. See Adaptive Cruise with battery active and no power is
Control on page 9-37. flowing to the wheels.
Power Flows
Door Ajar Light (eAssist Only)
To view the Power Flow screens in
the center stack display, press the
[ button on the Home screen or
on the Application Tray on the top of
the infotainment system touch
screen. Then press the Flow button
at the bottom of the touch screen.
This light comes on in the Driver These screens indicate the current
Information Center (DIC) when a operating condition and the energy Engine Power – Engine is active
door is open or not securely latched. flow between the engine, generator, with energy flowing to the wheels.
and high voltage battery.
Before driving, check that all doors
are properly closed.
Engine Idle – Vehicle is stationary

with engine active and no power is
flowing to the wheels.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The DIC displays are shown in the
center of the instrument cluster in
the Info app. See Instrument Cluster
on page 5-9. The Info app is only
available when the vehicle is in ON/
RUN. The displays show the status
Regen Recovery – Power from the Power Off – No power is flowing to of many vehicle systems. The
wheels returns to the battery during the wheels. controls for the DIC are on the right
regenerative braking or coasting. steering wheel control.
Energy Information
(eAssist Only)
To view the Efficiency Tips screen
on the center stack display, press
the [ button on the Home screen
or on the Application Tray on the top
of the infotainment system touch
screen. Then press the Tips button
at the bottom of the touch screen.
Hybrid Power – Both the engine and
battery are active with energy Efficiency Tips
flowing to the wheels. The Efficiency Tips screen provides
a guide on how to improve energy
usage to increase fuel economy.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
w or x : Press to move up or 4. Scroll to Info Pages and Trip A and Average Fuel Economy
down in a list, or on the main view press p. or Trip B and Average Fuel
press to cycle through the different Economy: The Trip display shows
5. Select Edit List. the current distance traveled, in
Info app pages.
6. Press w or x to move through either kilometers (km) or miles (mi),
o or p : Press o to open since the trip odometer was last
application menus on the left. Press the list of possible information
reset.
p to open interaction menus on the displays.
right. The Average Fuel Economy display
7. Press V while an item is shows the approximate average
V : Press to select a menu item. highlighted to select or deselect liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
Press and hold to reset values on that item. When an item is or miles per gallon (mpg). This
certain screens, or on the main view selected, a checkmark will number is calculated based on the
reset info pages to the original appear next to it. number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded
setting. since the last time this menu item
DIC Info Pages
DIC Info Page Options was reset.
The following is the list of all
The info pages on the DIC can be possible DIC info page displays. The Average Fuel Economy and trip
turned on or off through the Some may not be available for your odometer can be reset together by
Settings app. particular vehicle. Some items may pressing and holding V while this
not be turned on by default but can display is active.
1. Press o to access the cluster be turned on through the Settings
applications. Fuel Range: Displays the
app. See “DIC Info Page Options” approximate distance the vehicle
2. Press w or x to scroll to the earlier in this section. can be driven without refueling.
Settings application. Current Speed: Displays the LOW will be displayed when the
vehicle speed in either kilometers vehicle is low on fuel. The fuel
3. Press V to select the per hour (km/h) or miles per range estimate is based on an
Settings app. hour (mph). average of the vehicle's fuel
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
economy over recent driving history briefly while this display is active been changed. It cannot be reset
and the amount of fuel remaining in and the timer is running. To reset accurately until the next oil change.
the fuel tank. the timer to zero, press and hold V To reset the engine oil life system,
Instantaneous Fuel Economy: while this display is active. press and hold V for several
Displays the current fuel economy in Oil Life: Displays an estimate of seconds while the Oil Life display is
either liters per 100 kilometers (L/ the oil's remaining useful life. active. See Engine Oil Life System
100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg). If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is on page 10-14.
This number reflects only the fuel displayed, that means 99% of the Coolant Temperature: Displays
economy that the vehicle has right current oil life remains. the coolant temperature in either
now and changes frequently as degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees
driving conditions change. When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Fahrenheit (°F).
Average Speed: Displays the message will appear on the display. Tire Pressure: Displays the
average speed of the vehicle in See Engine Oil Messages on approximate pressures of all four
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles page 5-33. The oil should be tires. Tire pressure is displayed in
per hour (mph). This average is changed as soon as possible. See either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds
calculated based on the various Engine Oil on page 10-11. In per square inch (psi). If the pressure
vehicle speeds recorded since the addition to the engine oil life system is low, the value for that tire is
last reset of this value. The average monitoring the oil life, additional shown in amber. See Tire Pressure
speed can be reset by pressing and maintenance is recommended in the Monitor System on page 10-51 and
holding V while this display is Maintenance Schedule. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
active. Maintenance Schedule on page 10-52.
page 11-2.
Timer: To start the timer, press V Battery Voltage: Displays the
while this display is active. The The Oil Life display must be reset current battery voltage. The battery
display will show the amount of time after each oil change. It will not voltage can fluctuate while viewing
that has passed since the timer was reset itself. Do not reset the Oil Life this information on the DIC. This is
display accidentally at any time normal.
last reset. To stop the timer, press V
other than when the oil has just
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Speed Signs: Displays sign Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and

information, which comes from a
roadway database in the onboard Messages displayed on the DIC Charging Messages
navigation. indicate the status of the vehicle or BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
some action that may be needed to
Driver Efficiency Gauge (eAssist This message displays when the
correct a condition. Multiple
Only): Assists in driving efficiently vehicle has detected that the battery
messages may appear one after
and will vary based on driver input. voltage is dropping beyond a
another.
To maximize efficiency, keep the reasonable point. The battery saver
leaf in the solid green zone in the The messages that do not require system starts reducing features of
center of the gauge. The gauge immediate action can be the vehicle that may be noticed. At
moves to the left when braking and acknowledged and cleared by the point that features are disabled,
to the right when accelerating. pressing V (Set/Reset). this message displays. Turn off
When either is done aggressively, unnecessary accessories to allow
the vehicle is being driven less The messages that require
immediate action cannot be cleared the battery to recharge.
efficiently and the gauge will move
further from the center. until that action is performed. LOW BATTERY
All messages should be taken This message is displayed when the
seriously; clearing the message battery voltage is low. See Battery
does not correct the problem. on page 10-27.
The following are the possible
messages and some information
SERVICE BATTERY
about them. CHARGING SYSTEM
This message is displayed when
there is a fault in the battery
charging system. Take the vehicle to
your dealer for service.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Brake System Messages pulsation in the brake pedal. This is Cruise Control Messages
normal under these conditions. Take
BRAKE FLUID LOW the vehicle to your dealer for ADAPTIVE CRUISE SET
This message is displayed when the service. TO XXX
brake fluid level is low. See Brake SERVICE PARKING BRAKE This message displays when the
Fluid on page 10-26. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
This message is displayed when speed is set. See Adaptive Cruise
PARK BRAKE RELEASED there is a problem with the parking Control on page 9-37.
This message is displayed when the brake. Take the vehicle to your
parking brake is released. dealer for service. ADAPTIVE CRUISE
STEP ON BRAKE TO TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
PARK BRAKE SET
RELEASE PARK BRAKE This message displays when
This message is displayed when the attempting to activate Adaptive
parking brake is set. This message is displayed if you Cruise Control (ACC) when it is
attempt to release the Electric temporarily unavailable. The ACC
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE Parking Brake without the brake system does not need service.
This message is displayed if the pedal applied. See Parking Brake
on page 9-31. This can most commonly occur
Electric Parking Brake is on while under the following conditions, but
the vehicle is in motion. See Parking may also display for other reasons:
Brake on page 9-31. Compass Messages
Dashes may be displayed if the
. The radar is not clean. Keep the
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST radar sensors free of mud, dirt,
vehicle temporarily loses
This message may be displayed communication with the Global snow, ice, and slush. Clean the
when there is a problem with the Positioning System (GPS). entire front and/or rear of the
brake boost assist system. When vehicle. For cleaning
this message is displayed, the brake instructions, see Exterior Care
boost assist motor might be heard on page 10-77.
operating and you might notice
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Heavy rain or snow is interfering
with the radar object detection
CRUISE SET TO XXX Door Ajar Messages
performance. This message displays when the DOOR OPEN
cruise control speed is set. See
CRUISE RADAR CAN’T SEE — Cruise Control on page 9-35. A door open symbol will display on
SEE OWNERS MANUAL the DIC showing which door is
NO CRUISE BRAKING — GAS open. If the vehicle has been shifted
If the ACC does not activate or may PEDAL APPLIED out of P (Park), a DOOR OPEN
soon disengage due to a temporary message will also be displayed.
condition, this message may This message displays when
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is If the shift lever is in M (Manual
display. This can occur under the Mode), the DOOR OPEN message
following conditions: active and the driver is pressing the
gas pedal. When this occurs, ACC will display if the vehicle starts to
. The radar is not clean. Keep the move. Close the door completely.
will not brake. See Adaptive Cruise
radar sensors free of mud, dirt, Control on page 9-37.
snow, ice, and slush. For HOOD OPEN
cleaning instructions, see SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE This message will display along with
Exterior Care on page 10-77. CONTROL a hood open symbol when the hood
. Heavy rain or snow is interfering This message displays when the is open. Close the hood completely.
with the radar object detection Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) TRUNK OPEN
performance. needs service. Take the vehicle to
your dealer. This message will display along with
. The vehicle is passing through a symbol when the trunk is open.
an open area, such as the Close the trunk completely.
desert, where there is insufficient
data for operation
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Engine Cooling System ENGINE OVERHEATED — ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE

Messages STOP ENGINE ENGINE
This message displays and a This message displays when the
A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH continuous chime sounds if the engine oil temperature is too hot.
ENGINE TEMP engine cooling system reaches Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
This message displays when the unsafe temperatures for operation. until it cools down.
engine coolant becomes hotter than Stop and turn off the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL
the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot severe damage. This message On some vehicles, this message
engine, the air conditioning clears when the engine has cooled displays when the engine oil level
compressor automatically turns off. to a safe operating temperature. may be too low. Check the oil level
When the coolant temperature before filling to the recommended
returns to normal, the air Engine Oil Messages level. If the oil is not low and this
conditioning compressor turns back message remains on, take the
on. The vehicle can continue to be CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON vehicle to your dealer for service.
driven. This message displays when the See Engine Oil on page 10-11.
If this message continues to appear, engine oil needs to be changed. OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOP
have the system repaired by your When you change the engine oil, be
sure to reset the oil life system. See
ENGINE
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine. Engine Oil Life System on This message displays if low oil
page 10-14, Driver Information pressure levels occur. Stop the
ENGINE OVERHEATED — Center (DIC) on page 5-27, Engine vehicle as soon as safely possible
IDLE ENGINE Oil on page 10-11, and Maintenance and do not operate it until the cause
Schedule on page 11-2. of the low oil pressure has been
This message displays when the
corrected. Check the oil as soon as
engine coolant temperature is too
possible and have the vehicle
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
serviced by your dealer.
idle until it cools down.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Engine Power Messages TIGHTEN GAS CAP NUMBER OF KEYS

This message displays when the PROGRAMMED
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the This message displays when
This message displays when the fuel cap. programming new keys to the
vehicle's engine power is reduced. vehicle.
Reduced engine power can affect Key and Lock Messages
the vehicle's ability to accelerate. REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE
If this message is on, but there is no NO REMOTE DETECTED This message displays when
reduction in performance, proceed This message displays when trying leaving the vehicle with the RKE
to your destination. The to start the vehicle if an RKE transmitter still inside.
performance may be reduced the transmitter is not detected. The
next time the vehicle is driven. The transmitter battery may be weak.
REPLACE BATTERY IN
vehicle may be driven at a reduced See “Starting the Vehicle with a Low REMOTE KEY
speed while this message is on, but Transmitter Battery or Wireless This message displays when the
maximum acceleration and speed Interference” under Remote Keyless battery in the RKE transmitter needs
may be reduced. Anytime this Entry (RKE) System Operation on to be replaced.
message stays on, the vehicle page 2-3.
should be taken to your dealer for USE TRANSMITTER POCKET
service as soon as possible. NO REMOTE PRESS BRAKE TO START
TO RESTART
Fuel System Messages This message displays when the
This message is displayed if the transmitter needs to be placed in
FUEL LEVEL LOW remote is no longer detected in the the transmitter pocket to start the
vehicle. Press the brake pedal to vehicle. See “Starting the Vehicle
This message displays when the restart the vehicle. with a Low Transmitter Battery or
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as Wireless Interference” under
soon as possible Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2-3.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Lamp Messages Object Detection System AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREP

Messages UNAVAILABLE
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL
ON/OFF This message displays when the
AUTOMATIC COLLISION Active Emergency Braking System
This message is displayed when the PREP OFF has been unavailable for some time.
automatic light control has been This message displays when the The Active Emergency Braking
turned on or off. See Automatic Active Emergency Braking System System does not need service. This
Headlamp System on page 6-2. has been turned off. See Active can occur under the following
Emergency Braking System on conditions:
XX TURN INDICATOR FAILURE
page 9-51. . The radar is not clean. Keep the
When one of the turn signals is out,
AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREP radar sensors free of mud, dirt,
this message displays to show
snow, ice, and slush. Clean the
which bulb needs to be replaced. REDUCED entire front and/or rear of the
See Bulb Replacement on This message displays when the vehicle. For cleaning
page 10-31 and Replacement Bulbs Active Emergency Braking System instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 10-35. has been set to the Alert setting. on page 10-77.
TURN SIGNAL ON This setting disables most Active . Heavy rain or snow is interfering
Emergency Braking functions. Some
This message is displayed if the with the radar object detection or
last-second automatic braking
turn signal has been left on. Turn off camera performance.
capability is still provided with the
the turn signal. Alert setting, but braking is less This message may also be
likely to occur. See Active displayed if there is a problem with
Emergency Braking System on the StabiliTrak system.
page 9-51.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
FORWARD COLLISION This message could be due to the Braking System may not work. Do
ALERT OFF camera being blocked. Cleaning the not use these systems until the
outside of the windshield behind the vehicle has been repaired.
This message displays when the rearview mirror may correct the
Forward Collision Alert has been issue. SERVICE FRONT CAMERA
turned off.
If this message remains on after
PARK ASSIST OFF continued driving, the vehicle needs
FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED
CLEAN WINDSHIELD This message displays when the service. Do not use the Lane
Parking Assist system has been Departure Warning (LDW) and
This message displays when the turned off or when there is a Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
camera is blocked. Cleaning the temporary condition causing the features. Take the vehicle to your
outside of the windshield behind the system to be disabled. dealer.
rearview mirror may correct the
issue. The Lane Departure Warning REAR CROSS TRAFFIC SERVICE PARKING ASSIST
system will not operate. Forward ALERT OFF This message displays if there is a
Collision Alert (FCA) may not work problem with the Parking Assist
or may not work as well. system. Do not use this system to
Rear Cross Traffic Alert has been
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING turned off. help you park. See your dealer for
UNAVAILABLE service.
SERVICE AUTOMATIC
This message displays when COLLISION PREP SERVICE SIDE DETECTION
attempting to activate the Lane SYSTEM
If this message displays, take the
Departure Warning (LDW) system If this message remains on after
vehicle to your dealer to repair the
when it is temporarily unavailable. continued driving, the vehicle needs
system. Adaptive Cruise Control
The LDW system does not need service. Side Blind Zone Alert
(ACC), Forward Collision Alert
service. (SBZA) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(FCA), and/or the Active Emergency
(RCTA) features will not work. Take
the vehicle to your dealer.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
SHIFT TO PARK BEFORE need service. For cleaning, see Security Messages
EXITING "Washing the Vehicle" under
Exterior Care on page 10-77. THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message may display if
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is This message displays if the vehicle
engaged holding the vehicle at a
Ride Control System detects a tamper condition.
stop, and the driver attempts to exit Messages
the vehicle. Put the vehicle in Service Vehicle Messages
P (Park) before exiting. SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays if there is a SERVICE POWER STEERING
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF problem with the StabiliTrak system. This message is displayed if there is
This message indicates that the If this message appears, try to reset a problem with the power steering
driver has turned the Side Blind the system. Stop; turn off the engine system and a chime may sound.
Zone Alert (SBZA) system off. for at least 15 seconds; then start Take the vehicle to your dealer for
the engine again. If this message service.
SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM still comes on, it means there is a
UNAVAILABLE problem. See your dealer for SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message indicates that Side service. The vehicle is safe to drive; This message is displayed if there is
Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) and Rear however, you do not have the a problem with the vehicle. Take the
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) are benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce vehicle to your dealer for service.
disabled either because the sensor your speed and drive accordingly.
is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles in the blind zone, or the Airbag System Messages
vehicle is passing through an open
area, such as the desert, where SERVICE AIRBAG
there is insufficient data for This message displays if there is a
operation. This message may also problem with the airbag system.
activate during heavy rain or due to Take the vehicle to your dealer for
road spray. The vehicle does not service.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Starting the Vehicle eAssist Only).” Take the vehicle to TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
your dealer for service if this
Messages message continues to be displayed.
system is learning new tires. See
JUMP START ACTIVE WAIT TO PRESS BRAKE TO START Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
START VEHICLE page 10-52.
This message displays while This message is displayed when TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD
performing an on-board jump start attempting to start the vehicle AIR TO TIRE
of the vehicle. See “Jump Starting without first pressing the brake
(On-board with eAssist Only).” On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
pedal.
Monitor System (TPMS), this
JUMP START COMPLETE SERVICE KEYLESS START message displays when the
ATTEMPT START SYSTEM pressure in one or more of the
This message displays while vehicle's tires is low.
This message is displayed if there is
performing an on-board jump start a problem with the pushbutton start The low tire pressure warning light
of the vehicle. See “Jump Starting system. Take the vehicle to your will also come on. See Tire
(On-board with eAssist Only).” dealer for service. Pressure Light on page 5-23.
JUMP START DISABLED SEE If a tire pressure message displays,
OWNERS MANUAL Tire Messages inflate the tires until the tire pressure
is equal to the values shown on the
This message displays if there is a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR Tire and Loading Information label.
problem with the on-board jump SYSTEM See Tires on page 10-42, Vehicle
start system, or the 12 volt battery is Load Limits on page 9-10, and Tire
too low to perform an on-board jump This message displays if there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure Pressure on page 10-50.
start. Try using jumper cables and
performing a normal jump start. See Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
“Jump Starting (On-board with Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10-52.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
More than one tire pressure attempting to remove the key from TURN WIPER CONTROL TO
message can be received at a time. the vehicle if the vehicle is not in INTERMITTENT FIRST
The DIC also shows the tire P (Park).
pressure values. See Driver This message is displayed when
Information Center (DIC) on TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLE attempting to adjust the intermittent
page 5-27. ENGINE wiper speed without intermittent
selected on the wiper control. See
This message displays and a chime Windshield Wiper/Washer on
Transmission Messages sounds if the transmission fluid in page 5-4.
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
SERVICE TRANSMISSION transmission fluid temperature high
This message displays if there is a can cause damage to the vehicle. Vehicle Speed Messages
problem with the transmission. See Stop the vehicle and let it idle to SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED
your dealer. allow the transmission to cool. This
message clears when the fluid This message is displayed when the
SHIFT DENIED temperature reaches a safe level. vehicle speed is greater than the
speed warning speed. See "Speed
This message displays when using
Vehicle Reminder Warning" under Instrument Cluster
the Driver Shift Control (DSC) and
on page 5-9.
attempting to shift to a gear not Messages
appropriate for the vehicle speed SPEED LIMIT SET TO XXX
and engine revolutions per ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
minute (rpm). See Manual Mode on WITH CARE This message is displayed when the
page 9-29. speed warning is set. See "Speed
This message is displayed when ice Warning" under Instrument Cluster
SHIFT TO PARK conditions are possible. on page 5-9.
transmission needs to be shifted to
P (Park). This may appear when
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Washer Fluid Messages Vehicle 5. Press q BACK to return to the

previous menu.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD Personalization
FLUID Uplevel Radio Audio System
The audio system controls are used Controls
This message may display when the to access the personalization
washer fluid level is low. See menus for customizing vehicle To access the personalization
Washer Fluid on page 10-24. features. menus:
Base Radio Audio System 1. Press SETTINGS on the Home
Window Messages Controls page on the infotainment system
display.
OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/ To access the personalization
PASSENGER WINDOW menus: 2. Press the desired feature to
display a list of available
This message is displayed when the 1. On the Home page, turn the options.
window needs to be reprogrammed. MENU knob to highlight Settings
If the vehicle's battery has been and press the MENU knob. 3. Press the desired option.
recharged or disconnected, you will 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 4. Press to select the desired
need to index each front window for the desired feature and press option setting.
the express-up feature to work. See the MENU knob to display a list
Power Windows on page 2-21. 5. Press q BACK to return to the
of available options. previous menu.
3. Turn the MENU knob to scroll
through and highlight the desired Personalization Menus
option, then press the The following list of features may be
MENU knob. available:
4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight . Time and Date
the desired option setting and . Language [Language]
press the MENU knob.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Valet Mode Select the language. Climate and Air Quality
. Radio Select and the following may be
Valet Mode
. Vehicle displayed:
To turn valet mode on and off, see
. Bluetooth “Valet Mode” under “Setting Radio
. Auto Fan Max Speed
. Voice Preferences” in Home Page on . Auto Defog
page 7-4.
. Display . Auto Rear Defog
Radio
. Rear Camera Auto Fan Max Speed
To manage the radio features, see
. Return to Factory Settings This feature will set the maximum
“Radio Setup” under “Setting Radio
auto fan speed.
. Software Information Preferences” in Home Page on
page 7-4. Select Low, Medium, or High.
Each menu is detailed in the
following information. Vehicle Auto Defog
Time and Date Select and the following may be When set to On, the front defog will
displayed: automatically react to temperature
Manually set the time and date. See and humidity conditions that may
Clock (Base Radio) on page 5-5 or . Climate and Air Quality cause fogging. Only vehicles with
Clock (Uplevel Radio) on page 5-5. . Collision/Detection Systems the dual automatic climate control
Language [Language] will have this option.
. Comfort and Convenience
Select and the following may be Select Off or On.
. Lighting
displayed: . Power Door Locks
. English US . Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
. Francais Canadian
. Espanol Latino
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Auto Rear Defog are available. The Alert setting Side Blind Zone Alert
If equipped, this allows the Auto disables most automatic braking This allows the feature to be turned
Rear Defog to be turned on or off. functions of the Auto Collision on or off.
This feature will automatically turn Preparation feature. Some
last-second automatic braking Select Off or On.
on the rear window defogger when it
is cold outside. capability is still provided with the See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
Alert setting, but it is much less on page 9-52.
Select Off or On. likely to be triggered by most driving
conditions. Off disables all Forward Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Collision/Detection Systems
Collision Alert and Automatic This allows the feature to be turned
Select and the following may be Braking capabilities of the Auto on or off.
displayed: Collision Preparation feature.
Select Off or On.
. Auto Collision Preparation Select Off, Alert and Brake, or Alert.
See Driver Assistance Systems on
. Go Notifier See Driver Assistance Systems on page 9-45.
. Side Blind Zone Alert page 9-45.
Comfort and Convenience
. Rear Cross Traffic Alert Go Notifier
Select and the following may be
Auto Collision Preparation This feature will give a reminder that displayed:
Adaptive Cruise Control provides
This feature will turn on or off the . Auto Memory Recall
when it has brought the vehicle to a
Forward Collision Alert feature as complete stop behind another . Easy Exit Options
well as the Automatic Braking stopping vehicle, and then that
capability of the Auto Collision . Chime Volume
vehicle drives on.
Preparation feature. With the Alert
and Brake setting, both Forward Select Off or On.
Collision Alert as well as the See Active Emergency Braking
Automatic Braking capability of the System on page 9-51.
Auto Collision Preparation feature
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Auto Memory Recall Vehicle Locator Lights

. Delayed Door Lock
This allows the feature to be turned This feature will flash the exterior Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
on or off. lamps when K on the Remote When on, this feature will keep the
Select Off, On - Driver Door, or On - Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is driver door from locking when the
At Ignition On. See Memory Seats pressed to locate the vehicle. door is open. If Off is selected, the
on page 3-7. Select Off or On. Delayed Door Lock menu will be
available.
Easy Exit Options Exit Lighting
Select Off or On.
This allows the feature to be turned This allows the selection of how
on or off. long the exterior lamps stay on Auto Door Unlock
Select Off or On. when leaving the vehicle when it is This allows selection of which of the
dark outside. doors will automatically unlock when
Chime Volume the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60
This allows the selection of the Seconds, or 120 Seconds. Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.
chime volume level.
Daytime Tail Lights Delayed Door Lock
Press + or − to adjust the volume.
This feature allows the taillamps to When on, this feature will delay the
Lighting be on during the day. locking of the doors. To override the
Select and the following may be Select Off or On. delay, press the power door lock
displayed: switch on the door.
Power Door Locks
. Vehicle Locator Lights Select Off or On.
Select and the following may be
. Exit Lighting displayed:
. Daytime Tail Lights . Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
. Auto Door Unlock
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Remote Lock, Unlock, Start Remote Door Unlock Select All Doors or Driver
Select and the following may be This allows selection of which doors Door Only.
displayed: will unlock when pressing K on the Passive Door Lock
. Remote Unlock Light Feedback RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off,
. Remote Lock Feedback Select All Doors or Driver or can be used to select feedback
Door Only. when using the button on the driver
. Remote Door Unlock door to lock the vehicle. See
. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats Remote Start Auto Cool Seats Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
If equipped and turned on, this System Operation on page 2-3.
. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
feature will turn the vented seats on Select On, On with Horn Chirp,
. Passive Door Unlock when using remote start on or Off.
. Passive Door Lock warm days.
Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder
. Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder Select Off or On.
This feature sounds an alert when
Remote Unlock Light Feedback Remote Start Auto Heat Seats the RKE transmitter is left in the
When on, the exterior lamps will If equipped and turned on, this vehicle.
flash when unlocking the vehicle feature will turn the heated seats on Select Off or On.
with the RKE transmitter. when using remote start on
cold days. Bluetooth
Select Off or Flash Lights.
Select Off or On. Select and the following may be
Remote Lock Feedback displayed:
Passive Door Unlock
This allows selection of what type of . Pair New Device
feedback is given when locking the This allows the selection of what
doors will unlock when using the . Device Management
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
button on the driver door to unlock . Ringtones
Select Off, Lights and Horn, Lights the vehicle.
Only, or Horn Only. . Voice Mail Numbers
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Pair New Device pressing the EDIT button and typing

. Turn Display Off
Select to pair a new device. See in a new number, then select SAVE Theme
“Pairing” under Bluetooth or press the SAVE button.
Select to change the color, font, and
(Infotainment Controls) on Voice art of the display.
page 7-20 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 7-24 or Select and the following may be Select Contemporary, Mainstreet,
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-18 displayed: Edge, or Velocity.
or “Pairing” under “Bluetooth” in the . Prompt Length Calibrate Touchscreen
infotainment manual. . Audio Feedback Speed Select to calibrate the touchscreen,
Device Management then follow the prompts.
Prompt Length
Select to connect to a different Turn Display Off
This feature adjusts the voice
phone source, disconnect a phone,
prompt length. Select to turn the display off. Press
or delete a phone.
Select Short or Long. anywhere on the display area or any
Ringtones faceplate button to turn the
Audio Feedback Speed display on.
Press to change the ring tone for
the specific phone. The phone does This feature adjusts the audio Rear Camera
not need to be connected to change feedback speed.
the ring. Select and the following may be
Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.
displayed:
Voice Mail Numbers
Display . Guidance Lines
This feature displays the voice mail
Select and the following may be . Rear Cross Traffic Alert
number for all connected phones.
displayed:
The voice mail number may be . Rear Park Assist Symbols
changed by selecting EDIT or . Theme
. Calibrate Touchscreen
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Guidance Lines Restore Vehicle Settings Universal Remote

Select to turn Off or On. See This allows selection of restoring
Assistance Systems for Parking or vehicle settings.
System
Backing on page 9-46. Select Cancel or Continue. See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13-15.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert Clear All Private Data
Select to turn Off or On. See This allows selection to clear all Universal Remote System
Assistance Systems for Parking or
Backing on page 9-46.
private information from the vehicle. Programming
Select Cancel or Continue.
Rear Park Assist Symbols
Restore Radio Settings
Select to turn Off or On. See
Assistance Systems for Parking or This allows selection to restore
Backing on page 9-46. radio settings.
Return to Factory Settings Select Cancel or Continue.
Select and the following may be Software Information

displayed: Select to view the infotainment
. Restore Vehicle Settings system current software information.
. Clear All Private Data
. Restore Radio Settings
If equipped, these buttons are in the
overhead console.
This system can replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
home automation devices. These To program a garage door opener, To program up to three devices:
instructions refer to a garage door park outside directly in line with and 1. Hold the end of the hand-held
opener, but can be used for other facing the garage door opener transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to
devices. receiver. Clear all people and 3 in) away from the Universal
Do not use the Universal Remote objects near the garage door. Remote system buttons with the
system with any garage door opener Make sure the hand-held transmitter indicator light in view. The
that does not have the stop and has a new battery for quick and hand-held transmitter was
reverse feature. This includes any accurate transmission of the supplied by the manufacturer of
garage door opener model radio-frequency signal. the garage door opener receiver.
manufactured before April 1, 1982. 2. At the same time, press and
Programming the Universal
Read these instructions completely Remote System hold both the hand-held
before programming the Universal transmitter button and one of the
Remote system. It may help to have For questions or help programming three Universal Remote system
another person assist with the the Universal Remote system, call buttons to be used to operate
programming process. 1-800-355-3515 or see the garage door. Do not release
www.homelink.com. either button until the indicator
Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles Programming involves light changes from a slow to a
as well as for future programming. time-sensitive actions, and may time rapid flash. Then release both
Erase the programming when out causing the procedure to be buttons.
vehicle ownership is terminated. repeated. Some garage door openers may
See “Erasing Universal Remote require substitution of Step 2
System Buttons” later in this with the procedure under in
section. “Radio Signals for Canada and
Some Gate Operators” later in
this section.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
3. Press and hold the newly and the garage door does and then release it. If the garage
programmed Universal Remote not move, continue with door does not move or the lamp
system button for five seconds programming Steps 4–6. on the garage door opener
while watching the indicator light receiver does not flash, press
and garage door activation. and hold the same button a
. If the indicator light stays on second time for two seconds,
continuously or the garage then release it. Again, if the door
door moves when the does not move or the garage
button is pressed, then door lamp does not flash, press
programming is complete. and hold the same button a third
There is no need to time for two seconds, then
complete Steps 4–6. release it.
Learn or Smart Button The Universal Remote system
. If the indicator light does
not come on or the garage 4. After completing Steps 1–3 , should now activate the
door does not move, a locate the Learn or Smart button garage door.
second button press may inside garage on the garage Repeat the process for
be required. For a second door opener receiver. The name programming the two remaining
time, press and hold the and color of the button may vary buttons.
newly programmed button by manufacturer.
for five seconds. If the light Radio Signals for Canada and
5. Press and release the Learn or Some Gate Operators
stays on or the garage door Smart button. Step 6 must be
moves, programming is completed within 30 seconds of For questions or programming help
complete. pressing this button. call 1-800-355-3515 or see
. If the indicator light blinks www.homelink.com.
6. Inside the vehicle the vehicle,
rapidly for two seconds, press and hold the newly Canadian radio-frequency laws and
then changes to a solid light programmed Universal Remote some U.S. gate operators require
system button for two seconds transmitter signals to time out or quit
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
after several seconds of Universal Remote System Reprogramming a Single

transmission. This may not be long Universal Remote System
enough for the Universal Remote
Operation
Button
system to pick up the signal during Using the Universal Remote
programming. To reprogram any of the system
System buttons:
If the programming did not work, Press and hold the appropriate
replace Step 2 under “Programming 1. Press and hold any one of the
Universal Remote system button for buttons. Do not release the
the Universal Remote System” with at least one-half second. The
the following: button.
indicator light will come on while the
Press and hold the Universal signal is being transmitted. 2. The indicator light will begin to
Remote system button while flash after 20 seconds. Without
pressing and releasing the Erasing Universal Remote releasing the button, proceed
hand-held transmitter button every System Buttons with Step 1 under “Programming
two seconds until the signal has Erase all programmed buttons when the Universal Remote System.”
been successfully accepted by the vehicle ownership is terminated.
Universal Remote system. The
Universal Remote system indicator To erase:
light will flash slowly at first and then 1. Press and hold the two outside
rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under buttons until the indicator light
“Programming the Universal Remote begins to flash. This should take
System” to complete. about 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting AUTO (Automatic): Automatically

turns the exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 parking lamps including all lamps,
Exterior Lamps Off except the headlamps.
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Headlamp High/Low-Beam headlamps together with the parking
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 lamps and instrument panel lights.
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Exterior Lamps Off
Automatic Headlamp Reminder
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 A warning chime sounds if the driver
The exterior lamp control is on the
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3 door is opened while the ignition is
turn signal lever.
Turn and Lane-Change off and the exterior lamps are on.
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Turn the control to the following
positions:
Interior Lighting Headlamp High/
Instrument Panel Illumination O (Off): Turns off the exterior
Low-Beam Changer
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 lamps. The knob returns to the
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 AUTO position after it is released. 2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Turn to O again to reactivate the Changer): Push the turn signal
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 AUTO mode. lever away from you and release, to
turn the high beams on. To return to
Lighting Features In Canada, the headlamps and low beams, push the lever again or
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) will pull it toward you and release.
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 automatically reactivate when the
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6 vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
6-2 Lighting
The DRL system turns on the This vehicle may have a DRL
low-beam headlamps at a reduced disabling function. When the DRL
brightness. For vehicles with High are on and a turn signal is activated,
Intensity Discharge (HID) the DRL on that side will be off until
headlamps, there is a dedicated the turn signal goes off.
DRL. The DRL will come on when
This indicator light turns on in the all of the following conditions Automatic Headlamp
are met:
instrument cluster when the System
high-beam headlamps are on. . The ignition is on.
When the exterior lamp control is
. The exterior lamp control is set to AUTO and it is dark enough
Flash-to-Pass in AUTO. outside, the headlamps come on
To flash the high beams, pull the . The light sensor determines it is automatically.
turn signal lever toward you, and daytime.
release.
. The vehicle is not in P (Park).
Daytime Running When the DRL are on, the taillamps,
Lamps (DRL) sidemarker lamps, instrument panel
lights, and other lamps will not
DRL can make it easier for others to be on.
see the front of your vehicle during
the day. Fully functional DRL are The DRL turn off when the
required on all vehicles first sold in headlamps are turned to O or the
Canada. ignition is off.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Lighting 6-3
There is a light sensor on top of the not operating, these lamps turn off. Turn and Lane-Change
instrument panel. Do not cover the Move the exterior lamp control to P
sensor, otherwise the headlamps
Signals
or ; to disable this feature.
will come on when they are not
needed.
Hazard Warning Flashers
The system may also turn on the
headlamps when driving through a
parking garage or tunnel.
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps will turn off or may
change to Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
The automatic headlamp system Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
turns off when the exterior lamp
control is turned to O or the ignition An arrow on the instrument cluster
is off. flashes in the direction of the turn or
lane change.
Lights On with Wipers Raise or lower the lever until the
If the windshield wipers are arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
activated in daylight with the engine
| (Hazard Warning Flashers): change. Hold it there until the lane
Press this button to make the front
on, and the exterior lamp control is change is completed. If the lever is
and rear turn signal lamps flash on
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking briefly pressed and released, the
and off. Press again to turn the
lamps, and other exterior lamps turn signal flashes three times.
flashers off.
come on. The transition time for the
lamps coming on varies based on The hazard warning flashers turn on
wiper speed. When the wipers are automatically if the airbags deploy.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
6-4 Lighting
The turn and lane-change signal Interior Lighting Dome Lamps

can be turned off manually by
moving the lever back to its original
position. Instrument Panel
If after signaling a turn or lane
Illumination Control
change, the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out.
Have any burned out bulbs
replaced. If a bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses on
page 10-36.
The brightness of the instrument The interior lamps control in the

panel lighting and steering wheel overhead console controls both the
controls can be adjusted. front and rear interior lamps.
D (Instrument Panel To change the dome lamp settings,
Illumination): Move the press the following:
thumbwheel up or down to brighten OFF: Turns the lamp off, even
or dim the lights. when a door is open.
DOOR: The lamp comes on
Courtesy Lamps automatically when a door is
The courtesy lamps come on when opened.
any door is opened and the dome ON: Turns the lamp on.
lamp is in the DOOR position.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Lighting 6-5
Reading Lamps Lighting Features

Entry Lighting
The headlamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, back-up lamps, dome
lamps, and most of the interior lights
turn on briefly when the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter K
button is pressed. See Ignition
Positions (Keyless Access) on
page 9-15 or Ignition Positions (Key
Rear Reading Lamps Access) on page 9-17. After about
There are front and rear reading 30 seconds the exterior lamps turn
Front Reading Lamps off, then the dome lamps and
lamps in the overhead console and
the headliner. remaining interior lights dim to off.
Entry lighting can be disabled
# or $ (Reading Lamps): Press manually by changing the ignition
the button near each lamp to turn it out of the OFF position, or by
on or off. pressing the RKE transmitter Q
button.
This feature can be changed. See
page 5-40.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
6-6 Lighting
Exit Lighting Battery Load A high electrical load occurs when

several of the following are on, such
The headlamps, taillamps, parking Management as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, and license plate lamps The vehicle has Electric Power lamps, rear window defogger,
come on at night, or in areas with Management (EPM), which climate control fan at high speed,
limited lighting, when the key is estimates the battery's temperature heated seats, engine cooling fans,
removed from the ignition. The and state of charge. It then adjusts trailer loads, and loads plugged into
dome lamps also come on when the the voltage for best performance accessory power outlets.
key is removed from the ignition. and extended life of the battery.
The exterior lamps and dome lamps EPM works to prevent excessive
remain on after the door is closed When the battery's state of charge discharge of the battery. It does this
for a set amount of time, then is low, the voltage is raised slightly by balancing the generator's output
automatically turn off. to quickly bring the charge back up. and the vehicle's electrical needs.
When the state of charge is high, It can increase engine idle speed to
If equipped with Keyless Access, the voltage is lowered slightly to generate more power, whenever
the exterior lamps and dome lamps prevent overcharging. If the vehicle needed. It can temporarily reduce
automatically turn on when the has a voltage display on the Driver the power demands of some
driver door is opened after the Information Center (DIC), you may accessories.
ignition is turned off. See Ignition see the voltage move up or down.
Positions (Keyless Access) on Normally, these actions occur in
This is normal. If there is a problem, steps or levels, without being
page 9-15 or Ignition Positions (Key an alert will be displayed.
Access) on page 9-17. noticeable. In rare cases at the
The battery can be discharged at highest levels of corrective action,
The exterior lamps turn off idle if the electrical loads are very this action may be noticeable to the
immediately by turning the exterior high. This is true for all vehicles. driver. If so, a DIC message might
lamp control off. This is because the generator be displayed and it is recommended
This feature can be changed. See (alternator) may not be spinning fast that the driver reduce the electrical
Vehicle Personalization on enough at idle to produce all the loads as much as possible. See
page 5-40. power that is needed for very high Battery Voltage and Charging
electrical loads. Messages on page 5-30.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-18
Introduction
System Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Infotainment
Bluetooth (Voice Read the following pages to
Introduction Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 become familiar with the
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 infotainment system featured in this
Trademarks and License owner manual.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Agreements
Trademarks and License
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 { Warning
Taking your eyes off the road
Radio for too long or too often while
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
using any infotainment features
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
can cause a crash resulting in
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 injury or death. Do not give
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 extended attention to
infotainment tasks while
Audio Players driving. Focus your attention
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 on driving and limit glances to
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 the instrument cluster or center
Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 stack screens. Use voice
guidance whenever possible.
The infotainment system has built-in

features intended to help with this
by disabling some functions when
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
7-2 Infotainment System
driving. A grayed-out function is not The base radio information is

available when the vehicle is included in this manual, if equipped.
moving. See the infotainment manual for
All functions are available when the information on the uplevel radios,
vehicle is parked. Before driving: audio players, phone, navigation
system, and voice or speech
. Become familiar with the recognition. There is also
infotainment system operation information on settings.
and buttons on the faceplate.
. Set up the audio by presetting Theft-Deterrent Feature
favorite stations, setting the TheftLock® is designed to
tone, and adjusting the discourage theft of the vehicle's
speakers. radio by learning a portion of the
. Set up phone numbers in Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
advance so they can be called The radio does not operate if it is
easily by pressing a single stolen or moved to a different
button or by using a single voice vehicle.
command for vehicles equipped
with phone capability.
See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9-24.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Overview 1. q (Favorite Pages)

Infotainment System Overview . Press to scroll backward
The infotainment system is controlled by using the buttons on the faceplate through the favorite pages.
and steering wheel controls. See Steering Wheel Controls on page 5-3. 2. Buttons 1–5
. Press to select favorite
stations.
. Press and hold to save
favorite stations.
. Press to select options.
3. r (Favorite Pages)
. Press to scroll forward
through the favorite pages.
4. O (Power/Volume)
. Press to turn the audio on.
. Press and hold to turn it off.
. When on, press to mute the
system. Press again to
unmute.
. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
5. MEDIA . Press g and hold to 12. MENU

. Press to change the audio quickly reverse through a . Press to access the menu
source between CD, USB, track. Release the button to for the current audio
SD Card, and AUX. return to playing speed. source.
6. RADIO . Press l to seek the next . Press to select the
track. highlighted menu option.
. Press to change the audio
source between AM, FM, . Press l and hold to fast . Turn to scroll through
or SiriusXM, if equipped. forward through a track. a list.
7. TONE Release the button to return . Turn to manually select a
to playing speed. See CD station.
. Press to open the Tone Player on page 7-12.
Settings menu.
. For AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if
13. X (Eject)
8. g or l (Seek) equipped), press l to
. Press to eject the CD.
. Press g to seek to the seek to the next strong
beginning of the current or station. Home Page
previous track. If the track 9. { (Home Page) Home Page Features
has been playing for less
than five seconds, it seeks . Press to go to the Home The infotainment system displays a
the previous track. If longer Page from anywhere in the Home Page that makes it easy to
than five seconds, the system. See “Home Page”. access all of the applications. Turn
current track starts from the the MENU knob to highlight
beginning.
10. q BACK application icons. Press the MENU
. Press to return to the knob to access the feature’s
previous screen in options.
a menu. Various functions are disabled when
11. CD Slot the vehicle is moving.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
AUDIO: Select the AUDIO screen Setting Radio Preferences 3. Re-enter the four-digit code.
icon to display the active source Select LOCK to lock the system.
Select the SETTINGS screen icon
page. The sources available are This will also lock out access to
to display the Settings menu and
AM, FM, SiriusXM® (if equipped), the storage behind the radio,
the following may display:
CD, USB/iPod, AUX, and SD Card if equipped. See Instrument
Reader. See AM-FM Radio on Time: See Clock (Base Radio) on Panel Storage on page 4-1.
page 7-7, Satellite Radio on page 5-5 or Clock (Uplevel Radio)
4. Type the four-digit code to
page 7-9, CD Player on page 7-12, on page 5-5.
and Auxiliary Jack on page 7-17. unlock the system. Select q
Language [Language]: This will BACK to go back to the
PHONE: Select the PHONE screen set the display language in the previous menu.
icon to display the Phone main radio, and Instrument cluster. Select
page. See Bluetooth (Infotainment to display a list of languages. Select Radio: See “Radio Setup” later in
Controls) on page 7-20 or Bluetooth q BACK to go back to the this section.
(Voice Recognition) on page 7-24 or previous menu. Vehicle: See Vehicle
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-18. Valet Mode: Personalization on page 5-40.
NAV: Select the NAV screen icon Type a four-digit code on the Display: Press the MENU knob to
to display the last Turn-by-Turn circular numeric keypad by: turn the display on or off.
maneuver if a destination was
downloaded. See Navigation on 1. Turning the MENU knob to Return to Factory Settings: See
page 14-2. highlight a number. “Return to Factory Settings” later in
this section.
SETTINGS: Select the SETTINGS 2. Press the MENU knob to select
screen icon to display the Settings it. Do this for each one of the
main page. See “Setting Radio four digits. Select Enter to go to
Preferences” following. the confirmation screen.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Radio Setup adjust is to select a number from 5–

. Centerpoint®: Turns on Bose
25 to show that selection of Centerpoint® surround
From the RADIO/BAND screen icon, technology.
the following may be displayed: favorites.
Audible Touch Feedback: Select Centerpoint creates a surround
Manage Favorites: sound from nearly any audio
Audible Touch Feedback to turn
. Turn the MENU knob and press feedback off or on. source: existing CD collection,
to select a favorite. satellite radio, and audio players.
Auto Volume (If Equipped): This
. To delete a favorite, press feature adjusts the volume based on Maximum Startup Volume: This
the button just below the vehicle speed. The options are Off, feature sets the maximum startup
DELETE screen button. Low, Medium-Low, Medium, volume. If the vehicle is started and
Medium-High, or High. Select the the volume is greater than this level,
. To move a favorite, press
desired volume. the volume is adjusted to this level.
the MOVE screen button.
To set the maximum startup volume,
Turn the MENU knob to DSP Modes (If Equipped): This Turn the MENU knob to increase or
select a new location, then feature has four modes: decrease startup volume.
press the DROP screen
button to select the new
. Normal: Adjusts the audio to
Rear Camera (If Equipped)
location. normal mode. This provides the
best sound quality for all seating From the Rear Camera screen
. Select q BACK to go back to the positions. button, the following may be
previous menu. displayed:
. Driver: Adjusts the audio to give
Number of Favorites Shown: To the driver the best possible Park Assist Symbols: This feature
set the number of favorites for sound quality. will display symbols where objects
display, select Auto to automatically are detected by the Rear Parking
. Rear: Adjusts the audio to give
adjust the number of Favorites Assist system. Select Park Assist
the rear seat occupants the best
pages shown as Favorites are Symbols, then select Off or On.
possible sound quality.
added and removed. Another way to See Assistance Systems for Parking
or Backing on page 9-46.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Rear Cross Traffic Alert: This Restore Radio Settings: This Radio
feature will display an alert icon option will restore factory radio
when cross traffic is detected. settings. Select Restore Radio
Select Rear Cross Traffic Alert, then Settings. A screen displays stating AM-FM Radio
select Off or On. all personalized radio settings will Playing the Radio
be restored back to the factory
Return to Factory Settings settings. Select Cancel or Continue. While on the audio main page,
Select Return to Factory Settings press the RADIO or MEDIA button
and the following list may display: English and Metric Unit repeatedly to display and scroll
Conversion through the available sources: AM,
Restore Vehicle Settings: This FM, and SiriusXM® (if equipped),
option will restore factory vehicle To change the display units between
English and metric units, see “Units” CD, USB, SD, and AUX.
personalization settings. Select
Restore Vehicle Settings. A screen under “Settings” in Instrument The steering wheel controls can
displays stating all vehicle Cluster on page 5-9. also be used to adjust the volume.
customization settings will be See Steering Wheel Controls on
restored to the factory settings. Software Updates page 5-3.
Select Cancel or Continue. See the website for more AM, FM, SiriusXM (If Equipped)
Clear All Private Data: This option information. To select AM, FM, or SiriusXM
clears all private information from In the U.S., see www.chevrolet.com (if equipped):
the vehicle. Select Clear All Private
Data. Select Cancel or Continue. In Canada, see 1. Press {.
www.chevrolet.gm.ca
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
the AUDIO screen icon.
3. Press the MENU knob to select.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Fade: Turn the MENU knob to EQ (Equalizer) Settings:
either AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if highlight. Press the MENU knob If equipped with a Bose Sound
equipped) and press MENU to to select. Turn the MENU knob System, the available choices are
select. to the left for more sound from Manual and Talk.
the front speakers and to the
Press the RADIO faceplate button right for more sound from the DSP Modes: If equipped with a
to display and change the radio rear speakers. The middle Bose Surround Sound System, it
source. Press the MENU knob and position balances the sound will have the following four DSP
the following radio settings may between the front and rear Modes:
display: speakers. . Normal: Adjusts the audio to
Tone Settings: . EQ (Equalizer): Turn the MENU normal mode. This provides the
. Bass, Midrange, and Treble: knob to highlight. Turn the best sound quality for all seating
Turn the MENU knob to MENU knob to scroll through the positions.
highlight. Press the MENU knob options. Press the MENU knob . Driver: Adjusts the audio to give
to select. Turn the MENU knob to select. Press q BACK button the driver the best possible
to adjust. to go to the previous menu. sound quality.
. Balance: Turn the MENU knob . Rear: Adjusts the audio to give
Station List: Select to display a list
to highlight. Press the MENU of AM or FM stations. Press q the rear seat occupants the best
knob to select. Turn the MENU possible sound quality.
BACK to go to the previous menu.
knob left for more sound from . Centerpoint®: Turns on Bose
the left speakers or right for Auto Volume: If equipped, this
Centerpoint® surround
more sound from the right feature adjusts the volume based on
technology.
speakers. The middle position the vehicle speed. Select the level
balances the sound between the between off, low, medium-low, Centerpoint creates a surround
left and right speakers. medium, medium-high, and high. sound from nearly any audio
Press q BACK to go to the source: existing CD collection,
previous menu. satellite radio, and audio players.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Options for SiriusXM Only Tuning a Station deleting a favorite. See “Manage
XM View: XM view allows the Turn the MENU knob to manually Favorites” under Overview on
channel list to be viewed by channel find a station. page 7-3.
name, artist playing on channel,
or song playing on channel. Select Storing Radio Station Presets Satellite Radio
to display Channel List in XM views. Up to 25 preset stations from all SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
Turn the MENU knob to highlight bands can be stored in the favorite
and press the MENU knob to select.
Service
lists in any order. Up to five stations
Press q BACK to go to the can be stored in each favorite page Vehicles with a SiriusXM satellite
previous menu. and the number of favorites can radio tuner and a SiriusXM satellite
be set. radio subscription can receive
Channel List: Select to display a SiriusXM programming.
list of SiriusXM channels. Turn the AM, FM, or SiriusXM (If
MENU knob to highlight and press Equipped): While on the active SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
source main page, such as AM, FM, based in the 48 contiguous United
the MENU knob to select. Press q
and SiriusXM (if equipped), press States and 10 Canadian provinces.
BACK to go to the previous menu. SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
and hold the corresponding key.
Also see the radio settings common variety of programming and
for all sources earlier in this section. Mixed-Audio Favorites commercial-free music, coast to
Favorites can be stored including coast, and in digital-quality sound.
Finding a Station A service fee is required to receive
radio stations.
Seeking a Station the SiriusXM service. See
To display the favorites page, press www.siriusxmradio.com or call
Press g or l to search for the q or r on the radio faceplate. 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.); or see
previous or next strongest station, From the Settings menu, press the www.xmradio.ca or call
or press and hold to quickly search MENU knob to select Manage 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
through stations. Favorites. The Manage Favorites
feature has the option of moving or
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
When SiriusXM is active, the Channel Off Air: This station is not Radio Reception
channel name and number, currently in service.
category name, song title, and artist Frequency interference and static
Channel Not Authorized: This can occur during normal radio
display on the screen. station is blocked or cannot be reception if items such as phone
Browsing SiriusXM Channels received. chargers, vehicle convenience
To browse the SiriusXM channels: Channel Not Available: This accessories, and external electronic
previously assigned station is no devices are plugged into the
1. Press the MENU knob. longer assigned. accessory power outlet. If there is
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight interference or static, unplug the
No XM Signal/Reception May Be
XM Channel List. item from the accessory power
Blocked: The vehicle may be in a
outlet.
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight location where the SiriusXM signal
the desired XM Channels. is being blocked. When the vehicle FM
is moved into an open area, the
SiriusXM Messages signal should return. FM signals only reach about 16 to
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
XL (Explicit Language XM Radio ID: When tuned to radio has a built-in electronic circuit
Channels): These stations, or any station 0, displays the SiriusXM that automatically works to reduce
others, can be blocked by request, eight-digit radio ID label. This label interference, some static can occur,
by calling 1-866-635-2349 in the is needed to activate the service. especially around tall buildings or
U.S., and 1-877-209-0079 in hills, causing the sound to fade in
Canada. Check XM Antenna: If this
message does not clear within a and out.
Loading XM: The audio system is short period of time, the receiver or
acquiring and processing audio and AM
antenna could have a fault. Consult
text data. No action is needed. with your dealer. The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with
each other. Static can also occur
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
when things like storms and power Backglass Antenna

lines interfere with radio reception. { Caution
When this happens, try reducing the The AM-FM antenna is integrated
treble on the radio. with the rear window defogger in the Do not apply aftermarket glass
rear window. Do not scratch the tinting with metallic film. The
SiriusXM Satellite Radio inside surface or damage the lines metallic film in some tinting
Service in the glass. If the inside surface is materials will interfere with or
damaged, it could interfere with distort the incoming radio
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
radio reception. For proper radio reception. Any damage caused to
provides digital radio reception. Tall
reception, the antenna connector the backglass antenna due to
buildings or hills can interfere with
needs to be properly attached to the metallic tinting materials will not
satellite radio signals, causing the
post on the glass. be covered by the vehicle
sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under If attaching a cell phone antenna to warranty.
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, the glass, attach it between the grid
or tunnels may cause loss of the lines.
SiriusXM signal for a period of time. Multi-Band Antenna
Cell Phone Usage { Caution The roof antenna is for OnStar®,
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio, and GPS
Cell phone usage, such as making Using a razor blade or sharp (Global Positioning System). Keep
or receiving phone calls, charging, object to clear the inside rear clear of obstructions for clear
or just having the phone on may window can damage the rear reception. If the vehicle has a
cause static interference in the window antenna and/or the rear sunroof, and it is open, reception
radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off window defogger. Repairs would can also be affected.
if this happens. not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not clear the inside
rear window with sharp objects.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Audio Players There can be increased skipping,

difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
damaged or improperly loaded,
there is an error and the disc
difficulty in loading and ejecting. ejects.
CD Player If these problems occur, check the
disc for damage or try a known Playing an Audio CD
The CD player can be used for CD
and MP3 audio. good disc. Press the MEDIA button on the
To avoid damage to the CD player: faceplate until CD is selected.
With the vehicle on, insert a disc
into the slot, label side up. Press the . Do not use scratched or On the CD main page, a track
MEDIA button to select CD as a damaged discs. number displays at the beginning of
source. each track. Song, Artist, and Album
. Do not apply labels to discs. The information displays when available.
The system is capable of playing: labels could get caught in the
. player. Use the following screen controls to
Most audio CDs
play the disc:
. CD-R . Insert only one disc at a time.
t (Seek Previous/Fast Reverse):
. CD-RW . Keep the loading slot free of While on the CD main page:
foreign materials, liquids, and
. MP3 or unprotected WMA debris.
. Press to seek to the beginning of
formats the current or previous track.
. Use a marking pen to label the If the track has been playing for
When playing any compatible top of the disc.
recordable disc, the sound quality less than five seconds, it seeks
can be reduced due to disc quality, Loading and Ejecting Discs to the previous track. If longer
the method of recording, the quality than five seconds, the current
To load a disc: track starts from the beginning.
of the music that has been
recorded, or the way the disc has 1. Turn the vehicle on. . Press and hold to fast reverse
been handled. 2. Insert a disc into the slot, label through a track. Release the
side up. The player pulls it in the button to return to playing
rest of the way. If the disc is speed. Elapsed time displays.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
u (Seek Next/Fast Forward): Tone Settings: Select to adjust Error Messages

While on the CD main page: Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
If Disc Error displays and/or the disc
Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
. Press to seek to the next track. comes out, it could be for one of the
“Tone Settings” under AM-FM Radio
following reasons:
. Press and hold to fast forward on page 7-7.
through a track. Release the . The disc has an invalid or
Auto Volume: If equipped, this
button to return to playing unknown format.
feature adjusts the volume based on
speed. Elapsed time displays. the vehicle speed. Select the level . The disc is very hot. Try the disc
j /r (Pause/Play): While on the CD between off, low, medium-low, again when the temperature
main page, press to pause. Press medium, medium-high, and high. returns to normal.
again to resume. Press q BACK to go to the . The road is very rough. Try the
Z (Shuffle): Press Z to play the previous menu. disc again when the road is
songs in random order. Press again EQ (Equalizer) Settings: smoother.
to turn off. If equipped, this feature adjusts the . The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
®
If a Blu-ray Disc or DVD disc is DSP Modes. See “EQ (Equalizer) or upside down.
loaded into the CD player and the Settings” in AM-FM Radio on . The air is very humid. Try the
CD screen button is selected, a disc page 7-7.
disc again later.
error occurs and the disc is ejected. DSP Modes: If equipped, this . There was a problem while
CD Menu feature adjusts the DSP Modes.
burning the disc.
See “DSP Modes” in AM-FM Radio
While on the CD main page, press on page 7-7. . The label is caught in the CD
the MENU knob to display the CD player.
menu and the following may display:
Browse: Select to display the files
or songs on the CD. See “Browse
CD Media” later in this section.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Maximum number of folders:
If Disc Player Error displays, it could
eight folders with 255 files per
USB Port
be for one of the following reasons:
folder. Playing from a USB
. The player temperature is
too high.
. Maximum of 1,000 files on A USB mass storage device or
.
a disc. Media Transfer Protocol (MTP)
There are load or eject errors.
. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW. device can be connected to the
If the CD is not playing correctly, for USB port.
any other reason, try a known Root Directory
The USB port is in the center
good CD. The root directory is treated as a console and if equipped with
If any error continues, contact your folder. All files contained directly storage behind the radio, there is a
dealer. under the root directory are USB port inside.
accessed prior to any root directory
Playing an MP3 CD folders. USB MP3 Player and USB Drives
To play an MP3 CD, follow the same Empty Folders
. The USB MP3 players and USB
instructions as “Playing an drives connected must comply
Audio CD.” If a root directory or folder is empty with the USB Mass Storage
or contains only folders, the player Class specification (USB MSC).
The following guidelines must be advances to the next folder in the
met when creating an MP3 disc, file structure that contains a
. Hard disk drives are not
otherwise the CD might not play: compressed audio file. The empty supported.
. Sampling rate: 16 kHz, folder(s) are not displayed or To play a USB device:
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, numbered. . Connect the USB.
44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
No Folder . Press the MEDIA button on the
. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24, faceplate until the connected
When the CD only contains
32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, device is shown.
compressed audio files without any
128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,
folders, all files are under the root
and 320 kbps.
folder.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
While the USB source is active, use Auto Volume: If equipped, see There may be problems with
the icons on the screen to operate “Playing an Audio CD.” operation and function in the
USB function: EQ (Equalizer) Settings: following situations:
. t (Seek Previous/Fast If equipped, this feature adjusts the . When connecting an iPod on
Reverse) pre-defined EQ Modes. See “EQ which a more recent version of
(Equalizer) Settings” in AM-FM the firmware is installed than is
. u (Seek Next/Fast Forward) Radio on page 7-7. supported by the infotainment
DSP Modes: If equipped, this system.
. j /r (Play/Pause)
feature adjusts the DSP Modes. . When connecting an iPod on
. Z (Shuffle) See “DSP Modes” in AM-FM Radio which firmware from other
on page 7-7. providers is installed.
For information on how to use the
screen icons, see “Playing an Audio Playing from an iPod® To connect and control an iPod:
CD” previously in this section. 1. Connect one end of the standard
This feature supports the following
USB Menu iPod models: iPod USB cable to the iPod's
dock connector.
Press the MENU knob to display the . iPod nano® (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
USB menu and the following may 4th generation) 2. Connect the other end to the
display: USB port in the center console.
. iPod with video (5.0 and 5.5
Browse: Select to display the files generation). 3. Press the MEDIA button to
and folders on the USB device. ® select the source.
. iPod classic (6th generation)
Tone Settings: Select to adjust iPod music information displays on
. iPod touch® (1st and 2nd the radio’s display and begins
Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
generation) playing through the vehicle’s audio
Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
“Tone Settings” under “Playing an system.
Audio CD.”
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
The iPod battery recharges EQ (Equalizer) Settings: Artists:

automatically while the vehicle is on. If equipped, this feature adjusts the 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
When the vehicle is off while an pre-defined EQ Modes. See “EQ and press to view the artists
iPod is connected using the iPod (Equalizer) Settings” in AM-FM stored on the iPod.
USB cable, the iPod battery stops Radio on page 7-7.
charging and the iPod automatically 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
DSP Modes: If equipped, this and press to select an artist
turns off. feature adjusts the DSP Modes. name to view a list of all albums
If the iPod is an unsupported model, See “DSP Modes” in AM-FM Radio by the artist.
it can still be listened to in the on page 7-7.
vehicle by connecting to the 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
auxiliary input jack using a standard Browse iPod Media and press to select the album
3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. Use the following to browse: from the list.
iPod Menu Playlists: 4. To begin playback, select a song
from the album.
Press the MENU knob to display the 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
iPod Menu and the following may and press to view the playlists Albums:
display: stored on the iPod. 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
Browse: Select to display the files 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to view the albums
or songs on the iPod. See “Browse and press to select a playlist stored on the iPod.
iPod Media” later in this section. name to view a list of all songs 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
in the playlist. and press to select an album
Tone Settings: Select to adjust
Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight name to view a list of all songs
Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See and press to select the song on the album.
“Tone Settings” under “Playing an from the list to begin playback. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
Audio CD.” and press to select the song
Auto Volume: If equipped, see from the list to begin playback.
“Playing an Audio CD.”
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Genres: 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select the song from the auxiliary device to the
and press to view the genres from the list to begin playback. auxiliary input jack.
stored on the iPod. Playing from an iPhone® If an auxiliary device has already
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight or iPad® been connected, but a different
and press to select a genre source is currently active, press the
This feature supports iPhone 3G, MEDIA faceplate button repeatedly
name to view a list of artists of iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4, and iPad.
that genre. to scroll through all of the available
Follow the same instructions as audio source screens, until the AUX
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight stated earlier for using an iPod. source screen is shown.
and press to select to view
albums by that artist. Playing from the AUX Jack
Auxiliary Jack
4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight An auxiliary device is played
and press to select an album to The AUX jack is in the center through the audio system and
view songs. console. See Center Console controlled through the device itself.
Storage on page 4-2.
5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight AUX Menu
and press to select the song Possible auxiliary audio sources
include: Press the MENU knob to display the
from the list to begin playback. AUX menu and the following may
Songs:
. Laptop computer display:
. Audio music player Tone Settings: Select to adjust
and press to view a list of all This jack is not an audio output. Do Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
songs stored on the iPod. not plug headphones into the Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
auxiliary input jack. Auxiliary “Tone Settings” under AM-FM Radio
devices should be set up while the on page 7-7.
vehicle is in P (Park).
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Auto Volume: If equipped, see Phone duplicate or rarely used entries.

“Playing an Audio CD.” If possible, program speed dial
or other shortcuts.
EQ (Equalizer) Settings: Bluetooth (Overview)
If equipped, this feature adjusts the . Review the controls and
pre-defined equalizer settings. See Instructions for using the cell phone operation of the infotainment
“EQ (Equalizer) Settings” in AM-FM may differ between infotainment system.
Radio on page 7-7. systems. For vehicles with an
uplevel radio, see the infotainment
. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
manual. The system may not work with
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in
Bluetooth-capable systems can this section.
interact with many cell phones,
allowing:
. If the cell phone has voice
dialing capability, learn to use
. Placement and receipt of calls in that feature to access the
a hands-free mode. address book or contact list. See
. Sharing of the cell phone’s “Voice Pass-Thru” in this
address book or contact list with section.
the vehicle. . See “Storing and Deleting Phone
To minimize driver distraction, Numbers” in this section.
before driving, and with the vehicle
parked: { Warning
. Become familiar with the
When using a cell phone, it can
features of the cell phone.
Organize the phone book and be distracting to look too long or
contact lists clearly and delete too often at the screen of the
phone or the infotainment system.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Bluetooth Controls PHONE: From the Home Page,

Warning (Continued) select to enter the phone main
Use the buttons on the Instrument
menu. See Bluetooth (Infotainment
Taking your eyes off the road too Panel, faceplate, and the steering
Controls) on page 7-20 or Bluetooth
long or too often could cause a wheel to operate the Bluetooth
(Voice Recognition) on page 7-24 or
crash resulting in injury or death. system.
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-18.
Focus your attention on driving. Steering Wheel Controls
Voice Recognition
g (Push to Talk): Press to answer
The voice recognition system uses
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system incoming calls or start voice
can use a Bluetooth-capable cell recognition. commands to control the system
phone with a Hands-Free Profile to and dial phone numbers.
make and receive phone calls. The c (End Call): Press to end a call, Noise: The system may not
infotainment system and voice reject a call, or cancel an operation.
Press to mute or unmute the recognize voice commands if there
recognition are used to control the is too much background noise, such
system. The system can be used infotainment system.
as noise from open windows or loud
while in ON/RUN or ACC/ Infotainment System Controls talking inside the vehicle.
ACCESSORY. The range of the
Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m For information about how to When to Speak: A tone sounds to
(30 ft). Not all phones support all navigate the menu system using the indicate that the system is ready for
functions and not all phones work infotainment controls, see Overview a voice command. Wait for the tone
with the Bluetooth system. See on page 7-3. and then speak.
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more MENU: Turn to scroll through a list. How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
information about compatible Press to select the highlighted list calm and natural voice.
phones. option.
{ (Home Page): Press to go to the
Home Page. See Home Page on
page 7-4.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Audio System Bluetooth (Infotainment Pairing Information

When using the Bluetooth system, Controls) . Up to five cell phones can be
sound comes through the vehicle's paired to the Bluetooth system.
For information about how to
front audio system speakers and . The pairing process is disabled
navigate the menu system using the
overrides the audio system. Use the when the vehicle is moving.
infotainment controls, see Overview
O knob during a call to change the on page 7-3.
volume level. The system maintains
. Pairing only needs to be
a minimum volume level. Switching to Handset or completed once per phone,
unless the pairing information on
Bluetooth Audio Quality Hands-Free Mode the cell phone changes or the
Turn off the Echo and Noise To switch between handset mode cell phone is deleted from the
cancellation feature on your phone, and hands-free mode, use the system.
if supported, for the best hands-free OnStar command, “transfer call.” . Only one paired cell phone can
performance. Pairing be connected to the Bluetooth
See www.gm.com/bluetooth. system at a time.
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired to the Bluetooth . If multiple paired cell phones are
Other Information within range of the system, the
system and then connected to the
The Bluetooth® word mark and vehicle before it can be used. See system connects to the first
logos are owned by the Bluetooth® your cell phone manufacturer's user available paired cell phone in the
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks guide for Bluetooth functions before order that they were newly
by General Motors is under license. pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth paired to the system. To connect
Other trademarks and trade names phone is not connected, calls can to a different paired phone, see
are those of their respective owners. be made using OnStar Hands-Free “Connecting to a Different
Calling, if available. See OnStar Phone” later in this section.
Overview.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Pairing a Phone or Device 5. Locate the device named “Your Deleting a Paired Phone
1. From the Home Page, turn the Vehicle” in the list on the cell 1. From the Home Page, turn the
MENU knob to access the phone. Follow the instructions MENU knob, then press to
PHONE screen button, then on the cell phone to enter the select the PHONE screen
press the MENU knob to select PIN provided in Step 3. button.
the PHONE screen button. If a After the PIN is successfully 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
device has been previously entered, the system confirms the to select Manage Phones.
paired, the main Phone menu pairing process is complete.
will be shown. If no devices 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
6. If the phone prompts to accept the phone to be deleted.
have been paired, Step 2 can be connection or allow phone book
skipped. download, select always accept 4. Press the button below the
2. Turn the MENU knob and press and allow. The phone book may DELETE screen button to delete
to select Manage Phones. not be available if not accepted. the highlighted device.
3. Press the button just below the 7. Repeat steps 1–6 to pair 5. A confirmation screen is
PAIR/screen button. A four-digit additional phones or devices. displayed. Press the button just
Personal Identification Number below the DELETE screen
(PIN) appears on the display. Listing All Paired and Connected button to confirm deletion.
The PIN may be used in Step 5. Phones
Connecting to a Different Phone
4. Start the pairing process on the 1. To list all paired devices, from
the Home Page turn the MENU 1. From the Home Page, turn the
cell phone to be paired to the MENU knob, then press to
knob, then press to select the
vehicle. See the cell phone select the PHONE screen button
PHONE screen button.
manufacturer's user guide for or press the PHONE button on
information on this process. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press the faceplate.
to select Manage Phones.
2. Turn the MENU knob and press
to select Manage Phones.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Making a Call Using Contacts The Recent Calls menu allows you
the phone to be connected. and Recent Calls to access the phone numbers from
4. Press the button just below the the Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls,
For cell phones that support the and Missed Calls menus on the cell
CONNECT screen button to Contacts and Recent Calls feature,
connect to the highlighted phone to make a call.
the Bluetooth system can use the
device. contacts stored on your cell phone To make a call using the
to make calls. See your cell phone Contacts menu:
Phone Menu
manufacturer’s user guide or 1. From the Home Page, turn the
Once a phone is connected and contact your wireless provider to MENU knob, then press to
selected, the following may display: find out if this feature is supported select the PHONE screen
Recent Calls: Turn the MENU by your phone. button.
knob to highlight Recent Calls and If the phone prompts to allow phone 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
press to select. book download during the pairing Contacts and press to select.
Contacts: Turn the MENU knob to process, select Always Accept and
Allow. The phone book may not be 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
highlight Contacts and press to the letter group and press to
select. available if not accepted.
select.
Keypad: Turn the MENU knob to When a cell phone supports the
phone book feature, the Contacts 4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
highlight Keypad and press to the contact and press to select.
select. and Recent Calls menus are
automatically available. 5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
Active Call: Turn the MENU knob the desired number, then press
to highlight Active Call and press to The Contacts menu allows you to
access the phone book stored in the the MENU knob to call the
select and display the active call contact.
screen. cell phone to make a call.
Manage Phones: Turn the MENU
knob to highlight Manage Phones
and press to select.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
To make a call using the Recent 2. Turn the MENU knob and press Declining a Call
Calls menu: to select Keypad. To decline a call, do one of the
1. From the Home Page, turn the 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight following:
MENU knob, then press to the first digit and press to select. . Press the button just below the
select the PHONE screen Continue this process through IGNORE screen button.
button. the number. To call, press the
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight button just below the CALL . Press c on the steering wheel
Recent Calls and press to screen button. controls.
select. Accepting or Declining a Call . Do nothing.
If necessary, select between When an incoming call is received, Call Waiting
Missed, Recent, and Sent calls the infotainment system mutes and
by pressing the button below the a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. Call waiting must be supported on
appropriate screen button. the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
Accepting a Call the wireless service carrier to work.
the contact or the phone To accept a call, do one of the Accepting a Call Waiting Call
number. following:
To accept a call waiting call, do one
4. Press the MENU knob to call the . Press the button just below the of the following:
contact. ANSWER screen button. . Press the button just below the
Making a Call Using the . Press g on the steering wheel SWITCH screen button.
Keypad controls. . Press g on the steering wheel
To make a call: controls.
1. From the Home Page, turn the
MENU knob, then press to
select the PHONE screen
button.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Declining a Call Waiting Call 1. When a call is active, press the Pairing
To decline a call waiting call, do one button just below the KEYPAD
screen button. Pairing a Phone
of the following:
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 1. Press g. The system responds
. Press the button just below the
the first digit and press to select. “Ready,” followed by a tone.
IGNORE screen button.
If not initially in the phone 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
. Press c on the steering wheel application, from the Home Page,
controls. 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
turn the MENU knob, then press to with instructions and a four-digit
. Do nothing. select the PHONE screen button. Personal Identification Number
From the PHONE main menu, turn (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
Ending a Call the MENU knob to highlight Active
To end a call, do one of the Call and press to select. 4. Start the pairing process on the
following: cell phone that you want to pair.
Bluetooth (Voice For help with this process, see
. Press the button just below the your cell phone manufacturer's
END screen button. Recognition) user guide.
. Press c on the steering wheel Using Voice Recognition 5. Locate the device named “Your
controls. Vehicle” in the list on the cell
To use voice recognition, press g phone. Follow the instructions
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency on the steering wheel. Use the on the cell phone to enter the
(DTMF) Tones commands below for the various PIN provided in Step 3. After the
voice features. For additional PIN is successfully entered, the
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can information, say “Help” while you
send numbers during a call. This is system prompts you to provide a
are in a voice recognition menu. name for the paired cell phone.
used when calling a menu-driven
phone system. This name will be used to
indicate which phones are
paired and connected to the
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
vehicle. The system responds 2. Say “Bluetooth.” 3. Say “Change phone.”

with “<Phone name> has been 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks . If another cell phone is
successfully paired” after the for which phone to delete. found, the response will be
pairing process is complete. “<Phone name> is now
4. Say the name of the phone to
6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pair delete. connected.”
additional phones. This can be repeated to
Connecting to a Different Phone connect any of the up to
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones To connect to a different cell phone, five paired phones.
the Bluetooth system looks for the . If another cell phone is not
The system can list all cell phones next available cell phone in the
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is found, the original phone
order in which all available cell remains connected.
also connected to the vehicle, the phones were paired. This may need
system responds with “is connected” to be repeated depending on how
after that phone name.
Storing and Deleting Phone
many cell phones have been Numbers
1. Press g. The system responds connected.
The following commands are used
“Ready,” followed by a tone. 1. Press g. The system responds to delete and store phone numbers.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” “Ready,” followed by a tone. Store: This command will store a
3. Say “List.” 2. Say “Bluetooth.” phone number, or a group of
numbers as a name tag.
Deleting a Paired Phone
Digit Store: This command allows
If the phone name to delete is a phone number to be stored as a
unknown, see “Listing All Paired name tag by entering the digits one
and Connected Phones.” at a time.
1. Press g. The system responds Delete: This command is used to
“Ready,” followed by a tone. delete individual name tags.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Delete All Name Tags: This 2. Say “Digit Store.” 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
command deletes all stored name 3. Say each digit, one at a time.
tags in the Hands-Free Calling Listing Stored Numbers
After each digit is entered, the
Directory and the Destinations system repeats back the digit it The list command will list all the
Directory. heard followed by a tone. After stored numbers and name tags.
Using the “Store” Command the last digit has been entered, Using the “List” Command
say “Store,” and then follow the
1. Press g. The system responds directions given by the system to 1. Press g. The system responds
“Ready,” followed by a tone. save a name tag for this number. “Ready,” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Store.” Using the “Delete” Command 2. Say “Directory.”
3. Say the entire phone number or 3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”
1. Press g. The system responds
a group of digits all at once with
“Ready,” followed by a tone. 4. Say “List.”
no pauses, then follow the
directions given by the system to 2. Say “Delete.” Making a Call
save a name tag for this number. 3. Say the name tag you want to Calls can be made using the
Using the “Digit Store” Command delete. following commands.
If an unwanted number is Using the “Delete All Name Tags” Dial or Call: The dial or call
recognized by the system, say Command command can be used
“Correction” at any time to clear the This command deletes all stored interchangeably to dial a phone
last number. name tags in the Hands-Free number or a stored name tag.
To hear all of the digits recognized Calling Directory and the Digit Dial: This command allows a
by the system, say “Verify” at Destinations Directory. phone number to be dialed by
any time. To delete all name tags: entering the digits one at a time.
1. Press g. The system responds 1. Press g. The system responds
Re-dial: This command is used to
“Ready,” followed by a tone. dial the last number used on the cell
“Ready,” followed by a tone. phone.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Using the “Dial” or “Call” 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” heard followed by a tone. After
Command 3. Say “066.” the last digit has been entered,
say “Dial.”
1. Press g. The system responds 4. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
“Say a command or say help,” Once connected, the person called
followed by a tone. Using the “Digit Dial” Command will be heard through the audio
The digit dial command allows a speakers.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
phone number to be dialed by Using the “Re-dial” Command
3. Say the entire number without entering the digits one at a time.
pausing or say the name tag. After each digit is entered, the 1. Press g. The system responds
Once connected, the person called system repeats back the digit it “Say a command or say help,”
will be heard through the audio heard followed by a tone. followed by a tone.
speakers. If an unwanted number is 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” The
Calling 911 Emergency (U.S. and recognized by the system, say system dials the last number
Canada) “Correction” at any time to clear the called from the connected cell
last number. phone.
1. Press g. The system responds Once connected, the person called
To hear all of the numbers
“Say a command or say help,” recognized by the system, say will be heard through the audio
followed by a tone. “Verify” at any time. speakers.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
1. Press g. The system responds Receiving a Call
3. Say “911.” “Say a command or say help,” When an incoming call is received,
4. Say “Dial” or “Call.” followed by a tone. the audio system mutes and a ring
Calling 066 Emergency (Mexico) 2. Say “Digit Dial.” tone is heard in the vehicle.

3. Say each digit, one at a time. . Press g to answer the call.
After each digit is entered, the
“Say a command or say help,” system repeats back the digit it
. Press c to ignore a call.
followed by a tone.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Call Waiting 3. Use the “Dial” or “Call” command 2. Say “Transfer Call.”
to dial the number of the third
Call waiting must be supported on To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
party to be called.
the cell phone and enabled by the System from a Cell Phone
wireless service carrier. 4. Once the call is connected,
During a call with the audio on the
press g to link all callers
. Press g to answer an incoming cell phone, press g. The audio
together.
call when another call is active. transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
The original call is placed Ending a Call does not transfer to the vehicle, use
on hold. the audio transfer feature on the cell
Press c to end a call. phone. See your cell phone
. Press g again to return to the manufacturer's user guide for more
original call. Transferring a Call
information.
. To ignore the incoming call, no Audio can be transferred between
action is required. the Bluetooth system and the cell Voice Pass-Thru
phone. Voice pass-thru allows access to the
. Press c to disconnect the voice recognition commands on the
The cell phone must be paired and
current call and switch to the call cell phone. See your cell phone
connected with the Bluetooth
on hold. manufacturer's user guide to see if
system before a call can be
Three-Way Calling transferred. The connection process the cell phone supports this feature.
can take up to two minutes after the To access contacts stored in the cell
Three-way calling must be ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
supported on the cell phone and phone:
enabled by the wireless service To Transfer Audio from the 1. Press g. The system responds
carrier. Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone “Say a command or say help,”
1. While on a call, press g. During a call with the audio in the followed by a tone.
vehicle: 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
2. Say “Three-way call.”
1. Press g.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
3. Say “Voice.” The system Sending a Number or Name Tag Trademarks and
responds “OK, accessing During a Call
<phone name>.” License Agreements
The cell phone's normal prompt “Ready,” followed by a tone. FCC Information
messages will go through their cycle
according to the phone's operating 2. Say “Dial.” See Radio Frequency Statement on
instructions. page 13-15.
3. Say the number or name tag
to send.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones Clearing the System
The Bluetooth system can send Unless information is deleted out of
numbers and the numbers stored as the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
name tags during a call. You can will be retained indefinitely. This
use this feature when calling a includes all phone pairing
menu-driven phone system. information. For information on how “Made for iPod” and “Made for
Account numbers can also be to delete this information, see iPhone” mean that an electronic
stored for use. “Deleting a Paired Phone.” accessory has been designed to
connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone and has been certified by
the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
iPod and iPhone are trademarks of
Apple Computer, Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Explicit Language Notice: Channels patent rights, copyrights, and trade

with frequent explicit language are secrets of Digital Voice
indicated with an “XL” preceding the Systems, Inc.
channel name. Channel blocking is General Requirements:
available for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio receivers by notifying 1. A License Agreement from
SiriusXM: SiriusXM is required for any
Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee,
product that incorporates
taxes, one time activation fee, and . USA Customers — Visit SiriusXM Technology and/or for
other fees may apply. Subscription www.siriusxm.com or call use of any of the SiriusXM
fee is consumer only. All fees and 1-866-635-2349. marks to be manufactured,
programming subject to change. . Canadian Customers — Visit distributed, or marketed in the
Subscriptions subject to Customer
www.xmradio.ca or call SiriusXM service Area.
Agreement available at
1-877-209-0079.
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM® 2. For products to be distributed,
service only available in the It is prohibited to copy, decompile, marketed, and/or sold in
48 contiguous United States and disassemble, reverse engineer, Canada, a separate agreement
Canada. hack, manipulate, or otherwise is required with Canadian
make available any technology or Satellite Radio Inc. (operating as
In Canada: Some deterioration of
software incorporated in receivers SiriusXM Canada).
service may occur in extreme
compatible with the SiriusXM®
northern latitudes. This is beyond Bluetooth
Satellite Radio System or that
the control of SiriusXM® Satellite
support the SiriusXM website, the The Bluetooth word mark and logos
Radio.
Online Service or any of its content. are owned by the Bluetooth SIG,
Furthermore, the AMBER voice Inc. and any use of such marks by
compression software included in General Motors is under license.
this product is protected by Other trademarks and trade names
intellectual property rights including are those of their respective owners.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
1. Fan Control Fan Control: Turn the knob

2. A/C (Air Conditioning) clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
3. Air Delivery Modes
Temperature Control: Turn the
4. Defrost knob clockwise or counterclockwise
5. TEMP (Temperature Control) to increase or decrease the
temperature setting.
6. Recirculation
7. Rear Window Defogger
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
8-2 Climate Controls
Air Delivery Modes: Press Y, \, A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to If equipped with heated outside
[ , or - to change the direction of turn the air conditioning on or off. rearview mirrors, they turn on with
the airflow. An indicator light comes If the fan is turned off, the air the rear window defogger and help
on in the selected mode button. conditioner will not run and the to clear fog or frost from the surface
indicator light may turn off. of the mirror. See Heated Mirrors on
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the page 2-20.
instrument panel outlets. L (Recirculation): Press to turn
on recirculation. An indicator light
\ (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the comes on. Air is recirculated to { Caution
instrument panel outlets and the quickly cool the inside of the vehicle
floor outlets. or prevent outside air and odors Using a razor blade or sharp
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the from entering. object on the inside rear window
floor outlets. can damage the antenna or
Rear Window Defogger defogger. Repairs would not be
- (Defog): Air is directed to the
K (Rear Window Defogger): covered by the vehicle warranty.
windshield and floor outlets to clear Do not stick anything to the rear
Press to turn the rear window
the windows of fog or moisture. window.
defogger on or off.
0 (Defrost): Press to clear the The rear window defogger turns off
windshield of fog or frost more
automatically after about
quickly. Air is directed to the
10 minutes. If turned on again, it
windshield and side window outlets.
runs for about five minutes before
For best results, clear all snow and turning off. At higher speeds, the
ice from the windshield before rear window defogger may stay on
defrosting. continuously.
The upper region of gridlines on the
rear window are antenna lines and
are not intended to heat when the
defogger is activated.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Climate Control Influence on

eAssist Operation and Fuel
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with Economy (If Equipped)
this system.
The climate control system is
dependent upon other vehicle
systems for heat and power input.
Certain climate control settings can
lead to higher fuel usage and/or
fewer auto stops.
The following are climate control
settings that use more fuel:
. Comfort air conditioning mode.
. Defrost mode.
. Extreme temperature settings,
such as 15°C (60°F) or 32°C
(90°F).
1. Driver and Passenger 7. Air Delivery Modes
Temperature Controls
. High fan speed settings.
8. On/Off
2. Air Conditioning or Comfort/Eco To help reduce fuel usage:
9. Rear Window Defogger
Air Conditioning (eAssist Only) . Use the full automatic control as
10. SYNC described under “Automatic
3. Fan Control
Operation.”
4. Defrost . Use eco air conditioning, instead
5. AUTO (Automatic Operation) of the comfort air conditioning.
6. Recirculation
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Select a temperature setting that 2. Set the temperature. Allow the on. When the passenger settings
is higher in hot weather and system time to stabilize. Then are adjusted, the SYNC indicator
lower in cold weather. adjust the temperature as light is off.
. Turn off the air conditioning needed for best comfort. O (On/Off): Press the knob to turn
when it is not needed. To improve fuel efficiency and to the fan on or off.
. Only use defrost when needed cool the vehicle faster, recirculation Fan Control: Turn the knob
to clear the windows. may be automatically selected in clockwise or counterclockwise to
warm weather. increase or decrease the fan speed.
Automatic Operation
The recirculation light will not come Press AUTO to return to automatic
The system automatically controls on when automatically controlled.
the fan speed, air delivery, air operation.
Press h to manually select
conditioning, and recirculation in Air Delivery Modes: Press Y, \,
order to heat or cool the vehicle to recirculation; press it again to select
the desired temperature. outside air. [ , or - to change the direction of
the airflow. An indicator light comes
When the indicator light is on, the Manual Operation on in the selected mode button.
system is in full automatic operation. Driver and Passenger Changing the mode cancels the
If the air delivery mode or fan Temperature Control: The automatic operation and the system
setting is manually adjusted, the temperature can be adjusted goes into manual mode. Press
auto indicator turns off and displays separately for the driver and AUTO to return to automatic
will show the selected settings. passenger. operation.
To place the system in Turn the knob clockwise or Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
automatic mode: counterclockwise to increase or instrument panel outlets.
1. Press AUTO. decrease the driver or passenger
temperature setting. \ (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets and the
SYNC: Press to link all climate floor outlets.
zone settings to the driver settings.
The SYNC indicator light will turn
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the A/C (Comfort/Eco Air weather conditions, auto stops may
floor outlets. Conditioning) (For eAssist occur more frequently and the
Vehicles): Press to cycle between vehicle interior may be warmer as
- (Defog): Air is directed to the the off, eco, and comfort air compared to the comfort air
windshield and floor outlets to clear conditioning modes. The indicator conditioning setting. This setting
the windows of fog or moisture. will be lit in comfort and eco modes allows higher humidity inside the
0 (Defrost): Press to clear the and turns off when there is no A/C vehicle and window fogging before
windshield of fog or frost more function. If the fan is turned off, the the engine restarts.
quickly. Air is directed to the air conditioner will not run and the
windshield and side window outlets. indicator light may turn off. Pressing the 0 button during an
auto stop may restart the engine to
For best results, clear all snow and For comfort a/c, press A/C. The prevent window fogging. To reach
ice from the windshield before indicator will turn amber. comfort levels quickly during an
defrosting. Pressing this button again cancels auto stop, the engine will restart if
A/C (Air Conditioning) (For automatic air conditioning and turns the air conditioner is off and AUTO
Non-eAssist Vehicles): Press to off the air conditioner. Press AUTO or A/C is selected.
turn the air conditioning on or off. to return to automatic operation and If temperature controls are adjusted
If the fan is turned off, the air the air conditioner runs cooler by more than 1°C (1°F)
conditioner will not run and the automatically as needed. When the during an auto stop, the engine will
indicator light may turn off. indicator light is on, the air restart to ensure that comfort is
conditioner runs automatically to reached.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
cool the air inside the vehicle or to
operation and the air conditioner
dry the air as needed to defog the L (Recirculation): Press to turn
runs as needed. When the indicator on recirculation. An indicator light
windshield faster.
light is on, the air conditioner runs comes on. Air is recirculated to
automatically to cool the air inside For eco a/c, press A/C again. The quickly cool the inside of the vehicle
the vehicle or to dry the air as indicator will turn green. This setting or prevent outside air and odors
needed to defog the windshield balances fuel economy and air from entering.
faster. conditioning comfort. In warm
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Auto Defog: The climate control The upper region of gridlines on the previous settings to heat or cool the
system may have a sensor to rear window are antenna lines and inside of the vehicle. The rear defog
automatically detect high humidity are not intended to heat when the may come on during remote start
inside the vehicle. When high defogger is activated. based on cold ambient conditions.
humidity is detected, the climate If equipped with heated outside The rear defog indicator light may
control system may adjust to rearview mirrors, they turn on with not come on during a remote start.
outside air supply and turn on the the rear window defogger and help The front heated seats may turn on
air conditioner. The fan speed may to clear fog or frost from the surface if it is cold outside. The heated seat
slightly increase to help prevent of the mirror. See Heated Mirrors on indicator lights may not come on
fogging. If the climate control page 2-20. during a remote start. See Remote
system does not detect possible Vehicle Start on page 2-9 and
window fogging, it returns to normal Heated and Ventilated Seats on
operation. To turn Auto Defog off or { Caution page 1-11 (if equipped).
on, see “Climate and Air Quality”
Using a razor blade or sharp Sensors
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-40. object on the inside rear window
can damage the antenna or
Rear Window Defogger defogger. Repairs would not be
K (Rear Window Defogger): covered by the vehicle warranty.
Press to turn the rear window Do not stick anything to the rear
defogger on or off. window.
The rear window defogger turns off
automatically after about Remote Start Climate Control
10 minutes. If turned on again, it Operation (If Equipped):
runs for about five minutes before If equipped with remote start, the
turning off. At higher speeds, the climate control system may run
rear window defogger may stay on when the vehicle is started remotely.
continuously. The system uses the driver’s
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
The solar sensor on top of the Air Vents Side Air Vents
instrument panel near the
windshield monitors the solar heat. Center Air Vents
The climate control system uses the
sensor information to adjust the
temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery mode
for best comfort.
If the sensor is covered, the
automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
Move the thumbwheels (1) up or

down to open or close off the
Move the thumbwheels (1) left or airflow.
right to open or close off the airflow. Use the slider knobs (2) to change
Use the slider knobs (2) on the air the direction of the airflow.
vents to change the direction of the Operation Tips
airflow. . Keep all outlets open whenever
possible for best system
performance.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Keep the paths under all seats
clear of objects to help circulate Maintenance
the air inside the vehicle more
effectively. Passenger Compartment
. Use of non-GM approved hood Air Filter
deflectors can adversely affect The passenger compartment air
the performance of the system. filter removes most of the pollen and
. Do not attach any devices to the dust from the air that enters the
air vent louvers. This restricts vehicle. The filter will need to be
airflow and may cause damage replaced periodically. See
to the air vents. Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-2.
Using the climate control system
without an air filter installed is not
recommended. Water or other
debris could enter the system and
result in leaks or noises. Always
install a new filter when removing
the old filter.
For more information on filter
replacement, see your dealer.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .

Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-19
9-23
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Operating Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . 9-37
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Driver Assistance Systems

Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Driver Assistance
Driving Information Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Assistance Systems for
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust Assistance Systems for
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Running the Vehicle While Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Active Emergency Braking
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Automatic Transmission System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Track Events and Competitive Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-27 Side Blind Zone
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Lane Departure
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Brakes
Antilock Brake Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Fuel
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-33 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-57
Starting and Operating California Fuel
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-15 Ride Control Systems
Traction Control/Electronic Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Ignition Positions (Keyless Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-57
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Ignition Positions (Key
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
9-2 Driving and Operating
E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

. Designate a front seat
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
Filling a Portable Fuel distractions.
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60 Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Towing
and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
General Towing
task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61 activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into
Trailer Towing (eAssist) . . . . . . 9-64 from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Trailer Towing (All except governments have enacted laws driving.
eAssist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64 regarding driver distraction. Become . Wait until the vehicle is parked
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65 familiar with the local laws in
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
to the floor.
Conversions and Add-Ons To avoid distracted driving, always
Add-On Electrical . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66 to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
. Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Allow enough following distance
Control of a Vehicle
{ Warning between you and the driver in
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating
Taking your eyes off the road too are important factors in helping to
. Focus on the task of driving.
long or too often could cause a control a vehicle while driving.
crash resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving. Drunk Driving Braking
Death and injury associated with
Braking action involves perception
Refer to the Infotainment section for drinking and driving is a global
time and reaction time. Deciding to
more information on using that tragedy.
push the brake pedal is perception
system, including pairing and using time. Actually doing it is
a cell phone. { Warning reaction time.
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
Defensive Driving dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second. In
Defensive driving means “always perceptions, attentiveness, and that time, a vehicle moving at
expect the unexpected.” The first judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
step in driving defensively is to wear a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on can have a serious — or even distance in an emergency.
page 3-13. fatal — collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
. Assume that other road users drinking. include:
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between
other drivers) are going to be you and the vehicle in front
a driver who has been drinking.
careless and make mistakes. of you.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
Anticipate what they might do
and be ready. with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking.
who will not drink. . Keep pace with traffic.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
If the engine ever stops while the If the steering wheel is turned until it Steering in Emergencies
vehicle is being driven, brake reaches the end of its travel and is . There are some situations when
normally but do not pump the held against that position for an
steering around a problem may
brakes. Doing so could make the extended period of time, power
be more effective than braking.
pedal harder to push down. If the steering assist may be reduced.
engine stops, there will be some . Holding both sides of the
If the steering assist is used for an
power brake assist but it will be steering wheel allows you to turn
extended period of time, power
used when the brake is applied. 180 degrees without removing
assist may be reduced.
Once the power assist is used up, it a hand.
can take longer to stop and the Normal use of the power steering . The Antilock Brake System
brake pedal will be harder to push. assist should return when the
(ABS) allows steering while
system cools down.
braking.
Steering See specific vehicle steering
messages under Service Vehicle Off-Road Recovery
Electric Power Steering Messages on page 5-37. See your
The vehicle has electric power dealer if there is a problem.
steering. It does not have power
steering fluid. Regular maintenance Curve Tips
is not required. . Take curves at a reasonable
If power steering assist is lost due speed.
to a system malfunction, the vehicle . Reduce speed before entering a
can be steered, but may require curve.
increased effort. . Maintain a reasonable steady
See your dealer if there is a speed through the curve.
problem. . Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating
gently into the straightaway.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
The vehicle's right wheels can drop

. Steering or Cornering Skid — material on the road. Learn to
off the edge of a road onto the too much speed or steering in a recognize warning clues — such
shoulder while driving. Follow curve causes tires to slip and as enough water, ice, or packed
these tips: lose cornering force. snow on the road to make a
1. Ease off the accelerator and
. Acceleration Skid — too much mirrored surface — and slow
then, if there is nothing in the throttle causes the driving down when you have any doubt.
way, steer the vehicle so that it wheels to spin. . Try to avoid sudden steering,
straddles the edge of the Defensive drivers avoid most skids acceleration, or braking,
pavement. by taking reasonable care suited to including reducing vehicle speed
2. Turn the steering wheel about existing conditions, and by not by shifting to a lower gear. Any
one-eighth of a turn, until the overdriving those conditions. But sudden changes could cause
right front tire contacts the skids are always possible. the tires to slide.
pavement edge. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow Remember: Antilock brakes help
3. Turn the steering wheel to go these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid.
straight down the roadway. . Ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and steer the
Track Events and
Loss of Control way you want the vehicle to go. Competitive Driving
The vehicle may straighten out. Racing, track testing, or competitive
Skidding Be ready for a second skid if it driving may affect the vehicle
There are three types of skids that occurs. warranty. See the warranty manual
correspond to the vehicle's three . Slow down and adjust your before using the vehicle for racing
control systems: driving according to weather or other competitive driving.
. Braking Skid — wheels are not conditions. Stopping distance
rolling. can be longer and vehicle
control can be affected when
traction is reduced by water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
{ Caution { Caution { Warning

If the vehicle is used for track During a first time track or racing Wet brakes can cause crashes.
events and competitive driving, event, high rear axle They might not work as well in a
the engine may use more oil than temperatures can occur. Damage quick stop and could cause
it would with normal use. Low oil could be caused to the rear axle pulling to one side. You could
levels can damage the engine. and would not be covered by the lose control of the vehicle.
Check the oil level often and at vehicle warranty. After driving through a large
the proper level. See Engine Oil Do not drive as long or as fast the puddle of water or a car/vehicle
on page 10-11. first time the vehicle is driven on wash, lightly apply the brake
the track or raced. pedal until the brakes work
For the 2.5L L4 Engine: Add and normally.
keep the oil level at 1 L (1 qt) above
the high mark when driving under Driving on Wet Roads Flowing or rushing water creates
these conditions. For information on strong forces. Driving through
Rain and wet roads can reduce flowing water could cause the
how to check and add oil, see vehicle traction and affect your
Engine Oil on page 10-11 vehicle to be carried away. If this
ability to stop and accelerate.
happens, you and other vehicle
For the 3.6L Engine Only: Add and Always drive slower in these types
occupants could drown. Do not
keep the oil level at 0.5 L (0.5 qt) of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and ignore police warnings and be
above the high mark when driving very cautious about trying to drive
under these conditions. For deep‐standing or flowing water.
through flowing water.
information on how to check and
add oil, see Engine Oil on
page 10-11.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Have good tires with proper
Hydroplaning
tread depth. See Tires on
Hill and Mountain Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water page 10-42. Driving on steep hills or through
can build up under the vehicle's mountains is different than driving
tires so they actually ride on the
. Turn off cruise control.
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
water. This can happen if the road is driving in these conditions include:
wet enough and you are going fast Highway Hypnosis
enough. When the vehicle is
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in
Always be alert and pay attention to good shape.
hydroplaning, it has little or no your surroundings while driving.
contact with the road. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
. Check all fluid levels and brakes,
There is no hard and fast rule about safe place to park the vehicle tires, cooling system, and
hydroplaning. The best advice is to and rest. transmission.
slow down when the road is wet. Other driving tips include:
. Shift to a lower gear when going
down steep or long hills.
Other Rainy Weather Tips . Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
. Keep the interior
temperature cool.
{ Warning
. Allow extra following distance. . Keep your eyes moving — scan Using the brakes to slow the
the road ahead and to the sides. vehicle on a long downhill slope
. Pass with caution. can cause brake overheating, can
. Check the rearview mirror and
. Keep windshield wiping reduce brake performance, and
equipment in good shape. vehicle instruments often. could result in a loss of braking.
. Keep the windshield washer fluid Shift the transmission to a lower
reservoir filled. gear to let the engine assist the
brakes on a steep downhill slope.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Winter Driving apply the brakes sooner than when

{ Warning on dry pavement. See Antilock
Driving on Snow or Ice Brake System (ABS) on page 9-30.
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is Drive carefully when there is snow Allow greater following distance on
dangerous. This can cause or ice between the tires and the any slippery road and watch for
overheating of the brakes and road, creating less traction or grip. slippery spots. Icy patches can
loss of steering. Always have the Wet ice can occur at about 0°C occur on otherwise clear roads in
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to shaded areas. The surface of a
engine running and the vehicle
fall, resulting in even less traction. curve or an overpass can remain icy
in gear.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in when the surrounding roads are
freezing rain until roads can be clear. Avoid sudden steering
. Stay in your own lane. Do not treated with salt or sand. maneuvers and braking while
swing wide or cut across the Drive with caution, whatever the on ice.
center of the road. Drive at condition. Accelerate gently so Turn off cruise control on slippery
speeds that let you stay in your traction is not lost. Accelerating too surfaces.
own lane. quickly causes the wheels to spin
. Be alert on top of hills; and makes the surface under the Blizzard Conditions
something could be in your lane tires slick, so there is even less Being stuck in snow can be a
(stalled car, accident). traction. serious situation. Stay with the
. Pay attention to special road Try not to break the fragile traction. vehicle unless there is help nearby.
signs (falling rocks area, winding If you accelerate too fast, the drive If possible, use Roadside
roads, long grades, passing or wheels will spin and polish the Assistance. See Roadside
no-passing zones) and take surface under the tires even more. Assistance Program on page 13-5.
appropriate action. To get help and keep everyone in
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) the vehicle safe:
improves vehicle stability during
hard stops on slippery roads, but
flashers.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Tie a red cloth to an outside If it takes some time for help to
mirror. Warning (Continued) arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
. Fully open the air outlets on
{ Warning or under the instrument
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
Snow can trap engine exhaust panel. keeps the battery charged to restart
under the vehicle. This may . Adjust the climate control the vehicle and to signal for help
cause exhaust gases to get system to a setting that with the headlamps. Do this as little
inside. Engine exhaust contains circulates the air inside the as possible to save fuel.
carbon monoxide (CO) which vehicle and set the fan speed
cannot be seen or smelled. It can to the highest setting. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck
cause unconsciousness and even “Climate Control Systems” in
the Index. Slowly and cautiously spin the
death. wheels to free the vehicle when
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around If stuck too severely for the traction
Exhaust on page 9-26.
the base of your vehicle, system to free the vehicle, turn the
especially any that is blocking traction system off and use the
the exhaust pipe. To save fuel, run the engine for only rocking method. See Traction
short periods as needed to warm Control/Electronic Stability Control
. Check again from time to
the vehicle and then shut the engine on page 9-33.
time to be sure snow does
off and close the window most of
not collect there.
the way to save heat. Repeat this
. Open a window about 5 cm until help arrives but only when you
(2 in) on the side of the feel really uncomfortable from the
vehicle that is away from the cold. Moving about to keep warm
wind to bring in fresh air. also helps.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Slowly spinning the wheels in the

{ Warning forward and reverse directions { Warning
causes a rocking motion that could
If the vehicle's tires spin at high free the vehicle. If that does not get Do not load the vehicle any
speed, they can explode, and you the vehicle out after a few tries, it heavier than the Gross
or others could be injured. The might need to be towed out. If the Vehicle Weight Rating
vehicle can overheat, causing an vehicle does need to be towed out, (GVWR), or either the
engine compartment fire or other see Towing the Vehicle on maximum front or rear Gross
damage. Spin the wheels as little page 10-75. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
as possible and avoid going This can cause systems to
above 56 km/h (35 mph). Vehicle Load Limits break and change the way the
It is very important to know how vehicle handles. This could
Rocking the Vehicle to Get much weight the vehicle can cause loss of control and a
it Out carry. This weight is called the crash. Overloading can also
Turn the steering wheel left and vehicle capacity weight and shorten the life of the vehicle.
right to clear the area around the includes the weight of all
front wheels. Turn off any traction occupants, cargo, and all
system. Shift back and forth nonfactory-installed options.
between R (Reverse) and a low Two labels on the vehicle show
forward gear, spinning the wheels how much weight it may
as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
properly carry, the Tire and
wheels stop spinning before shifting Loading Information label and
gears. Release the accelerator the Certification label.
pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Tire and Loading Information A vehicle-specific Tire and Rating (GAWR) for the front and
Label Loading Information label is rear axle. See “Certification
attached to the vehicle's center Label” later in this section.
pillar (B-pillar). The Tire and
“Steps for Determining Correct
Loading Information label shows
Load Limit–
the number of occupant seating
positions (1), and the maximum 1. Locate the statement "The
vehicle capacity weight (2) in combined weight of
kilograms and pounds. occupants and cargo should
The Tire and Loading never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
Information label also shows the
placard.
tire size of the original
equipment tires (3) and the 2. Determine the combined
Label Example recommended cold tire inflation weight of the driver and
pressures (4). For more passengers that will be riding
1. Number of Occupant Seating
Positions information on tires and inflation in your vehicle.
see Tires on page 10-42 and 3. Subtract the combined
2. Maximum Vehicle Capacity Tire Pressure on page 10-50.
Weight weight of the driver and
There is also important loading passengers from XXX kg or
3. Size of the Original Equipment
Tires information on the Certification XXX lbs.
label. It tells you the Gross
4. Recommended Cold Tire Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Inflation Pressure
and the Gross Axle Weight
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
4. The resulting figure equals 6. If your vehicle will be towing

the available amount of cargo a trailer, load from your trailer
and luggage load capacity. will be transferred to your
For example, if the "XXX" vehicle. Consult this manual
amount equals 1400 lbs. and to determine how this
there will be five 150 lb reduces the available cargo
passengers in your vehicle, and luggage load capacity of
the amount of available cargo your vehicle.”
and luggage load capacity is See Trailer Towing (eAssist) on
650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) page 9-64 or Trailer Towing (All
= 650 lbs.) except eAssist) on page 9-64 for
5. Determine the combined important information on towing Example 1
weight of luggage and cargo a trailer, towing safety rules, and 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
being loaded on the vehicle. trailering tips. Example 1 = 453 kg
That weight may not safely (1,000 lbs).
exceed the available cargo
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
and luggage load capacity
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
calculated in Step 4.
(300 lbs).
3. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
seating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2 Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example
(750 lbs). (1,000 lbs). A vehicle-specific Certification
3. Available Cargo Weight = 3. Available Cargo Weight = label is attached to the vehicle's
113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). center pillar (B-pillar). The label
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and tells the gross weight capacity of
Loading Information label for the vehicle, called the Gross
specific information about the Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
vehicle's capacity weight and The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants,
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed If you put things inside the
the GVWR for the vehicle, or the vehicle — like suitcases, tools, Warning (Continued)
Gross Axle Weight Rating packages, or anything . Never stack heavier
(GAWR) for either the front or else — they will go as fast as the things, like suitcases,
rear axle. vehicle goes. If you have to stop inside the vehicle so that
And, if there is a heavy load, it or turn quickly, or if there is a some of them are above
should be spread out. See crash, they will keep going. the tops of the seats.
“Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this { Warning . Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
section. Things inside the vehicle can in the vehicle.
strike and injure people in a
{ Warning sudden stop or turn, or in a
. Secure loose items in the
vehicle.
Do not load the vehicle any crash.
. Do not leave a seat folded
heavier than the Gross . Put things in the cargo down unless needed.
Vehicle Weight Rating area of the vehicle. In the
(GVWR), or either the cargo area, put them as
maximum front or rear Gross far forward as possible.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Try to spread the weight
This can cause systems to evenly.
break and change the way the (Continued)
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Starting and Caution (Continued)

The vehicle may have an electronic
keyless ignition with pushbutton
Operating breaking-in guideline every
start.
time you get new brake Pressing the button cycles it through
New Vehicle Break-In linings. three modes: ACC/ACCESSORY,
ON/RUN/START, and Stopping the
Following break-in, engine speed
{ Caution and load can be gradually
Engine/OFF.
increased. The transmitter must be in the
The vehicle does not need an
vehicle for the system to operate.
elaborate break-in. But it will If the pushbutton start is not
perform better in the long run if Ignition Positions working, the vehicle may be near a
you follow these guidelines: strong radio antenna signal causing
(Keyless Access)
. Do not drive at any one interference to the Keyless Access
constant speed, fast or slow, system. See Remote Keyless Entry
for the first 805 km (500 mi). (RKE) System Operation on
Do not make full-throttle page 2-3.
starts. Avoid downshifting to To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle
brake or slow the vehicle. must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
. Avoid making hard stops for ON/RUN and the brake pedal must
the first 322 km (200 mi) or be applied.
so. During this time the new Stopping the Engine/LOCK/
brake linings are not yet OFF (No Indicator Lights): When
broken in. Hard stops with the vehicle is stopped, press the
new linings can mean ENGINE START/STOP button once
premature wear and earlier to turn the engine off.
replacement. Follow this
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
ignition will turn off, and Retained This can be done while the and must be shut off while driving,
Accessory Power (RAP) will remain vehicle is moving. After shifting press and hold the ENGINE START/
active. See Retained Accessory to N (Neutral), firmly apply the STOP button for longer than
Power (RAP) on page 9-24. brakes and steer the vehicle to a two seconds, or press twice in
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the safe location. five seconds.
ignition will return to ACC/ 3. Come to a complete stop, shift ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber
ACCESSORY and display the to P (Park), and turn the ignition Indicator Light): This mode allows
message SHIFT TO PARK in the to OFF. On vehicles with an some electrical accessories to be
Driver Information Center (DIC). automatic transmission, the shift used when the engine is off.
See Transmission Messages on lever must be in P (Park) to turn With the ignition off, pressing the
page 5-39. When the vehicle is the ignition switch to the OFF button one time without the brake
shifted into P (Park), the ignition position. pedal applied will place the ignition
system will switch to OFF. 4. Set the parking brake. See system in ACC/ACCESSORY.
Do not turn the engine off when the Parking Brake on page 9-31. The ignition will switch from ACC/
vehicle is moving. This will cause a ACCESSORY to OFF after
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
{ Warning five minutes to prevent battery
rundown.
the airbags. Turning off the vehicle while
moving may cause loss of power ON/RUN/START (Green Indicator
If the vehicle must be shut off in an Light): This mode is for driving and
emergency: assist in the brake and steering
systems and disable the airbags. starting. With the ignition off, and
1. Brake using a firm and steady While driving, only shut the the brake pedal applied, pressing
pressure. Do not pump the the button once will place the
vehicle off in an emergency.
brakes repeatedly. This may ignition system in ON/RUN/START.
deplete power assist, requiring Once engine cranking begins,
increased brake pedal force. release the button. Engine cranking
will continue until the engine starts.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
See Starting the Engine on Ignition Positions (Key Caution (Continued)

page 9-19. The ignition will then
remain in ON/RUN.
Access)
only with your hand. If the key
Service Only Mode cannot be turned by hand, see
This power mode is available for your dealer.
service and diagnostics, and to
verify the proper operation of the The key must be fully extended to
malfunction indicator lamp as may start the vehicle.
be required for emission inspection
purposes. With the vehicle off, and To shift out of P (Park), turn the
the brake pedal not applied, ignition to ON/RUN and apply the
pressing and holding the button for brake pedal.
more than five seconds will place 1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/
the vehicle in Service Only Mode. OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,
The instruments and audio systems turn the ignition switch to LOCK/
will operate as they do in ON/RUN, The ignition switch has four different OFF to turn the engine off. Retained
but the vehicle will not be able to be positions. Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
driven. The engine will not start in active. See Retained Accessory
Service Only Mode. Press the
button again to turn the vehicle off. { Caution Power (RAP) on page 9-24.
This is the only position from which
Using a tool to force the key to the key can be removed. This locks
turn in the ignition could cause the ignition and automatic
damage to the switch or break the transmission.
key. Use the correct key, make
sure it is all the way in, and turn it
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Do not turn the engine off when the 4. Set the parking brake. See ventilation fan and 12-volt power
vehicle is moving. This will cause a Parking Brake on page 9-31. outlets, as well as to display some
loss of power assist in the brake warning and indicator lights. This
and steering systems, and disable
the airbags.
{ Warning position can also be used for
service and diagnostics, and to
If the vehicle must be shut off in an Turning off the vehicle while verify the proper operation of the
emergency: moving may cause loss of power malfunction indicator lamp as may
assist in the brake and steering be required for emission inspection
1. Brake using a firm and steady systems and disable the airbags. purposes. The transmission is also
pressure. Do not pump the While driving, only shut the unlocked in this position.
brakes repeatedly. This may
vehicle off in an emergency. The battery could be drained if the
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force. key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, or ON/RUN position with the engine
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). off. The vehicle might not restart if
This can be done while the and must be shut off while driving,
turn the ignition to ACC/ the battery is allowed to drain for an
vehicle is moving. After shifting extended period of time.
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the ACCESSORY.
brakes and steer the vehicle to a 2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This 4 (START): This position starts the
safe location. position provides power to some of engine. When the engine starts,
the electrical accessories. It unlocks release the key. The ignition switch
3. Come to a complete stop, shift will return to ON/RUN for normal
to P (Park), and turn the ignition the ignition. To move the key from
ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, driving.
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
an automatic transmission, the the shift lever must be in P (Park). A warning tone sounds when the
shift lever must be in P (Park) to 3 (ON/RUN): The ignition switch driver door is opened when the
turn the ignition switch to the stays in this position when the ignition is still in ACC/ACCESSORY
LOCK/OFF position. engine is running. This position can and the key is in the ignition. If the
be used to operate the electrical ignition becomes difficult to turn,
accessories, including the see Keys on page 2-1.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Key Lock Release If charging or jump starting the

battery does not work, there is a { Caution
manual key lock release. Locate the
hole below the ignition lock. Insert a If you add electrical parts or
tool or key into the opening. Locate accessories, you could change
the lever, and press it toward the the way the engine operates. Any
driver while removing the key from resulting damage would not be
the ignition. covered by the vehicle warranty.
See Add-On Electrical Equipment
Starting the Engine on page 9-66.
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start Starting Procedure (Key Access)
in any other position. To restart the 1. With your foot off the accelerator
engine when the vehicle is already pedal, turn the ignition key to
The vehicle is equipped with an moving, use N (Neutral) only. START. When the engine starts,
electronic key lock release system. let go of the key. The idle speed
This system is to prevent ignition
key removal unless the shift lever is
{ Caution will go down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine
in P (Park). Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the immediately after starting it.
The key lock release will not work if vehicle is moving. If you do, you Allow the oil to warm up and
the battery is charged less than could damage the transmission. lubricate all moving parts.
9 volts, or uncharged. Try charging Shift to P (Park) only when the The vehicle has a
or jump starting the battery. See vehicle is stopped. Computer-Controlled Cranking
Jump Starting (with or without System. This feature assists in
eAssist) on page 10-72 or Jump starting the engine and protects
Starting (On-board with eAssist components. If the ignition key is
Only) on page 10-71. turned to the START position,
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
and then released when the engine and transmission gently

engine begins cranking, the Caution (Continued) until the oil warms up and
engine will continue cranking for lubricates all moving parts.
a few seconds or until the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
vehicle starts. If the engine does between each try, to let the Starting Procedure (Keyless
cranking motor cool down. Access)
not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, 1. If the vehicle has the Keyless
cranking stops after 15 seconds 2. If the engine does not start after Access system, the Remote
to prevent cranking motor five to 10 seconds, especially in Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
damage. To prevent gear very cold weather (below 0°F or must be in the vehicle. Put your
damage, this system also −18°C), it could be flooded with foot on the brake pedal and
prevents cranking if the engine too much gasoline. Push the push the ENGINE START/STOP
is already running. Engine accelerator pedal all the way to button. When the engine begins
cranking can be stopped by the floor and hold it there as you cranking, let go of the button.
turning the ignition switch to hold the key in START for a The idle speed will go down as
ACC/ACCESSORY or maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at the engine gets warm. Do not
LOCK/OFF. least 15 seconds between each race the engine immediately
try, to allow the cranking motor after starting it. Operate the
{ Caution to cool. When the engine starts, engine and transmission gently
let go of the key and accelerator. to allow the oil to warm up and
Cranking the engine for long If the vehicle starts briefly but lubricate all moving parts.
periods of time, by returning the then stops again, repeat the
ignition to the START position procedure. This clears the extra
immediately after cranking has gasoline from the engine. Do not
ended, can overheat and damage race the engine immediately
the cranking motor, and drain the after starting it. Operate the
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
If the transmitter is not in the vehicle starts. If the engine does or 0°F), it could be flooded with
vehicle or something is not start and the button is too much gasoline. Try pushing
interfering with the transmitter, pressed for many seconds, the accelerator pedal all the way
the Driver Information Center cranking will be stopped after to the floor and holding it there
(DIC) will display NO REMOTE 15 seconds to prevent cranking as you press the ENGINE
DETECTED. See Driver motor damage. To prevent gear START/STOP button, for up to a
Information Center (DIC) on damage, this system also maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at
page 5-27. prevents cranking if the engine least 15 seconds between each
If the battery in the RKE is already running. Engine try, to allow the cranking motor
transmitter needs replacing, the cranking can be stopped by to cool down. When the engine
DIC displays REPLACE pressing the ENGINE START/ starts, let go of the key or button,
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY. STOP button a second time. and the accelerator. If the
The vehicle can still be driven. vehicle starts briefly but then
See “Starting the Vehicle with a { Caution stops again, do the same thing.
This clears the extra gasoline
Low Transmitter Battery or
Wireless Interference” in Remote Cranking the engine for long from the engine. Do not race the
Keyless Entry (RKE) System periods of time, by returning the engine immediately after starting
Operation on page 2-3. ignition to the START position it. Operate the engine and
immediately after cranking has transmission gently until the oil
The vehicle has a ended, can overheat and damage warms up and lubricates all
Computer-Controlled Cranking moving parts.
the cranking motor, and drain the
System. This feature assists in
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ENGINE between each try, to let the
START/STOP button is pressed, cranking motor cool down.
and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the 2. If the engine does not start after
engine will continue cranking for five to 10 seconds, especially in
a few seconds or until the very cold weather (below −18°C
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
eAssist Automatic Engine remain in auto stop for up to

. The air conditioning or defrost
Start/Stop two minutes. When the brake is system need the compressor to
released or the accelerator pedal maintain vehicle comfort. See
applied, the engine will restart. The Dual Automatic Climate Control
{ Warning engine will continue to run until the System on page 8-3. The
next auto stop. warmer it is outside, the shorter
Exiting the vehicle without first
the time before the engine is
shifting into P (Park) may cause AUTO STOP on the tachometer restarted to provide cabin
the vehicle to move. You or others signifies that the engine is in auto cooling. To maximize fuel
may be injured. Because the stop mode. See Tachometer on economy, use the eco air
vehicle has the automatic engine page 5-13. When the vehicle is conditioning mode.
start/stop feature, the vehicle's turned off, the tachometer will move
engine might seem to be shut off; to OFF. If the driver door is opened
. The shift lever is in P (Park),
while in auto stop mode, a chime N (Neutral), R (Reverse),
however, once the brake pedal is
will sound. or M (Manual Mode).
released, the engine will start up
again. There are several conditions that
. The high voltage battery pack
may prevent an auto stop or cause charge is low.
Shift to P (Park) and turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF, before an auto start. . The hood is not fully closed.
exiting the vehicle. The Engine Will Remain . Brake pedal pressure is low.
Running When: . The malfunction indicator lamp is
eAssist vehicles have an automatic . The engine, transmission, on; auto stop may be prevented.
engine start/stop feature. After the or high voltage battery is not . High humidity is detected.
engine is started and has reached warmed up yet.
operating temperature, the auto stop . The outside temperature is less The Engine Will Restart When:
feature may cause the engine to than −20°C (−4°F). . The brake pedal is released.
turn off when the brakes are applied
and the vehicle comes to a . The accelerator pedal is applied.
complete stop. The vehicle may
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Shifting out of D (Drive) to any . The hood is opened.
other gear. { Warning
. The air conditioning or defrost Engine Heater
Plugging the cord into an
system need the compressor to The engine coolant heater, ungrounded outlet could cause an
maintain vehicle comfort. See if equipped, can help in cold electrical shock. Also, the wrong
Dual Automatic Climate Control weather conditions at or below
System on page 8-3 The warmer kind of extension cord could
−18°C (0°F) for easier starting and overheat and cause a fire. You
it is outside, the shorter the time better fuel economy during engine
before the engine is restarted to could be seriously injured. Plug
warm-up. Plug in the coolant heater
provide cabin cooling. To the cord into a properly grounded
at least four hours before starting
maximize fuel economy, use the the vehicle. An internal thermostat three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
eco air conditioning mode. in the plug end of the cord will If the cord will not reach, use a
prevent engine coolant heater heavy-duty three-prong extension
. The climate control system is
operation at temperatures above cord rated for at least 15 amps.
turned from off to normal air
conditioning or defrost. See Dual −18°C (0°F).
Automatic Climate Control To Use the Engine Coolant 4. Before starting the engine, be
System on page 8-3. sure to unplug and store the
Heater cord as it was before to keep it
. The engine is required to run for
either heater or climate control 1. Turn off the engine. away from moving engine parts.
performance. See Dual 2. Open the hood and unwrap the The length of time the heater should
Automatic Climate Control electrical cord. The electrical remain plugged in depends on
System on page 8-3. cord is on the driver side of the several factors. Ask a dealer in the
. The high voltage battery pack engine compartment, between area where you will be parking the
charge is low and requires the fender and the engine vehicle for the best advice on this.
recharging. compartment fuse block.
. Auto stop time is greater than 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
two minutes. 110-volt AC outlet.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Retained Accessory 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)

Warning (Continued)
by holding in the button on the
Power (RAP) shift lever and pushing the shift
These vehicle accessories can be lever all the way toward the front Do not leave the vehicle when the
used for up to 10 minutes after the of the vehicle. engine is running. If you have left
engine is turned off: the engine running, the vehicle
3. Turn the ignition key to can move suddenly. You or others
. Audio System LOCK/OFF. could be injured. To be sure the
. Power Windows 4. If equipped, remove the key and vehicle will not move, even when
. take it with you. If you can leave you are on fairly level ground,
Sunroof (if equipped)
the vehicle with the ignition key always set the parking brake and
These features continue to work up in your hand, the vehicle is in move the shift lever to P (Park).
to 10 minutes after the ignition is P (Park). See Shifting Into Park on
turned to LOCK/OFF. page 9-24.
Leaving the Vehicle with the
The power windows and sunroof will Engine Running
work until any door is opened. If you have to leave the vehicle with
The radio continues to work until the
driver door is opened.
{ Warning the engine running, be sure the
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
All these features operate when the It can be dangerous to leave the parking brake is firmly set before
key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ vehicle with the engine running. you leave it. After you have moved
ACCESSORY. It could overheat and catch fire. the shift lever into P (Park), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then,
It is dangerous to get out of the see if you can move the shift lever
Shifting Into Park vehicle if the shift lever is not fully away from P (Park) without first
1. Hold the brake pedal down and in P (Park) with the parking brake pushing the button.
set the parking brake. See firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
If you can, it means that the shift
Parking Brake on page 9-31. (Continued) lever was not fully locked in
P (Park).
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Torque Lock Shifting out of Park To shift out of P (Park):

Torque lock is when the weight of This vehicle is equipped with an 1. Apply the brake pedal.
the vehicle puts too much force on electronic shift lock release system. 2. Place the ignition in ON/RUN.
the parking pawl in the The shift lock release is
transmission. This happens when designed to: 3. Press the shift lever button.
parking on a hill and shifting the 4. Move the shift lever to the
transmission into P (Park) is not
. Prevent ignition key removal (if
desired position.
done properly, then it is difficult to equipped) unless the shift lever
shift out of P (Park). To prevent is in P (Park) with the shift lever If still unable to shift out of P (Park):
torque lock, set the parking brake button fully released. 1. Fully release the shift lever
and then shift into P (Park). To find . Prevent movement of the shift button.
out how, see “Shifting Into Park” lever out of P (Park), unless the 2. Hold the brake pedal down and
listed previously. ignition is in ON/RUN and the press the shift lever button
If torque lock does occur, your brake pedal is applied. again.
vehicle may need to be pushed The shift lock release is always 3. Move the shift lever to the
uphill by another vehicle to relieve functional except in the case of an desired position.
the parking pawl pressure, so you uncharged or low voltage (less than
can shift out of P (Park). 9-volt) battery. If you are still having a problem
shifting, see your dealer.
If you are towing a trailer and If the vehicle has an uncharged
parking on a hill, see Driving battery or a battery with low voltage,
Characteristics and Towing Tips on try charging or jump starting the
page 9-61. battery. See Jump Starting (with or
without eAssist) on page 10-72 or
Jump Starting (On-board with
eAssist Only) on page 10-71.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Parking over Things Engine Exhaust Warning (Continued)

That Burn
{ Warning . There are holes or openings
{ Warning Engine exhaust contains carbon
in the vehicle body from
damage or aftermarket
Things that can burn could touch monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
hot exhaust parts under the seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
vehicle and ignite. Do not park can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
over papers, leaves, dry grass, even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
or other things that can burn. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Running the Vehicle Automatic

While Parked
{ Warning
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
It is better not to park with the
engine running. vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
If the vehicle is left with the engine firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
running, follow the proper steps to
be sure the vehicle will not move. Do not leave the vehicle when the
See Shifting Into Park on page 9-24 engine is running. If you have left
and Engine Exhaust on page 9-26. the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others
If parking on a hill and pulling a
could be injured. To be sure the
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9-61. vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
P (Park): This position locks the page 9-24.
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move Make sure the shift lever is fully in
easily. P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. You must fully apply the
brake pedal then press the shift
lever button before you can shift
from P (Park) while the ignition key
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out N (Neutral): In this position, the

of P (Park), ease pressure on the engine does not connect with the Caution (Continued)
shift lever and push the shift lever wheels. To restart the engine when
all the way into P (Park) as you the vehicle is already moving, use the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
maintain brake application. Then N (Neutral) only. engine is not running at high
move the shift lever into another speed when shifting the vehicle.
gear. See Shifting out of Park on
page 9-25.
{ Warning
D (Drive): This position is for
R (Reverse): Use this gear to Shifting into a drive gear while the normal driving. It provides the best
back up. engine is running at high speed is fuel economy. If you need more
dangerous. Unless your foot is power for passing, and you are:
{ Caution firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
. Accelerating slowly or
maintaining a constant speed,
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the You could lose control and hit push the accelerator pedal about
vehicle is moving forward could people or objects. Do not shift halfway down.
damage the transmission. The into a drive gear while the engine .
is running at high speed. Accelerating quickly or passing,
repairs would not be covered by push the accelerator all the
the vehicle warranty. Shift to way down.
R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
M (Manual Mode): This position
is stopped.
{ Caution allows you to change gears similar
to a manual transmission. If the
To rock the vehicle back and forth to Shifting out of P (Park) or vehicle has this feature, see Manual
get out of snow, ice, or sand without N (Neutral) with the engine Mode on page 9-29.
damaging the transmission, see If running at high speed may
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-9. damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Manual Mode While using the DSC feature the With the DSC feature, the vehicle
transmission will have firmer shifting can be set to pull away in
Driver Shift Control (DSC) and sportier performance. You can 2 (Second) gear.
To use this feature (if equipped): use this for sport driving or when 1. Move the shift lever from
climbing hills to stay in gear longer D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode).
1. Move the shift lever from or to downshift for more power or
D (Drive) rearward to engine braking. 2. With the vehicle stopped, press
M (Manual Mode). the + (plus) end of the button to
The transmission will only allow you select 2 (Second) gear. The
While driving in Manual Mode, to shift into gears appropriate for the
the transmission will remain in vehicle will start from a stop
vehicle speed and engine position in 2 (Second) gear.
the driver selected gear. When revolutions per minute (rpm):
coming to a stop in the manual 3. Once moving, select the desired
position, the vehicle will
. The transmission will not allow drive gear.
automatically shift into shifting to the next higher gear if
1 (First) gear. the vehicle speed or engine rpm
is too low.
2. Using the button on the shift .
lever, press the + (plus) end of The transmission will not allow
the button to upshift, or press shifting to the next lower gear if
the − (minus) end of the button the vehicle speed or engine rpm
to downshift. is too high.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) Second Gear Start Feature

in the instrument cluster will change When accelerating the vehicle from
from the currently displayed a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
message to the letter “M,” for you may want to shift into
Manual position, and a number 2 (Second) gear. A higher gear
indicating the requested gear. allows you to gain more traction on
slippery surfaces.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
This vehicle has ABS, an advanced
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
electronic braking system that helps
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
prevent a braking skid.
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
When the vehicle begins to drive the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
ABS can change the brake pressure
away, ABS checks itself. normal.
to each wheel, as required, faster
A momentary motor or clicking noise
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
might be heard while this test is
you steer around the obstacle while
going on, and it might even be ABS allows you to steer and brake
braking hard.
noticed that the brake pedal moves at the same time. In many
a little. This is normal. As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help
computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best
on wheel speed and controls braking.
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
If there is a problem with ABS, this close to the vehicle in front of you,
warning light stays on. See Antilock there will not be enough time to
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light apply the brakes if that vehicle
on page 5-21.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Parking Brake The system has a red parking brake continuously, then the EPB is only
status light and an amber parking partially applied or there is a
brake warning light. See Electric problem with the EPB. A DIC
Parking Brake Light on page 5-21 message will display. Release the
and Service Electric Parking Brake EPB and try to apply it again. If the
Light on page 5-21. There are also light does not come on, or keeps
parking brake-related Driver flashing, have the vehicle serviced.
Information Center (DIC) messages. Do not drive the vehicle if the red
See Brake System Messages on parking brake status light is flashing.
page 5-31. In case of insufficient See your dealer. See Electric
electrical power, the EPB cannot be Parking Brake Light on page 5-21.
applied or released. If the amber parking brake warning
Before leaving the vehicle, check light is on, lift up on the EPB switch
the red parking brake status light to and hold it up. Continue to hold the
ensure that the parking brake is switch until the red parking brake
If equipped with an Electric Parking
applied. status light remains on. If the amber
Brake (EPB), the switch is on the
parking brake warning light remains
left side of the instrument panel. EPB Apply on, see your dealer.
The EPB can always be activated,
even if the ignition is off. To prevent To apply the EPB: If the EPB is applied while the
draining the battery, avoid repeated 1. Be sure the vehicle is at a vehicle is moving, the vehicle will
cycles of the EPB when the engine complete stop. decelerate as long as the switch is
is not running. held up. If the switch is held up until
2. Lift up the EPB switch
the vehicle comes to a stop, the
momentarily.
EPB will remain applied.
The red parking brake status light
The vehicle may automatically apply
will flash and then stay on once the
the EPB in some situations when
EPB is fully applied. If the red
the vehicle is not moving. This is
parking brake status light flashes
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
normal, and is done to periodically Brake Assist

check the correct operation of the { Caution
EPB system. This vehicle has a brake assist
Driving with the parking brake on feature designed to assist the driver
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear can overheat the brake system in stopping or decreasing vehicle
wheels should be blocked to and cause premature wear or speed in emergency driving
prevent vehicle movement. damage to brake system parts. conditions. This feature
EPB Release Make sure that the parking brake automatically uses the stability
is fully released and the brake system hydraulic brake control
To release the EPB: warning light is off before driving. module to supplement the power
1. Place the ignition in the ACC/ brake system under conditions
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN where the driver has quickly and
position.
Automatic EPB Release forcefully applied the brake pedal in
The EPB will automatically release if an attempt to quickly stop or slow
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal. down the vehicle. The stability
the vehicle is running, placed into
3. Push down momentarily on the gear, and an attempt is made to system hydraulic brake control
EPB switch. drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration module increases brake pressure at
when the EPB is applied, to each corner of the vehicle until the
The EPB is released when the red
preserve parking brake lining life. ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
parking brake status light is off.
pulsation or pedal movement during
If the amber parking brake warning If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle this time is normal and the driver
light is on, release the EPB by is pulling a trailer, see Driving should continue to apply the brake
pushing down on the EPB switch Characteristics and Towing Tips on pedal as the driving situation
and holding it down. Continue to page 9-61. dictates. The brake assist feature
hold the switch until the red parking will automatically disengage when
brake status light is off. If either light the brake pedal is released or brake
stays on after release is attempted, pedal pressure is quickly
see your dealer. decreased.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Hill Start Assist (HSA) pressure to ensure that there is no Ride Control Systems
rolling. The brakes will automatically
Some vehicles have a Hill Start release within a two-second window
Assist (HSA) feature, which may be of releasing the brake pedal, and Traction Control/
useful when the vehicle is stopped the vehicle may begin to roll. It will Electronic Stability
on a grade. This feature is designed not activate if the vehicle is in a
to temporarily prevent the vehicle Control
drive gear and facing downhill or if
from rolling, either forward or the vehicle is facing uphill and in System Operation
rearward, during vehicle drive off. R (Reverse).
After the driver completely stops The vehicle has a Traction Control
and holds the vehicle in a complete HSA will activate on eAssist System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, an
standstill on a grade, HSA will be vehicles while in gear and facing electronic stability control system.
automatically activated. During the down hill to assist in allowing a These systems help limit wheel slip
transition period between when the smooth auto start. and assist the driver in maintaining
driver releases the brake pedal and control, especially on slippery road
starts to accelerate to drive off on a conditions.
grade, HSA holds the braking TCS activates if it senses that any
of the drive wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, TCS applies the brakes to
the spinning wheels and reduces
engine power to limit wheel spin.
StabiliTrak activates when the
vehicle senses a difference between
the intended path and the direction
the vehicle is actually traveling.
StabiliTrak selectively applies
braking pressure to any one of the
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
vehicle wheel brakes to assist the If d comes on and stays on:

driver in keeping the vehicle on the
intended path. 1. Stop the vehicle.
If cruise control is being used and 2. Turn the engine off and wait
traction control or StabiliTrak begins 15 seconds.
to limit wheel spin, cruise control will 3. Start the engine.
disengage. Cruise control may be The indicator light for both systems
turned back on when road is in the instrument cluster. This Drive the vehicle. If d comes on
conditions allow. light will: and stays on, the vehicle may need
more time to diagnose the problem.
Both systems come on . Flash when TCS is limiting
If the condition persists, see your
automatically when the vehicle is wheel spin.
dealer.
started and begins to move. The . Flash when StabiliTrak is
systems may be heard or felt while activated. Turning the Systems Off
they are operating or while and On
performing diagnostic checks. This
. Turn on and stay on when either
is normal and does not mean there system is not working.
is a problem with the vehicle. If either system fails to turn on or to
It is recommended to leave both activate, a message displays in the
systems on for normal driving Driver Information Center (DIC), and
conditions, but it may be necessary d comes on and stays on to
to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets indicate that the system is inactive
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. and is not assisting the driver in The button for TCS and StabiliTrak
See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on maintaining control. The vehicle is is on the center console, behind the
page 9-9 and “Turning the Systems safe to drive, but driving should be shift lever.
Off and On” later in this section. adjusted accordingly.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak, Cruise Control

{ Caution press and hold the g button until
With cruise control, you can
Do not repeatedly brake or the Traction Off Light i and maintain a speed of about 40 km/h
accelerate heavily when TCS is StabiliTrak Off Light g come on and (25 mph) or more without keeping
off. The vehicle driveline could be stay on in the instrument cluster. To your foot on the accelerator. Cruise
damaged. turn TCS and StabiliTrak on again, control does not work at speeds
press and release the g button. The below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
To turn off only TCS, press and Traction Off Light i and StabiliTrak
release the g button. The Traction Off Light g in the instrument cluster
{ Warning
Off Light i displays in the turn off. Cruise control can be dangerous
instrument cluster. To turn TCS on Adding accessories can affect the where you cannot drive safely at
again, press and release the g vehicle performance. See a steady speed. Do not use the
button. The Traction Off Light i Accessories and Modifications on cruise control on winding roads or
displayed in the instrument cluster page 10-3. in heavy traffic.
will turn off. Cruise control can be dangerous
If TCS is limiting wheel spin when on slippery roads. On such roads,
the g button is pressed, the system fast changes in tire traction can
will not turn off until the wheels stop cause excessive wheel slip, and
spinning. you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
If equipped with the Traction Control

System (TCS), the system may
begin to limit wheel spin while you
are using cruise control. If this
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
happens, the cruise control will 5 (On/Off): Press to turn cruise If the cruise button is on when not in
automatically disengage. See control on or off. A white indicator use, it could get bumped and go into
Traction Control/Electronic Stability comes on in the instrument cluster. cruise when not desired. Keep the
Control on page 9-33. If a collision cruise control switch off when cruise
alert occurs when cruise control is +RES (Resume/Accelerate): is not being used.
activated, cruise control is Press briefly to make the vehicle
disengaged. See Forward Collision resume to a previously set speed, 1. Press the 5 button to turn the
Alert (FCA) System on page 9-48. or press and hold to accelerate. cruise system on.
When road conditions allow you to If cruise control is already active,
2. Get up to the desired speed.
safely use it again, the cruise use to increase vehicle speed.
control can be turned back on. 3. Press and release the SET–
SET–: Press briefly to set the
button on the steering wheel.
If the brakes are applied, the cruise speed and activate cruise control.
control disengages. If cruise control is already active, 4. Remove foot from the
use to decrease vehicle speed. accelerator.
* (Cancel): Press to disengage Resuming a Set Speed
cruise control without erasing the
If cruise control is set at a desired
selected set speed.
speed and then the brakes are
Setting Cruise Control applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the set
The cruise control indicator on the
speed from memory.
instrument cluster turns green after
the cruise control has been set to Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h
the desired speed. See Instrument (25 mph) or greater, press the +RES
Cluster on page 5-9. button on the steering wheel. The
vehicle returns to the previous set
speed.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Increasing Speed While Using Passing Another Vehicle While Ending Cruise Control
Cruise Control Using Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise
If the cruise control system is Use the accelerator pedal to control:
already activated: increase vehicle speed. When you . To disengage cruise control,
. Press and hold the +RES button take your foot off the pedal, the step lightly on the brake pedal.
until the desired speed is vehicle will slow down to the cruise
reached, then release it. speed you set earlier. While . Press the * button on the
pressing the accelerator pedal or steering wheel.
. To increase vehicle speed in shortly following the release to
small increments, briefly press override cruise control, briefly
. To turn off the cruise control,
the +RES button. For each applying the SET− button will result press the 5 button on the
press, the vehicle goes about in cruise set to the current vehicle steering wheel.
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. speed.
Erasing Speed Memory
Reducing Speed While Using Using Cruise Control on Hills The cruise control set speed is
Cruise Control
How well the cruise control will work erased from memory by pressing 5
If the cruise control system is on hills depends upon the vehicle or if the ignition is turned off.
already activated: speed, load, and the steepness of
. Press and hold the SET– button the hills. When going up steep hills, Adaptive Cruise Control
until the desired lower speed is you might have to step on the
reached, then release it. accelerator pedal to maintain your If equipped, Adaptive Cruise Control
speed. When going downhill, you (ACC) allows the driver to select the
. To decrease the vehicle speed in might have to brake or shift to a cruise control set speed and
smaller increments, briefly press lower gear to keep your speed following gap. Read this entire
the SET− button. For each down. If the brakes are applied the section before using this system.
press, the vehicle goes about cruise control will turn off. The following gap is the following
1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower. time between your vehicle and a
vehicle detected directly ahead in
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
your path moving in the same

direction. If no vehicle is detected in { Warning Warning (Continued)
your path, ACC works like regular
cruise control. ACC uses a radar ACC has limited braking ability Do not use Adaptive Cruise
sensor. See Radio Frequency and may not have time to slow Control when:
Statement on page 13-15. the vehicle down enough to avoid . On winding and hilly roads or
a collision with another vehicle when the sensors are
If a vehicle is detected in your path, you are following. This can occur
ACC can apply acceleration or blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
when vehicles suddenly slow or The system may not detect a
limited, moderate braking to
stop ahead, or enter your lane. vehicle ahead. Keep the
maintain the selected following gap.
Also see “Alerting the Driver” in entire front of the vehicle
To disengage ACC, apply the brake.
If ACC is controlling your vehicle this section. Complete attention is clean.
speed when the Traction Control always required while driving and . Visibility is low, such as in
System (TCS) or StabiliTrak® you should be ready to take fog, rain, or snow conditions.
System activates, the ACC may action and apply the brakes. See Adaptive Cruise Control
automatically disengage. When road Defensive Driving on page 9-3. performance is limited under
conditions allow ACC to be safely these conditions.
used, the ACC can be turned back . On slippery roads where fast
on. If TCS or StabiliTrak have been
disabled, the ACC will not engage. { Warning changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip.
See Traction Control/Electronic Adaptive Cruise Control will not
Stability Control on page 9-33. detect or brake for children,
pedestrians, animals, or other
objects.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
* (Cancel): Press to disengage 4. Remove foot from the

ACC without erasing the selected accelerator.
set speed. After ACC is set, it may immediately
GAP (Follow Distance Gap): apply the brakes if a vehicle ahead
Press to select a following gap time is closer than the selected
(or distance) setting for ACC of Far, following gap.
Medium, or Near.
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control
If the cruise system is on but not in
use, it could get set and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control button off when cruise
] (On/Off): Press to turn the is not being used. The ACC indicator displays on the
system on or off. A white Adaptive
Select the set speed desired for instrument cluster. When ACC is
Cruise Control indicator comes on.
cruise. This is the vehicle speed active, the indicator turns green.
+RES (Resume/Accelerate): when no vehicle is detected in Be mindful of speed limits,
Press briefly to resume the previous its path. surrounding traffic speeds, and
set speed or hold to accelerate.
ACC will not set or resume at a weather conditions when selecting
If ACC is already active, use to
speed less than 25 km/h (16 mph). the set speed.
increase vehicle speed.
SET– (Set/Coast): Press briefly to To set ACC: Resuming a Set Speed
set the speed and activate ACC. 1. Press ]. If the ACC is set at a desired speed
If ACC is already active, use to and then the brakes are applied,
decrease vehicle speed. 2. Get up to the desired speed. ACC is disengaged without erasing
3. Press and release the SET– the set speed from memory.
control on the steering wheel.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
To begin using ACC again, press

. To increase vehicle speed in . Press and hold the SET– button
the +RES button on the steering small increments, briefly press until the desired lower speed is
wheel. The vehicle returns to the +RES. For each press the reached, then release it.
previous set speed. vehicle goes 5 km/h (1 mph) . To decrease the vehicle speed in
faster. smaller increments, briefly press
Increasing Speed While ACC is at
a Set Speed When it is determined that there is SET–. For each press, the
no vehicle ahead or the vehicle is vehicle goes about 5 km/h
If ACC is already activated, do one beyond the selected following gap, (1 mph) slower.
of the following: then the vehicle speed will increase The speedometer reading can be
. Use the accelerator to get to the to the set speed. displayed in either English or metric
higher speed. Press the SET– The speedometer reading can be units. See Instrument Cluster on
button. Release the control and displayed in either English or metric page 5-9. The increment value used
the accelerator pedal. The units. See Instrument Cluster on depends on the units displayed.
vehicle will now cruise at the page 5-9. The increment value used
higher speed. depends on the units displayed. Selecting the Follow Distance Gap
When the accelerator pedal is When a slower moving vehicle is
Reducing Speed While ACC is at a detected ahead within the selected
pressed, ACC will not brake Set Speed
because it is overridden. following gap, ACC will adjust the
A warning message will appear If ACC is already activated, do one vehicle's speed and attempt to
on the Driver Information Center of the following: maintain the follow distance gap
(DIC). See Cruise Control . Use the brake to get to the selected.
Messages on page 5-31. desired lower speed. Press the Press GAP on the steering wheel to
. Press and hold the +RES button SET– button and release the adjust the following gap. When
until the desired set speed accelerator pedal. The vehicle pressed, the current gap setting
appears on the display, then will now cruise at the lower displays briefly on the instrument
release it. speed. cluster.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Subsequent presses cycle the gap Alerting the Driver The vehicle ahead symbol is in
button through three settings: Far, the DIC.
Medium, or Near. The gap setting The vehicle ahead symbol only
will be maintained until it is displays when a vehicle is detected
changed. in your vehicle’s path moving in the
Since each gap setting corresponds same direction.
to a following time (Far, Medium, If this symbol is not displaying, ACC
or Near), the following distance will will not respond to or brake to
vary based on vehicle speed. The If ACC is engaged, driver action vehicles ahead.
faster the vehicle speed, the further may be required when ACC cannot
back your vehicle will follow a apply sufficient braking because of ACC automatically slows the vehicle
vehicle detected ahead. Consider approaching a vehicle too rapidly. down and adjusts vehicle speed to
traffic and weather conditions when follow the vehicle in front at the
selecting the following gap. The When this condition occurs, six red selected follow gap. The vehicle
range of selectable gaps may not be lights will flash on the windshield speed increases or decreases to
appropriate for all drivers and and eight beeps will sound from the follow the vehicle in front of you, but
driving conditions. front. will not exceed the set speed. It may
See Defensive Driving on page 9-3. apply limited braking, if necessary.
Changing the gap setting When braking is active, the brake
automatically changes the alert Approaching and Following a lights will come on. The automatic
timing sensitivity (Far, Medium, Vehicle braking may feel or sound different
or Near) for the Forward Collision than if the brakes were applied
Alert (FCA) feature. See Forward manually. This is normal.
Collision Alert (FCA) System on
page 9-48.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving ACC Automatically Disengages If the stopped vehicle ahead has
Objects ACC may automatically disengage driven away and ACC has not been
and the driver will need to manually resumed, the vehicle ahead symbol
{ Warning apply the brakes to slow the will flash as a reminder to check
traffic ahead before proceeding. In
vehicle when:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) addition, three beeps will sound.
may not detect and react to
. The sensors are blocked. See “Go Notifier” under Collision/
stopped or slow-moving vehicles . The Traction Control System Detection systems in Vehicle
ahead of you. For example, the (TCS) or electronic stability Personalization on page 5-40.
system may not brake for a control system has activated or When the vehicle ahead drives
vehicle that it has never detected been disabled. away, press RES+ or the
moving. This can occur in . There is no traffic or other accelerator pedal to resume cruise
stop-and-go traffic or when a objects to detect. control. If stopped for more than
vehicle suddenly appears due to two minutes or if the driver door is
a vehicle ahead changing lanes.
. There is a fault in the system. opened, the ACC automatically
Your vehicle may not stop and A message indicating that the cruise applies the Electric Parking Brake to
could cause a crash. Use caution is disengaging will appear on the hold the vehicle. The Electric
when using ACC. Your complete DIC and the ACC active symbol will Parking Brake status light will turn
attention is always required while not be displayed when ACC is no on. See Parking Brake on
driving and you should be ready longer active. page 9-31. To resume ACC and
to take action and apply the release the Electric Parking Brake,
Notification to Resume ACC press the accelerator pedal. ACC
brakes.
ACC will maintain a following gap can be resumed when the vehicle is
behind a detected vehicle and slow travelling greater than 25 km/h
your vehicle to a stop behind that (16 mph).
vehicle.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
A DIC warning message may ACC Override

display indicating to shift to P (Park) Warning (Continued)
If using the accelerator pedal while
before exiting the vehicle. See ACC is active, a DIC warning
Vehicle Messages on page 5-30. accelerates up to the set speed,
message will indicate that automatic especially when following a
braking will not occur. See Vehicle vehicle exiting or entering exit
{ Warning Messages on page 5-30. ACC will ramps. You could lose control of
resume operation when the the vehicle or crash. Do not use
If ACC has stopped the vehicle, accelerator pedal is not being
and if ACC is disengaged, turned ACC while driving on an entrance
pressed.
off, or canceled, the vehicle will or exit ramp. Always be ready to
use the brakes if necessary.
no longer be held at a stop. The
vehicle can move. When ACC is
{ Warning
holding the vehicle at a stop, The ACC will not automatically
always be prepared to manually
apply the brakes.
apply the brakes if your foot is { Warning
resting on the accelerator pedal.
You could crash into a vehicle On curves, ACC may respond to
ahead of you. a vehicle in another lane, or may
not have time to react to a vehicle
{ Warning in your lane. You could crash into
Curves in the Road
Leaving the vehicle without a vehicle ahead of you, or lose
control of your vehicle. Give extra
placing it in P (Park) can be
dangerous. Do not leave the
{ Warning attention in curves and be ready
vehicle while it is being held at a On curves, ACC may not detect a to use the brakes if necessary.
stop by ACC. Always place the vehicle ahead in your lane. You Select an appropriate speed while
vehicle in P (Park) and turn off could be startled if the vehicle driving in curves.
the ignition before leaving the (Continued)
vehicle.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
ACC may operate differently in a Other Vehicle Lane Changes

sharp curve. It may reduce the
vehicle speed if the curve is too
sharp.
ACC may detect a vehicle that is

not in your lane and apply the
brakes. ACC will not detect a vehicle ahead
ACC may occasionally provide an until it is completely in the lane. The
alert and/or braking that is brakes may need to be manually
When following a vehicle and considered unnecessary. It could applied.
entering a curve, ACC may not respond to vehicles in different
detect the vehicle ahead and Do Not Use ACC on Hills and
lanes, signs, guardrails, and other When Towing a Trailer
accelerate to the set speed. When stationary objects when entering or
this happens, the vehicle ahead exiting a curve. This is normal
symbol will not appear. operation. The vehicle does not
need service.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Do not use ACC when driving on Cleaning the Sensing System Driver Assistance
steep hills or when towing a trailer. The radar sensor on the front of the
ACC will not detect a vehicle in the vehicle can become blocked by
Systems
lane while driving on steep hills. The snow, ice, dirt, or mud. These areas This vehicle may have features that
driver will often need to take over need to be cleaned for ACC to work together to help avoid crashes
acceleration and braking on steep operate properly. or reduce crash damage while
hills, especially when towing a
For cleaning instructions, see driving, backing, and parking. Read
trailer. If the brakes are applied, the
“Washing the Vehicle” under this entire section before using
ACC disengages.
Exterior Care on page 10-77. these systems.
Disengaging ACC
System operation may also be
There are three ways to limited under snow, heavy rain or
{ Warning
disengage ACC: road spray conditions. Do not rely on the Driver
. Step lightly on the brake pedal. Assistance Systems. These
. Press *. systems do not replace the need
for paying attention and driving
. Press ]. safely. You may not hear or see
alerts or warnings provided by
Erasing Speed Memory these systems. Failure to use
The cruise control set speed is proper care when driving may
erased from memory if ] is result in injury, death, or vehicle
pressed or if the ignition is damage. See Defensive Driving
turned off. on page 9-3.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Warning (Continued)
Assistance Systems for Warning (Continued)
Parking or Backing
Under many conditions, these When the vehicle is in R (Reverse), screen, during longer, higher
systems will not: the Rear Vision Camera (RVC), speed backing maneuvers,
. Detect children, pedestrians, Rear Parking Assist, and Rear or where there could be cross
bicyclists, or animals. Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA), traffic. Failure to use proper care
if equipped, may help the driver to before backing may result in
. Detect vehicles or objects injury, death, or vehicle damage.
avoid a crash or to reduce crash
outside the area monitored by Always check behind and around
damage.
the system. the vehicle before backing.
When the vehicle is shifted into
. Work at all driving speeds.
R (Reverse), the RVC displays an
. Warn you or provide you with image of the area behind the vehicle
enough time to avoid a crash. in the center stack display.
. Work under poor visibility or
bad weather conditions. { Warning
. Work if the detection sensor The RVC system does not display
is not cleaned or is covered children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
by ice, snow, mud, or dirt. animals, or any other object
Complete attention is always located outside the camera's field
required while driving, and you of view, below the bumper,
should be ready to take action or under the vehicle. Perceived
and apply the brakes and/or steer distances may be different from
the vehicle to avoid crashes. actual distances. Do not back the 1. View Displayed by the Camera
vehicle using only the RVC
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
display on the RVC screen to warn

of traffic coming from either Warning (Continued)
direction. This system detects
objects coming from up to 20 m speeds greater than 8 km/h
(65 ft) from the left or right side of (5 mph). To prevent injury, death,
the vehicle. When an object is or vehicle damage, even with
detected, either three beeps sound parking assist, always check the
from the left or right side, depending area around the vehicle and
on the direction of the detected check all mirrors before moving
1. View Displayed by the Camera vehicle. forward or backing.
2. Corners of the Rear Bumper With URPA, as the vehicle backs up
Displayed images may be farther or at speeds of less than 8 km/h
closer than they appear. The area (5 mph), the system detects objects
displayed is limited and objects that up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle
are close to either corner of the that are within a zone 25 cm (10 in)
bumper or under the bumper do not high off the ground and below
display. bumper level.
A warning triangle may display on
the RVC screen to show where the { Warning
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist The parking assist system does
(URPA) has detected an object. This not detect children, pedestrians, The vehicle may have an instrument
triangle changes from amber to red bicyclists, animals, or objects cluster parking assist display with
and increases in size the closer the bars that show “distance to object”
located below the bumper or that
object. and object location information for
are too close or too far from the
On vehicles with the Rear Cross URPA. As the object gets closer,
vehicle. It is not available at more bars light up.
Traffic Alert (RCTA), a red warning
(Continued)
triangle with an arrow may also
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
When an object is first detected in The RVC, the RCTA system, Forward Collision Alert
the rear, one beep will be heard parking assist symbols, and
from the rear. When an object is guidance lines can be turned on or
(FCA) System
very close (<0.6 m (2 ft) in the off through the infotainment system: If equipped, the FCA system may
vehicle rear), five beeps will sound 1. On the infotainment system, help to avoid or reduce the harm
from the rear. press the Settings screen caused by front-end crashes. FCA
button, or turn the MENU knob provides a red flashing alert on the
Turning the Features On or Off windshield, and beeps when
to highlight Settings and
press MENU. approaching a vehicle directly
ahead too quickly. FCA also
2. Select Rear Camera. provides a visual alert if following
3. Press Rear Camera Display (if another vehicle much too closely.
equipped), Rear Cross Traffic FCA detects vehicles within a
Alert, Park Assist Symbols, distance of approximately 60 m
or Guidance Lines and then (197 ft) and operates at speeds
The X button on the instrument select OFF or ON. above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the
panel to the left of the steering vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control
wheel is used to turn on or off the Assistance Systems for (ACC), it can detect vehicles to
Rear Parking Assist. The indicator Driving distances of approximately 110 m
light next to the button comes on (360 ft) and operates at all speeds.
when the features are on and turns If equipped, when driving the See Adaptive Cruise Control on
off when the features have been vehicle forward, Forward Collision page 9-37.
disabled. Alert (FCA), Lane Departure
Warning (LDW), Side Blind Zone
Turn off URPA when towing a trailer.
Alert (SBZA), and/or the Active
Emergency Braking System can
help to avoid a crash or reduce
crash damage.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

{ Warning Warning (Continued)
FCA is a warning system and or ice, or if the windshield is
does not apply the brakes. When damaged. It may also not detect a
approaching a slower-moving or vehicle on winding or hilly roads,
stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, or in conditions that can limit
or when following a vehicle too visibility such as fog, rain,
closely, FCA may not provide a or snow, or if the headlamps or
warning with enough time to help FCA warnings will not occur unless windshield are not cleaned or in
the FCA system detects a vehicle
avoid a crash. FCA does not warn proper condition. Keep the
ahead. The vehicle ahead indicator
of pedestrians, animals, signs, windshield, headlamps, and FCA
will display green when a vehicle is
guardrails, bridges, construction detected in front. Vehicles may not sensors clean and in good repair.
barrels, or other objects. Be ready be detected on curves, highway exit
to take action and apply the ramps, or hills; or due to poor Collision Alert
brakes. For more information, see visibility. FCA will not detect another
Defensive Driving on page 9-3. vehicle ahead until it is completely
in the driving lane.
FCA can be disabled through
vehicle personalization. See the { Warning
“Auto Collision Preparation” portion
of “Collision/Detection Systems” FCA does not provide a warning
under Vehicle Personalization on to help avoid a crash, unless it When your vehicle approaches
page 5-40. detects a vehicle. FCA may not another vehicle too rapidly, the red
detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA lights will flash on the windshield
sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, and eight beeps will sound from the
(Continued) front.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Tailgating Alert Selecting the Alert Timing Press the collision alert/following
gap button on the steering wheel to
set the FCA timing to Far, Medium,
Near, or on some vehicles, Off. The
first button press shows the current
setting on the DIC. Additional button
presses will change this setting. The
chosen setting will remain until it is
The vehicle ahead indicator will changed and will affect the timing of
display amber when you are both the Collision Alert and the
following a vehicle ahead much too Tailgating Alert features. The timing
closely. of both alerts will vary based on
vehicle speed. The faster the
vehicle speed, the farther away the
With Adaptive Cruise Control alert will occur. Consider traffic and
weather conditions when selecting
the alert timing. The range of
selectable alert timing may not be
appropriate for all drivers and
driving conditions.
Changing the FCA timing setting
automatically changes the following
gap setting (Far, Medium, or Near)
for the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) feature.
Without Adaptive Cruise Control

2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Unnecessary Alerts Automatic Collision

Preparation (ACP) System Warning (Continued)
FCA may provide unnecessary
alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles ACP may help reduce crash . Detect a stopped or
in other lanes, objects that are not damage by applying the vehicle’s slow-moving vehicle or other
vehicles, or shadows. These alerts brake system and has a detection object ahead.
are normal operation and the range of approximately 60 m . Detect a vehicle when
vehicle does not need service. (197 ft). Braking can only occur if a weather limits visibility, such
vehicle is detected ahead. This is as in fog, rain, or snow. In
Cleaning the System shown by the FCA vehicle-ahead these situations, ACP sensor
If the FCA system does not seem to indicator being lit. See Forward performance is limited.
operate properly, cleaning the Collision Alert (FCA) System on
outside of the windshield in front of page 9-48. Complete attention is always
the camera sensor and the front of required while driving, and you
the vehicle may correct the issue. { Warning should be ready to take action
and apply the brakes and/or steer
Active Emergency ACP is an emergency crash the vehicle to avoid crashes.
Braking System preparation feature and is not
designed to avoid crashes. Do Brake Preparation
If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise not rely on ACP to brake the
Control (ACC) it also has the Active vehicle. When quickly approaching a vehicle
Emergency Braking System, which ahead, Brake Preparation reduces
includes the Automatic Collision ACP may not: brake response time by having the
Preparation (ACP) System. . Respond to stopped vehicles, brake system prepared for driver
pedestrians, or animals. braking to occur more rapidly.
. Detect a vehicle ahead on
winding or hilly roads.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Automatic Braking
Warning (Continued)
Side Blind Zone
In some imminent front-end crash Alert (SBZA)
situations, if the driver has not override Automatic Braking, firmly
applied the brakes, Automatic If equipped, the Side Blind Zone
press the accelerator pedal, if it is Alert system is a lane-changing aid
Braking applies the brakes to help safe to do so.
reduce crash damage. It may even that assists drivers with avoiding
help avoid some very low speed crashes that occur with vehicles in
crashes. Automatic Braking can be disabled the side blind zone (or spot) areas.
or reduced through vehicle The SBZA warning display will light
Automatic Braking may slow the personalization. See the “Auto up in the corresponding outside side
vehicle to a complete stop to try to Collision Preparation” portion of mirror and will flash if the turn signal
avoid a potential crash. The vehicle “Collision/Detection Systems” under is on.
will only hold at a stop briefly. A firm Vehicle Personalization on
press of the accelerator pedal will
also release Automatic Braking.
page 5-40. { Warning
{ Warning { Warning SBZA does not alert the driver to
vehicles rapidly approaching
Using the Automatic Collision outside of the side blind zones,
Automatic Braking may Preparation System while towing pedestrians, bicyclists,
automatically brake the vehicle in a trailer could cause you to lose or animals. It may not provide
situations where it may be control of the vehicle and crash. alerts when changing lanes under
unnecessary. It could respond to Turn the system off when towing all driving conditions. Failure to
a turning vehicle ahead, a trailer. use proper care when changing
guardrails, signs, and other lanes may result in injury, death,
non-moving objects. This could or vehicle damage. Before
be uncomfortable and startling. To making a lane change, always
(Continued) (Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
zone starts at approximately the or right-side mirror display will light

Warning (Continued) middle of the vehicle and goes back up if a vehicle is detected in that
5 m (16 ft). blind zone. If the turn signal is
check mirrors, glance over your activated in the same direction of a
shoulder, and use the turn How the System Works detected vehicle, this display will
signals. The SBZA symbol lights up in the flash as an extra warning not to
side mirrors when the system change lanes.
SBZA Detection Zones detects a vehicle in the next lane SBZA can be disabled through
over that is in the side blind zone. vehicle personalization. See
This indicates it may be unsafe to “Collision/Detection Systems” under
change lanes. Before making a lane Vehicle Personalization on
change, check the SBZA display, page 5-40. If SBZA is disabled by
check mirrors, glance over your the driver, the SBZA mirror displays
shoulder, and use the turn signals. will not light up.
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
SBZA displays may not come on
when passing a vehicle quickly or
when towing a trailer. The SBZA
Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror
detection zones that extend back
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of Display Display from the side of the vehicle do not
approximately one lane over from move further back when a trailer is
When the vehicle is started, both
both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m towed. Use caution while changing
outside mirror SBZA displays will
(11 ft). The height of the zone is lanes when towing a trailer. SBZA
briefly come on to indicate the
approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) may alert to objects attached to the
system is operating. When the
and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. This vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle,
vehicle is moving forward, the left-
or object extending out to either side
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
of the vehicle. This is normal system If the SBZA displays do not light up When the vehicle crosses a
operation; the vehicle does not need when vehicles are in the blind zone detected lane marking, the LDW
service. and the system is clean, the system indicator will flash and three beeps
SBZA may not always alert the may need service. Take the vehicle will be sounded from the left or right
driver to vehicles in the side blind to your dealer. side, depending on the lane
zone, especially in wet conditions. When SBZA is disabled for any departure direction. LDW will not
The system does not need to be reason other than the driver turning warn if the turn signal is on in the
serviced. The system may light up it off, the Side Blind Zone Alert On departure direction, or if a sharp
due to guardrails, signs, trees, option will not be available on the maneuver is made.
shrubs, and other non-moving personalization menu.
objects. This is normal system
FCC Information
{ Warning
operation; the vehicle does not need
service. See Radio Frequency Statement on The LDW system is an aid to help
page 13-15. the vehicle stay in the driving
SBZA may not operate when the lane. It does not steer the vehicle.
SBZA sensors in the left or right The LDW system may not:
corners of the rear bumper are Lane Departure
covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, Warning (LDW) . Provide enough time to avoid
or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For a crash.
cleaning instructions, see "Washing If equipped, LDW may help avoid .
crashes due to unintentional lane Detect lane markings under
the Vehicle" under Exterior Care on bad weather conditions or if
page 10-77. If the DIC still displays departures. It may provide a
warning if the vehicle is crossing a the windshield is dirty.
the system unavailable message
after cleaning both sides of the detected lane without using a turn . Detect lane markings and will
vehicle toward the rear corners of signal. LDW uses a camera sensor not detect road edges.
the vehicle, see your dealer. to detect the lane markings. It only (Continued)
operates at speeds of 56 km/h
(35 mph) or greater.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
To turn LDW on and off, press @ on When the System Does Not
Warning (Continued) Seem to Work Properly
the instrument panel to the left of
. Warn that the vehicle is the steering wheel. The control If the LDW symbol does not appear
crossing a lane marking if the indicator will light when LDW is on. when the system is on and the
system does not detect the vehicle is traveling at least 56 km/h
lane marking. (35 mph):
If LDW only detects lane . The lane markings on the road
markings on one side of the road, may not be seen.
it will only warn you when . The camera sensor may be
departing the lane on the side blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.
where it has detected a lane When the vehicle is started, the
marker. Even with LDW, always
. The windshield may be
LDW indicator on the instrument damaged.
keep your attention on the road cluster will come on briefly.
and maintain proper vehicle . The weather may be limiting
position within the lane, or vehicle If LDW is on, the LDW indicator will visibility.
damage, injury, or death could appear green if the system detects
a left or right lane marking while the This is normal operation; the vehicle
occur. Always keep the does not need service. Clean the
vehicle is traveling at 56 km/h
windshield clean and do not use windshield.
(35 mph) or greater. If the vehicle
LDW in bad weather conditions.
crosses a detected lane marking Lane markings may not be detected
without using the turn signal, this on curves, highway exit ramps,
How the System Works indicator will change to amber and or hills; or due to poor visibility.
flash. In addition, three beeps will
The LDW camera sensor is on the If the LDW camera system does not
be sounded from the left or right
windshield ahead of the rearview seem to operate properly, cleaning
side, depending on the lane
mirror. the outside of the windshield in front
departure direction.
of the camera sensor may correct
the issue.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Fuel Recommended Fuel

{ Warning
Use of the recommended fuel is an Use regular unleaded gasoline with
LDW does not provide a warning important part of the proper a posted octane rating of 87 or
to help avoid a crash, unless it maintenance of this vehicle. To help higher. If the octane rating is less
detects the lane markings. LDW keep the engine clean and maintain than 87, an audible knocking noise
may not detect the lane markings optimum vehicle performance, we may be heard. If this occurs, use a
if the camera sensor is blocked recommend using TOP TIER gasoline rated at 87 octane or
by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the Detergent Gasolines. See higher as soon as possible. If heavy
windshield is damaged. It may www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP knocking is heard when using
also not detect a lane on winding TIER Detergent Gasolines. gasoline with a higher octane rating,
or hilly roads, or in conditions that the engine needs service.
can limit visibility such as fog, Use of Seasonal Fuels
rain, or snow, or if the headlamps
or windshield are not cleaned or Use summer and winter fuels in the
appropriate season. Driving or
in proper condition. Keep the
starting could be affected if the
windshield, headlamps, and
incorrect fuel is used. Drive the
camera sensors clean and in vehicle with the engine running until
good repair. the fuel is a half tank or less, then
refuel with the current seasonal fuel.
LDW warnings may occur due to tar Prohibited Fuels
marks, shadows, cracks in the road,
or other road imperfections. This is Gasolines containing oxygenates,
normal system operation; the such as ethers and ethanol, as well
vehicle does not need service. If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap, as reformulated gasolines are
E85 or FlexFuel can be used in the available in some cities. If these
vehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel on gasolines comply with the
page 9-58. previously described specification,
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
then they are acceptable to use. Gasoline Specifications vehicle may not pass a smog-check
However, E85 and other fuels test. See Malfunction Indicator
containing more than 15% ethanol At a minimum, gasoline should meet Lamp on page 5-17. If this occurs,
must be used only in FlexFuel ASTM specification D 4814. Some return to your authorized dealer for
vehicles. gasolines contain an diagnosis. If it is determined that the
octane-enhancing additive called condition is caused by the type of
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
{ Caution tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
fuel used, repairs may not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not use fuel containing against the use of gasolines
methanol. It can corrode metal containing MMT. See “Prohibited Fuels in Foreign
Fuels" in Recommended Fuel on
parts in the fuel system and also Countries
page 9-56.
damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be If planning to drive in countries
covered under the vehicle
California Fuel outside the U.S. or Canada, the
warranty. Requirements proper fuel might be hard to find.
Check regional auto club or fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet retail brand websites for availability
Some gasolines that are not California Emissions Standards, it is in the country where driving. Never
reformulated for low emissions can designed to operate on fuels that use leaded gasoline, fuel containing
contain an octane-enhancing meet California specifications. See methanol, or any other fuel not
additive called the underhood emission control recommended. Costly repairs
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese label. If this fuel is not available in caused by use of improper fuel
tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use states adopting California Emissions would not be covered by the vehicle
gasolines with MMT as they can Standards, the vehicle will operate warranty.
reduce spark plug life and affect satisfactorily on fuels meeting
emission control system federal specifications, but emission
performance. The malfunction control system performance might
indicator lamp may turn on. If this be affected. The malfunction
occurs, see your dealer for service. indicator lamp could turn on and the
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Fuel Additives The use of E85 or FlexFuel is Because E85 or FlexFuel has less
encouraged when the vehicle is energy per liter (gallon) than
To keep fuel systems clean, TOP designed to use it. E85 or FlexFuel gasoline, the vehicle will need to be
TIER Detergent Gasoline is is made from renewable sources. refilled more often. See Filling the
recommended. See Fuel on Tank on page 9-59.
page 9-56. To help locate fuel stations that
carry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is Department of Energy has an { Caution
not available, one bottle of Fuel alternative fuel website. See
System Treatment PLUS, part www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/ Some additives are not
number 88861013, added to the fuel stations. compatible with E85 or FlexFuel
tank at every engine oil change, can and can harm the vehicle's fuel
help. Fuel System Treatment PLUS E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTM system. Do not add anything to
is the only gasoline additive Specification D 5798 or CAN/ E85 or FlexFuel. Damage caused
recommended by General Motors. CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not use
by additives would not be covered
It is available at your dealer. the fuel if the ethanol content is
by the vehicle warranty.
greater than 85%. Fuel mixtures that
Do not use additives with E85 or do not meet ASTM or CGSB
FlexFuel. specifications can affect driveability
E85 or FlexFuel
and could cause the malfunction
indicator lamp to come on.
{ Caution
Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can The starting characteristics of E85 Do not use fuel containing
use either unleaded gasoline or fuel or FlexFuel make it unsuitable for methanol. It can corrode metal
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). use when temperatures fall below parts in the fuel system and also
All other vehicles should use only −18°C (0°F). Use gasoline or add damage plastic and rubber parts.
the unleaded gasoline as described gasoline to the E85 or FlexFuel. That damage would not be
in Recommended Fuel on covered under the vehicle
page 9-56. warranty.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Filling the Tank Warning (Continued)

The fuel cap is behind the fuel door
on the vehicle's passenger side. To
open the fuel door, push the
{ Warning . Fuel can spray out if the fuel rearward center edge in and release
cap is opened too quickly. and it will open.
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn This spray can happen if the
violently and can cause injury or tank is nearly full, and is Turn the tethered fuel cap
death. more likely in hot weather. counterclockwise to remove. If the
Open the fuel cap slowly and vehicle has E85 fuel capability, the
. To help avoid injuries to you
wait for any hiss noise to stop fuel cap will be yellow and state that
and others, read and follow
then unscrew the cap all E85 or gasoline can be used. See
all the instructions on the fuel
the way E85 or FlexFuel on page 9-58.
pump island.
While refueling, hang the tethered
. Turn off the engine when fuel cap from the hook on the fuel
refueling. door. Reinstall the cap by turning it
. Keep sparks, flames, and clockwise until it clicks.
smoking materials away If the cap is not properly installed,
from fuel. the malfunction indicator lamp will
. Do not leave the fuel pump come on. See Malfunction Indicator
unattended. Lamp on page 5-17.
. Do not reenter the vehicle Do not top off or overfill the tank and
while pumping fuel. wait a few seconds before removing
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
. Keep children away from the surfaces as soon as possible. See
fuel pump and never let Exterior Care on page 10-77.
children pump fuel.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Filling a Portable Fuel

{ Warning Container
Warning (Continued)
If a fire starts while you are keep it in contact with the fill
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
{ Warning opening until filling is
complete.
shutting off the pump or by Filling a portable fuel container . Fill the container no more
notifying the station attendant. while it is in the vehicle can cause than 95% full to allow for
Leave the area immediately. fuel vapors that can ignite either expansion.
by static electricity or other . Do not smoke, light matches,
means. You or others could be
or use lighters while
badly burned and the vehicle
{ Caution could be damaged. Always:
pumping fuel.
. Avoid using cell phones or
If a new fuel cap is needed, be . Use approved fuel other electronic devices.
sure to get the right type of cap containers.
from your dealer. The wrong type . Remove the container from
of fuel cap might not fit properly, the vehicle, trunk, or pickup
might cause the malfunction bed before filling.
indicator lamp to light, and could
damage the fuel tank and
. Place the container on the
ground.
emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on . Place the nozzle inside the fill
page 5-17. opening of the container
before dispensing fuel, and
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Do not tow a trailer during the
Towing first 800 km (500 mi) to prevent { Warning
damage to the engine, axle,
General Towing or other parts. When towing a trailer, exhaust
Information gases may collect at the rear of
. Then during the first 800 km
the vehicle and enter if the
Only use towing equipment that has (500 mi) of trailer towing, do not
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most
been designed for the vehicle. window is open.
Contact your dealer or trailering do not make starts at full throttle.
dealer for assistance with preparing . Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). When towing a trailer:
the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read Shift the transmission to a lower . Do not drive with the liftgate,
the entire section before towing a gear if the transmission shifts trunk/hatch, or rear-most
trailer. too often under heavy loads and/ window open.
For towing a disabled vehicle, see or hilly conditions. . Fully open the air outlets on
Towing the Vehicle on page 10-75. . Do not use Adaptive Cruise or under the instrument
For towing the vehicle behind Control when towing. panel.
another vehicle such as a motor
home, see Recreational Vehicle
. The Automatic Collision . Also adjust the climate
Towing on page 10-76. Preparation System should be control system to a setting
set to Off when towing. See that brings in only outside air.
Active Emergency Braking See “Climate Control System”
Driving Characteristics System on page 9-51. in the Index.
and Towing Tips . Turn off Park Assist when For more information about
Driving with a Trailer towing. Carbon Monoxide, see Engine
When towing a trailer: Exhaust on page 9-26.
. Become familiar with the state
and local laws that apply to
trailer towing.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Towing a trailer requires a certain Passing

amount of experience. The Caution (Continued)
More passing distance is needed
combination you are driving is
when towing a trailer. The The vehicle could be damaged.
longer and not as responsive as the
combination will not accelerate as Avoid making very sharp turns
vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
quickly and is longer so it is while trailering.
the handling and braking of the rig
necessary to go much farther
before setting out for the open road.
beyond the passed vehicle before
Before starting, check all trailer hitch returning to the lane. When turning with a trailer, make
parts and attachments, safety wider turns than normal. Do this so
chains, electrical connectors, lamps, Backing Up the trailer will not strike soft
tires, and mirrors. If the trailer has Hold the bottom of the steering shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
electric brakes, start the wheel with one hand. To move the or other objects. Avoid jerky or
combination moving and then apply trailer to the left, move that hand to sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
the trailer brake controller by hand the left. To move the trailer to the advance.
to be sure the brakes work. right, move your hand to the right. If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn
During the trip, check occasionally Always back up slowly and, out, the arrows on the instrument
to be sure that the load is secure if possible, have someone cluster will still flash for turns. It is
and the lamps and any trailer guide you. important to check occasionally to
brakes still work. be sure the trailer bulbs are still
Making Turns working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the { Caution Driving on Grades
vehicle ahead as you would when Reduce speed and shift to a lower
Making very sharp turns while gear before starting down a long or
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
trailering could cause the trailer to steep downgrade. If the
This can help to avoid heavy
come in contact with the vehicle. transmission is not shifted down, the
braking and sudden turns.
(Continued) brakes might get hot and no longer
work well.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
the transmission to a lower gear if apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly
{ Warning into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
conditions. Parking the vehicle on a hill with
When towing at high altitude on the trailer attached can be Leaving After Parking on a Hill
steep uphill grades, consider the dangerous. If something goes 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
following: Engine coolant will boil at wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both 2. Start the engine.
a lower temperature than at normal
altitudes. If the engine is turned off the vehicle and the trailer can be 3. Shift into a gear.
immediately after towing at high damaged. When possible, always 4. Release the parking brake.
altitude on steep uphill grades, the park the rig on a flat surface.
vehicle may show signs similar to 5. Let up on the brake pedal.
engine overheating. To avoid this, 6. Drive slowly until the trailer is
let the engine run while parked, If parking the rig on a hill:
clear of the chocks.
preferably on level ground, with the 1. Press the brake pedal, but do
automatic transmission in P (Park) not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn 7. Stop and have someone pick up
for a few minutes before turning the the wheels into the curb if facing and store the chocks.
engine off. If the overheat warning downhill or into traffic if facing Maintenance when Trailer
comes on, see Engine Overheating uphill. Towing
on page 10-22.
2. Have someone place chocks The vehicle needs service more
under the trailer wheels. often when pulling a trailer. See
3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance Schedule on
place, release the regular brakes page 11-2. Things that are
until the chocks absorb the load. especially important in trailer
operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
lubricant, belts, cooling system, and Weight of the Trailer Ask your dealer for trailering
brake system. It is a good idea to information or advice, or write us at
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
inspect these before and during our Customer Assistance Offices.
the trip. It should never weigh more than See Customer Assistance Offices
454 kg (1,000 lb). But even that can on page 13-3.
Check periodically to see that all
be too heavy.
hitch nuts and bolts are tight. Weight of the Trailer Tongue
It depends on how the rig is used.
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is
Trailer Towing (eAssist) For example, speed, altitude, road
an important weight to measure
grades, outside temperature, and
The vehicle is neither designed nor how much the vehicle is used to pull because it affects the total gross
intended to tow a trailer. a trailer are all important. It can weight of the vehicle. The Gross
depend on any special equipment Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
Trailer Towing (All except on the vehicle, and the amount of curb weight of the vehicle, any
eAssist) tongue weight the vehicle can carry. cargo carried in it, and the people
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” who will be riding in the vehicle.
Before pulling a trailer, three later in this section. If there are a lot of options,
important considerations have to do equipment, passengers, or cargo in
with weight: Maximum trailer weight is calculated the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
.
assuming only the driver is in the weight the vehicle can carry, which
Weight of the trailer. tow vehicle and it has all the will also reduce the trailer weight the
. Weight of the trailer tongue. required trailering equipment. The vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
weight of additional optional the tongue load must be added to
. Total weight on your vehicle's
equipment, passengers, and cargo the GVW because the vehicle will
tires.
in the tow vehicle must be be carrying that weight, too. See
subtracted from the maximum trailer Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.
weight.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
on the Tire and Loading Information exhaust can get into the vehicle.
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on See Engine Exhaust on
page 9-10. Make sure not to go over page 9-26.
the GVW limit for the vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer Safety Chains
tongue. Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
Towing Equipment safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
Hitches from contacting the road if it
Use the correct hitch equipment. becomes separated from the hitch.
See your dealer or a hitch dealer for Leave enough slack so the rig can
assistance. turn. Never allow safety chains to
The trailer tongue (1) should weigh
drag on the ground.
10 percent of the total loaded trailer . The rear bumper on the vehicle
weight (2). is not intended for hitches. Do Trailer Brakes
After loading the trailer, weigh the not attach rental hitches or other
Does the trailer have its own
trailer and then the tongue, bumper-type hitches to it. Use
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
separately, to see if the weights are only a frame-mounted hitch that the instructions for the trailer brakes
proper. If they are not, adjustments does not attach to the bumper. so they are installed, adjusted, and
might be made by moving some . Will any holes be made in the maintained properly.
items around in the trailer. body of the vehicle when the
Because the vehicle has antilock
trailer hitch is installed? If so,
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
seal the holes when the hitch is brake system. If this is done, both
Tires removed. If the holes are not
brake systems will not work well,
Be sure the vehicle's tires are sealed, dirt, water, and deadly
or at all.
inflated to the upper limit for cold carbon monoxide (CO) from the
tires. These numbers can be found
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
{ Caution
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle or cause
components to not work and
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always check with your
dealer before adding electrical
equipment.
Add-on equipment can drain the

vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-32 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-32.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-1
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Vehicle Care Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-34
General Information Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-28 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-35
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Automatic Transmission Shift
California Proposition Lock Control Function Electrical System
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 High Voltage Devices and
California Perchlorate Ignition Transmission Lock Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Electrical System
Accessories and Park Brake and P (Park) Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Wiper Blade Engine Compartment Fuse
Vehicle Checks Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Doing Your Own Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Instrument Panel Fuse
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Headlamp Aiming Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Engine Compartment Wheels and Tires
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Bulb Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Automatic Transmission High Intensity Discharge Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-44
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-15 LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Headlamps, Front Turn Tire Terminology and
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Signal, Sidemarker, and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-22 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Overheated Engine Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Protection Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-2 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor Towing the Vehicle General Information

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Tire Pressure Monitor Recreational Vehicle For service and parts needs, visit
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 your dealer. You will receive
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Appearance Care and supported service people.
When It Is Time for New Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82 Genuine GM parts have one of
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 these marks:
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-62
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-70
Jump Starting
Jump Starting (On-board
with eAssist Only) . . . . . . . . . 10-71 California Proposition
Jump Starting (with or 65 Warning
without eAssist) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-3
cause cancer and birth defects or handling, emissions systems, Vehicle Checks
other reproductive harm. Engine aerodynamics, durability, and
exhaust, many parts and systems, electronic systems like antilock
many fluids, and some component brakes, traction control, and stability Doing Your Own
wear by-products contain and/or control. These accessories or Service Work
emit these chemicals. modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered eAssist Vehicles Only
California Perchlorate by the vehicle warranty.
Materials Requirements Damage to vehicle components
{ Warning
resulting from modifications or the Never try to do your own service
Certain types of automotive
installation or use of non‐GM on eAssist components. You can
applications, such as airbag
certified parts, including control be injured and the vehicle can be
initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
module or software modifications, is damaged if you try to do your own
and lithium batteries contained in
not covered under the terms of the
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, service work. Service and repair
vehicle warranty and may affect
may contain perchlorate materials. of these eAssist components
remaining warranty coverage for
Special handling may be necessary. should only be performed by a
affected parts.
For additional information, see trained service technician with the
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ GM Accessories are designed to proper knowledge and tools.
perchlorate. complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. See your
Accessories and dealer to accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories
Modifications installed by a dealer technician.
Adding non‐dealer accessories or Also, see Adding Equipment to the
making modifications to the vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
can affect vehicle performance and page 3-32.
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-4 Vehicle Care
All Vehicles Keep a record with all parts receipts Hood

and list the mileage and the date of
To open the hood:
{ Warning any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on
It can be dangerous to work on page 11-15.
your vehicle if you do not have
the proper knowledge, service { Caution
manual, tools, or parts. Always
follow owner manual procedures Even small amounts of
and consult the service manual contamination can cause damage
for your vehicle before doing any to vehicle systems. Do not allow 1. Pull the hood release lever with
service work. contaminants to contact the fluids, this symbol on it. It is inside the
reservoir caps, or dipsticks. vehicle on the lower side of the
instrument panel.
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13-11.
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Airbag System
Check on page 3-33.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-5
To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are properly
installed.
2. Lower the hood 20 cm (8 in)
above the vehicle and release it
so it fully latches. Check to
make sure the hood is firmly
closed. Repeat the process if
necessary.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle to

find the secondary hood release
handle. The handle is under the
front edge of the hood near the
center. Push the handle to the
right and at the same time raise
the hood.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.4L L4 Engine
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-7
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 11. Windshield Washer Fluid

page 10-15. Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
2. Engine Cover. on page 10-24.
3. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of 12. Engine Compartment Fuse

View). See Cooling System on Block on page 10-36.
page 10-18.
4. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Oil on page 10-11.
5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 10-11.
6. High Voltage Cable (Orange
Color).
7. Transmission Fluid Cap. See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 10-15.
8. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
Brakes on page 10-25.
9. Battery (Under Cover). See
Battery on page 10-27.
10. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10-19.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-8 Vehicle Care
2.5L L4 Engine
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-9
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 9. Battery (Under Cover). See

page 10-15. Battery on page 10-27.
2. Engine Cover. 10. Windshield Washer Fluid
3. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Oil on page 10-11. on page 10-24.
4. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine 11. Engine Compartment Fuse

Oil on page 10-11. Block on page 10-36.
5. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of

View). See Cooling System on
page 10-18.
6. Transmission Fluid Cap. See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 10-15.
7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
Brakes on page 10-25.
8. Coolant Surge Tank and
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-10 Vehicle Care
3.6L V6 Engine
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-11
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 11. Engine Compartment Fuse Checking Engine Oil
page 10-15. Block on page 10-36.
It is a good idea to check the engine
2. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
Oil on page 10-11. Engine Oil get an accurate reading, the vehicle
3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine To ensure proper engine must be on level ground. The
Oil on page 10-11. performance and long life, careful engine oil dipstick handle is a loop.
attention must be paid to engine oil. See Engine Compartment Overview
4. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of Following these simple, but on page 10-6 for the location of the
View). See Cooling System on important steps will help protect engine oil dipstick.
page 10-18. your investment: Obtaining an accurate oil level
5. Engine Cover. . Always use engine oil approved reading is essential:
6. Transmission Fluid Cap and to the proper specification and of 1. If the engine has been running
Dipstick (Out of View). See the proper viscosity grade. See recently, turn off the engine and
Automatic Transmission Fluid on “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” allow several minutes for the oil
page 10-15. in this section. to drain back into the oil pan.
7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See . Check the engine oil level Checking the oil level too soon
Brakes on page 10-25. regularly and maintain the after engine shutoff will not
proper oil level. See “Checking provide an accurate oil level
8. Coolant Surge Tank and reading.
Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil” in this section.
9. Battery (Under Cover). See
. Change the engine oil at the { Warning
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Battery on page 10-27. The engine oil dipstick handle
Life System on page 10-14.
10. Windshield Washer Fluid may be hot; it could burn you.
. Always dispose of engine oil Use a towel or glove to touch the
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
properly. See “What to Do with dipstick handle.
on page 10-24.
Used Oil” in this section.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-12 Vehicle Care
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it what kind of oil to use. For engine Add enough oil to put the level
with a paper towel or cloth, then oil crankcase capacity, see somewhere in the proper operating
push it back in all the way. Capacities and Specifications on range. Push the dipstick all the way
Remove it again, keeping the tip page 12-2. back in when through.
down, and check the level.
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil { Caution Selecting the right engine oil
Do not add too much oil. Oil depends on both the proper oil
levels above or below the specification and viscosity grade.
acceptable operating range See Recommended Fluids and
shown on the dipstick are harmful Lubricants on page 11-12.
to the engine. If you find that you Specification
have an oil level above the
2.5L L4 Shown, 3.6L V6 Similar operating range, i.e., the engine Use and ask for licensed engine oils
has so much oil that the oil level with the dexos1® approved
gets above the upper mark that certification mark. Engine oils
meeting the requirements for the
shows the proper operating
vehicle should have the dexos1
range, the engine could be
approved certification mark. This
damaged. You should drain out certification mark indicates that the
the excess oil or limit driving of oil has been approved to the dexos1
2.4L L4 the vehicle and seek a service specification.
professional to remove the
If the oil is below the cross-hatched excess amount of oil.
area at the tip of the dipstick, add
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
and then recheck the level. See See Engine Compartment Overview
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in on page 10-6 for the location of the
this section for an explanation of engine oil fill cap.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-13
Cold Temperature Operation: In an What to Do with Used Oil

area of extreme cold, where the
Used engine oil contains certain
temperature falls below −29°C
elements that can be unhealthy for
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
your skin and could even cause
used. An oil of this viscosity grade
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
will provide easier cold starting for
your skin for very long. Clean your
the engine at extremely low
skin and nails with soap and water,
{ Caution temperatures. When selecting an oil
of the appropriate viscosity grade,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
Failure to use the recommended always select an oil of the correct
containing used engine oil. See the
engine oil can result in engine specification. See “Specification”
manufacturer's warnings about the
damage not covered by the earlier in this section for more
use and disposal of oil products.
vehicle warranty. Check with your information.
dealer or service provider on Used oil can be a threat to the
Engine Oil Additives/Engine environment. If you change your
whether the oil is approved to the
Oil Flushes own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
dexos1 specification.
Do not add anything to the oil. The from the filter before disposal. Never
recommended oils with the dexos dispose of oil by putting it in the
Viscosity Grade specification and displaying the trash or pouring it on the ground,
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity dexos certification mark are all that into sewers, or into streams or
grade for the 2.4L L4 engine and is needed for good performance and bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
the 3.6L V6 engine. SAE 5W-20 is engine protection. it to a place that collects used oil.
the best viscosity grade for the 2.5L Engine oil system flushes are not
L4 engine. SAE 0W-20 may be recommended and could cause
used as an alternative. Do not use engine damage not covered by the
other viscosity grade oils such as vehicle warranty.
SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-14 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Life System be changed at least once a year page 5-27. When remaining oil
and at this time the system must be life is low, the CHANGE
When to Change Engine Oil reset. Your dealer has trained ENGINE OIL SOON message
This vehicle has a computer system service people who will perform this will appear on the display. See
that indicates when to change the work and reset the system. It is also Engine Oil Messages on
engine oil and filter. This is based important to check the oil regularly page 5-33.
on a combination of factors which over the course of an oil drain
interval and keep it at the proper 2. Press V on the DIC controls and
include engine revolutions, engine hold down for a few seconds to
temperature, and miles driven. level.
clear the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
Based on driving conditions, the If the system is ever reset SOON message and reset the
mileage at which an oil change is accidentally, the oil must be oil life at 100%.
indicated can vary considerably. For changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
the oil life system to work properly, since the last oil change. Be careful not to reset the oil life
the system must be reset every time Remember to reset the oil life display accidentally at any time
the oil is changed. system whenever the oil is changed. other than after the oil is
changed. It cannot be reset
When the system has calculated How to Reset the Engine Oil accurately until the next oil
that oil life has been diminished, it Life System change.
indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE Reset the system whenever the The oil life system can also be reset
OIL SOON message comes on. See engine oil is changed so that the as follows:
Engine Oil Messages on page 5-33. system can calculate the next 1. Turn the ignition on with the
Change the oil as soon as possible engine oil change. To reset the engine off.
within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). system:
It is possible that, if driving under 1. Using the DIC controls on the
the best conditions, the oil life right side of the steering wheel,
system might indicate that an oil display REMAINING OIL LIFE
change is not necessary for up to a on the DIC. See Driver
year. The engine oil and filter must Information Center (DIC) on
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-15
2. Fully press and release the There is a special procedure for When to Inspect the Engine Air
accelerator pedal three times checking and changing the Cleaner/Filter
within five seconds. transmission fluid. Because this
procedure is difficult, you should Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL scheduled maintenance intervals
SOON message is not on, the have this done at your dealer
service department. Contact your and replace it at the first oil change
system is reset. after each 90 000 km (60,000 mi)
dealer for additional information or
The system is reset when the the procedure can be found in the interval. See Maintenance Schedule
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON service manual. To purchase a on page 11-2. If you are driving in
message is off. service manual, see Service dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
Publications Ordering Information filter at each engine oil change.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message comes back on when the on page 13-11. How to Inspect the Engine Air
vehicle is started, the engine oil life Change the fluid and filter at the Cleaner/Filter
system has not been reset. Repeat intervals listed in Maintenance To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
the procedure. Schedule on page 11-2, and be sure remove the filter from the vehicle
to use the fluid listed in and lightly shake the filter to release
Automatic Transmission Recommended Fluids and loose dust and dirt. If the filter
Fluid Lubricants on page 11-12. remains covered with dirt, a new
filter is required.
How to Check Automatic Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Transmission Fluid
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the
It is not necessary to check the engine compartment on the
transmission fluid level. passenger side of the vehicle. See
A transmission fluid leak is the only Engine Compartment Overview on
reason for fluid loss. If a leak page 10-6 for more information on
occurs, take the vehicle to your location.
dealer service department and have
it repaired as soon as possible.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-16 Vehicle Care
2.4L L4 Engine 3. Disconnect the secondary air 2.5L L4 Engine

hose (2) (if equipped).
4. Disconnect the outlet duct by
loosening the air duct clamp (3).
5. Disconnect the electrical
connector (4).
6. Lift the filter cover housing away
from the engine air cleaner/filter
housing.
7. Pull out the filter.
8. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
1. Screws 9. Reverse Steps 2–5 to reinstall 1. Screws
2. Secondary Air Hose (If the filter cover housing. 2. Secondary Air Hose (If
Equipped) Equipped)
3. Air Duct Clamp 3. Electrical Connector
4. Electrical Connector 4. Air Duct Clamp
To inspect or replace the engine air To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter: cleaner/filter:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10-4. page 10-4.
2. Remove the screws (1) on top of 2. Remove the screws (1) on top of
the engine air cleaner/filter the engine air cleaner/filter
housing. housing.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-17
3. Disconnect the secondary air 3.6L V6 Engine 3. Disconnect the secondary air
hose (2) (if equipped). hose (2) (if equipped).
4. Disconnect the electrical 4. Disconnect the electrical
connector (3). connector (3).
5. Disconnect the outlet duct by 5. Disconnect the outlet duct by
loosening the air duct clamp (4). loosening the air duct clamp (4).
6. Lift the filter cover housing away 6. Lift the filter cover housing away
from the engine air cleaner/filter from the engine air cleaner/filter
housing. housing.
7. Pull out the filter. 7. Pull out the filter.
8. Inspect or replace the engine air 8. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter. cleaner/filter.
9. Reverse Steps 2–5 to reinstall 1. Screws 9. Reverse Steps 2–5 to reinstall
the filter cover housing. 2. Secondary Air Hose (If the filter cover housing.
Equipped)
3. Electrical Connector { Warning
4. Air Duct Clamp Operating the engine with the air
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter off can cause you or
cleaner/filter: others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
1. Open the hood. See Hood on helps to stop flames if the engine
page 10-4. backfires. Use caution when
2. Remove the screws (1) on top of working on the engine and do not
the engine air cleaner/filter drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
housing.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-18 Vehicle Care
{ Caution
If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt
can easily get into the engine,
which could damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you are driving.
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct 2.4L L4 Engine 2.5L L4 Engine
working temperature.
1. Engine Cooling Fans (Out 1. Engine Cooling Fans (Out
of View) of View)
2. Coolant Surge Tank and 2. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap Pressure Cap
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-19
{ Warning Caution (Continued)

Heater and radiator hoses, and vehicle warranty. Always use
other engine parts, can be very DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, in the vehicle.
you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a Engine Coolant
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could The cooling system in the vehicle is
cause an engine fire, and you filled with DEX-COOL® engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
could be burned. Get any leak
3.6L V6 Engine remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
1. Engine Cooling Fans (Out occurs first.
of View)
The following explains the cooling
2. Coolant Surge Tank and { Caution system and how to check and add
Pressure Cap coolant when it is low. If there is a
Using coolant other than problem with engine overheating,
{ Warning DEX-COOL® can cause see Engine Overheating on
premature engine, heater core, page 10-22.
An electric engine cooling fan or radiator corrosion. In addition,
under the hood can start up even the engine coolant could require
when the engine is not running changing sooner. Any repairs
and can cause injury. Keep would not be covered by the
hands, clothing, and tools away (Continued)
from any underhood electric fan.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-20 Vehicle Care
What to Use This mixture:

Caution (Continued)
. Gives freezing protection down
{ Warning to −37°C (−34°F), outside proper mixture of engine coolant
temperature. for the cooling system. See
Adding only plain water or some . Gives boiling protection up to Recommended Fluids and
other liquid to the cooling system
129°C (265°F), engine Lubricants on page 11-12.
can be dangerous. Plain water
temperature.
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will. . Protects against rust and Never dispose of engine coolant by
The coolant warning system is set corrosion. putting it in the trash, pouring it on
for the proper coolant mixture. . Will not damage aluminum parts. the ground, or into sewers, streams,
With plain water or the wrong or bodies of water. Have the coolant
. Help keep the proper engine changed by an authorized service
mixture, the engine could get too
temperature. center, familiar with legal
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine requirements regarding used
could catch fire and you or others { Caution coolant disposal. This will help
protect the environment and your
could be burned. Use a 50/ If improper coolant mixture, health.
50 mixture of clean, drinkable inhibitors, or additives are used in
water and DEX-COOL coolant. the vehicle cooling system, the Checking Coolant
engine could overheat and be The vehicle must be on a level
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, damaged. Too much water in the surface when checking the coolant
drinkable water and DEX-COOL mixture can freeze and crack level.
coolant. If using this mixture, engine cooling parts. The repairs Check to see if coolant is visible in
nothing else needs to be added. would not be covered by the the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
vehicle warranty. Use only the inside the coolant surge tank is
(Continued) boiling, do not do anything else until
it cools down.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-21
If coolant is visible but the coolant and DEX-COOL coolant at the

level is not at or above the mark coolant surge tank, but be sure the { Warning
pointed to, add a 50/50 mixture of cooling system, including the
clean drinkable water and coolant surge tank pressure cap, is You can be burned if you spill
DEX-COOL coolant. cool before you do it. coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
Be sure the cooling system is cool and it will burn if the engine parts
before this is done. { Warning are hot enough. Do not spill
If no coolant is visible in the coolant Steam and scalding liquids from a coolant on a hot engine.
surge tank, add coolant as follows: hot cooling system can blow out
How to Add Coolant to the and burn you badly. Never turn
Coolant Surge Tank the cap when the cooling system,
including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
{ Caution system and surge tank pressure
This vehicle has a specific cap to cool.
coolant fill procedure. Failure to 1. Remove the coolant surge tank
follow this procedure could cause pressure cap when the cooling
the engine to overheat and be
severely damaged.
{ Caution system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and
In cold weather, water can freeze upper radiator hose, is no
If no problem is found, check to see and crack the engine, radiator, longer hot.
if coolant is visible in the coolant heater core, and other parts. Use Turn the pressure cap slowly
surge tank. If coolant is visible but the recommended coolant and counterclockwise about
the coolant level is not at the the proper coolant mixture. one-quarter of a turn. If you hear
indicated level mark, add a 50/ a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-22 Vehicle Care
will allow any pressure still left to 4. With the coolant surge tank Engine Overheating
be vented out the pressure cap off, start the
discharge hose. engine and let it run until you There is a coolant temperature
can feel the upper radiator hose gauge on the instrument cluster that
2. Keep turning the pressure cap indicates an overheated engine
slowly and remove it. getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans. condition. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 5-14.
By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant surge tank If the decision is made not to lift the
may be lower. If the level is hood when this warning appears,
lower, add more of the proper get service help right away. See
DEX-COOL coolant mixture to Roadside Assistance Program on
the coolant surge tank until the page 13-5.
level reaches the indicated If the decision is made to lift the
level mark. hood, make sure the vehicle is
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly. parked on a level surface.
Check the level in the coolant surge Then check to see if the engine
tank when the cooling system has cooling fans are running. If the
cooled down. If the coolant is not at engine is overheating, the fans
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper level, repeat Steps 1– should be running. If not, do not
the proper DEX-COOL coolant 3 and reinstall the pressure cap. continue to run the engine and have
mixture to the indicated If the coolant still is not at the proper the vehicle serviced.
level mark. level when the system cools down
again, see your dealer.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-23
If No Steam Is Coming from If the coolant temperature gauge is

{ Caution the Engine Compartment no longer in the overheat zone, the
vehicle can be driven. Continue to
Running the engine without If an engine overheat warning is drive the vehicle slowly for about
coolant may cause damage or a displayed but no steam can be seen 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle
fire. Vehicle damage would not be or heard, the problem might not be distance from the vehicle in front.
covered by the vehicle warranty. too serious. Sometimes the engine If the warning does not come back
See Overheated Engine can get a little too hot when the on, continue to drive normally and
Protection Operating Mode on vehicle: have the cooling system checked
page 10-24 for information on . Climbs a long hill on a hot day. for proper fill and function.
driving to a safe place in an . Stops after high-speed driving. If the warning continues, pull over,
emergency. stop, and park the vehicle
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
right away.
If Steam Is Coming from the . Tows a trailer.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the
Engine Compartment If the overheat warning displays with engine for three minutes while
See Overheated Engine Protection no sign of steam: parked. If the warning is still
Operating Mode on page 10-24 for 1. Turn the air conditioning off. displayed, turn off the engine until it
information on driving to a safe cools down. Also, see Overheated
2. Turn the heater on to the highest Engine Protection Operating Mode
place in an emergency.
temperature and to the highest on page 10-24.
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. When it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral), and let the
engine idle.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-24 Vehicle Care
Overheated Engine Washer Fluid

Protection
{ Caution
What to Use
Operating Mode . Do not use engine coolant
When windshield washer fluid is (antifreeze) in the windshield
This emergency operating mode needed, be sure to read the washer. It can damage the
allows the vehicle to be driven to a manufacturer's instructions before windshield washer system
safe place in an emergency use. If operating the vehicle in an and paint.
situation. If an overheated engine area where the temperature may fall
condition exists, an overheat below freezing, use a fluid that has
. Do not mix water with
protection mode which alternates sufficient protection against ready-to-use washer fluid.
firing groups of cylinders helps freezing. Water can cause the solution
prevent engine damage. In this to freeze and damage the
mode, there is significant loss in Adding Washer Fluid washer fluid tank and other
power and engine performance. parts of the washer system.
The engine coolant temperature

. When using concentrated
gauge indicates if an overheat washer fluid, follow the
condition exists. Driving extended manufacturer instructions for
distances and/or towing a trailer in adding water.
the overheat protection mode . Fill the washer fluid tank only
should be avoided. three-quarters full when it is
Open the cap with the washer very cold. This allows for fluid
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until expansion if freezing occurs,
the tank is full. See Engine which could damage the tank
Compartment Overview on if it is completely full.
page 10-6 for reservoir location.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-25
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates Replacing Brake System Parts

can cause a brake squeal when the
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc The braking system on a vehicle is
brakes are first applied or lightly
brake pads have built-in wear complex. Its many parts have to be
applied. This does not mean
indicators that make a high-pitched of top quality and work well together
something is wrong with the brakes.
warning sound when the brake pads if the vehicle is to have really good
are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are braking. The vehicle was designed
The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake and tested with top-quality brake
heard all the time when the vehicle pulsation. When tires are rotated, parts. When parts of the braking
is moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and system are replaced, be sure to get
brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the new, approved replacement parts.
proper sequence to torque If this is not done, the brakes might
specifications. See Capacities and not work properly. For example,
{ Warning Specifications on page 12-2. installing disc brake pads that are
The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be wrong for the vehicle, can change
means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets. the balance between the front and
not work well. That could lead to rear brakes — for the worse. The
a crash. When the brake wear
Brake Pedal Travel braking performance expected can
See your dealer if the brake pedal change in many other ways if the
warning sound is heard, have the
does not return to normal height, wrong replacement brake parts are
vehicle serviced. installed.
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be
{ Caution required.
Continuing to drive with worn-out Brake Adjustment
brake pads could result in costly Every time the brakes are applied,
brake repair. with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-26 Vehicle Care
Brake Fluid hydraulic system fixed, since a What to Add

leak means that sooner or later Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
the brakes will not work well. from a sealed container. See
Do not top off the brake fluid. Recommended Fluids and
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. Lubricants on page 11-12.
If fluid is added when the linings are Always clean the brake fluid
worn, there will be too much fluid reservoir cap and the area around
when new brake linings are the cap before removing it. This
The brake master cylinder reservoir installed. Add or remove brake fluid, helps keep dirt from entering the
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as as necessary, only when work is reservoir.
indicated on the reservoir cap. See done on the brake hydraulic system.
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10-6 for the location of the { Warning { Warning
reservoir. With the wrong kind of fluid in the
If too much brake fluid is added, it
There are only two reasons why the brake hydraulic system, the
can spill on the engine and burn,
brake fluid level in the reservoir brakes might not work well. This
if the engine is hot enough. You
might go down: could cause a crash. Always use
or others could be burned, and
. The brake fluid level goes down the proper brake fluid.
the vehicle could be damaged.
because of normal brake lining Add brake fluid only when work is
wear. When new linings are done on the brake hydraulic
installed, the fluid level goes system.
back up.
. A fluid leak in the brake When the brake fluid falls to a low
hydraulic system can also cause level, the brake warning light comes
a low fluid level. Have the brake on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5-20.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-27
Battery
{ Caution
This vehicle has a standard 12-volt
. Using the wrong fluid can battery. Refer to the replacement
badly damage brake number on the original battery label
hydraulic system parts. For when a new standard 12-volt battery
example, just a few drops of is needed.
mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in the brake eAssist vehicles also have a high
hydraulic system can damage voltage battery. Only a trained
brake hydraulic system parts service technician with the proper
so badly that they will have to knowledge and tools should inspect,
be replaced. Do not let test, or replace the high voltage
someone put in the wrong battery. See your dealer if the high The eAssist system high voltage
kind of fluid. voltage battery needs service. The battery is cooled with air drawn from
dealer has information on how to the vehicle interior. The cold air
. If brake fluid is spilled on the recycle the high voltage battery.
vehicle's painted surfaces, intake for the battery is behind the
There is also information available rear seat, on the filler panel. Do not
the paint finish can be at http://www.recyclemybattery.com.
damaged. Be careful not to cover the intake.
spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off { Warning
immediately.
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-28 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage Starter Switch Check Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control
{ Warning { Warning Function Check
Batteries have acid that can burn When you are doing this
you and gas that can explode. inspection, the vehicle could { Warning
You can be badly hurt if you are move suddenly. If the vehicle
not careful. See Jump Starting When you are doing this
moves, you or others could be
(with or without eAssist) on inspection, the vehicle could
injured.
page 10-72 or Jump Starting move suddenly. If the vehicle
(On-board with eAssist Only) on moves, you or others could be
page 10-71 for tips on working 1. Before starting this check, be injured.
sure there is enough room
around a battery without
around the vehicle.
getting hurt. 1. Before starting this check, be
2. Firmly apply both the parking sure there is enough room
brake and the regular brake. around the vehicle. It should be
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
12-volt battery black, negative (−) Do not use the accelerator parked on a level surface.
cable from the battery to keep the pedal, and be ready to turn off 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
battery from running down. the engine immediately if it Be ready to apply the regular
starts. brake immediately if the vehicle
Extended Storage: Remove the
12-volt battery black, negative (−) 3. Try to start the engine in each begins to move.
cable from the battery or use a gear. The vehicle should start 3. With the engine off, turn the
battery trickle charger. only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). ignition on, but do not start the
If the vehicle starts in any other engine. Without applying the
Remember to reconnect the battery position, contact your dealer for
when ready to drive the vehicle. regular brake, try to move the
service. shift lever out of P (Park) with
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-29

. To check the P (Park)
normal effort. If the shift lever Park Brake and P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
moves out of P (Park), contact
your dealer for service.
Mechanism Check With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
Ignition Transmission { Warning parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Lock Check When you are doing this check,
Contact your dealer if service is
If equipped with a key type ignition, the vehicle could begin to move. required.
while parked and with the parking You or others could be injured
brake set, try to turn the ignition to and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
Wiper Blade Replacement
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position. of the vehicle in case it begins to Windshield wiper blades should be
roll. Be ready to apply the regular inspected for wear or cracking. See
. The ignition should turn to Maintenance Schedule on
LOCK/OFF only when the shift brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move. page 11-2.
lever is in P (Park).
It is a good idea to clean the wiper
. The ignition key should come blade assembly on a regular basis.
out only in LOCK/OFF. Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping When worn, or when cleaning is
Contact your dealer if service is your foot on the regular brake, set ineffective, replace the wiper blade.
required. the parking brake. For proper windshield wiper blade
length and type, see Maintenance
. To check the parking brake's Replacement Parts on page 11-13.
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-30 Vehicle Care
{ Caution Headlamp Aiming

Headlamp aim has been preset and
Allowing the wiper arm to touch should need no further adjustment.
the windshield when no wiper
blade is installed could damage If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,
the windshield. Any damage that the headlamp aim may be affected.
occurs would not be covered by If adjustment to the headlamps is
necessary, see your dealer.
your warranty. Do not allow the
wiper arm to touch the windshield.
To replace the wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper assembly away 2. Lift up on the latch in the middle
from the windshield. of the wiper blade where the
wiper arm attaches.
3. With the latch open, pull the
wiper blade down toward the
windshield far enough to release
it from the J-hooked end of the
wiper arm.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiper
blade replacement.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-31
Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge Headlamps, Front Turn

For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting Signal, Sidemarker, and
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on Parking Lamps
page 10-35. { Warning Base Headlamp Assembly
For any bulb‐changing procedure The high intensity discharge
not listed in this section, contact The base model vehicle has
lighting system operates at a very halogen high/low-beam headlamps,
your dealer.
high voltage. If you try to service a parking/turn signal lamp, and a
any of the system components, sidemarker lamp on the headlamp
Halogen Bulbs you could be seriously injured. assembly.
Have your dealer or a qualified
{ Warning technician service them.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you The vehicle may have HID
drop or scratch the bulb. You or headlamps. After an HID headlamp
others could be injured. Be sure bulb has been replaced, you may
to read and follow the instructions notice that the beam is a slightly
on the bulb package. different shade than it was originally.
This is normal.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
LED Lighting Side Similar
This vehicle has several LED lamps. 1. Sidemarker Lamp
For replacement of any LED lighting
assembly, contact your dealer. 2. High/Low-Beam Headlamp
3. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-32 Vehicle Care
To replace one of the headlamp 6. Install a new bulb in the lamp

bulbs: assembly.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on 7. Connect the electrical connector.
page 10-4. 8. Replace the cap on the back of
2. For the driver side bulb, remove the headlamp assembly by
the windshield washer bottle turning it clockwise.
filler neck by firmly pulling it 9. For the driver side, reinstall the
straight up and out of the bottle. windshield washer bottle filler
3. Remove the cap from the back neck by firmly pushing it straight Driver Side Shown, Passenger
of the headlamp assembly by into the bottle. Ensure that the Side Similar
turning it counterclockwise. filler neck clip engages into the 1. Sidemarker Lamp
underhood electrical center
retainer. 2. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
Uplevel Headlamp Assembly Front Turn Signal, Parking, and

Sidemarker Lamps
The uplevel model vehicle has a
high intensity discharge (HID) high/ To replace one of these lamps on a
low beam headlamp, a parking/turn base, or uplevel assembly:
signal lamp, and a sidemarker lamp 1. For the driver side bulb, remove
on the headlamp assembly. the windshield washer bottle
For replacement of the headlamp on filler neck by firmly pulling it
4. Disconnect the electrical an HID assembly, contact your straight up and out of the bottle.
connector. dealer. See High Intensity 2. Remove the bulb socket from
5. Remove the bulb from the lamp Discharge (HID) Lighting on the headlamp assembly by
assembly by turning page 10-31. turning it counterclockwise.
counterclockwise.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-33
3. Remove the bulb from the Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal

socket. Lamp and Back-Up Lamp
4. Replace the bulb in the bulb
socket.
5. Install the bulb socket in the
headlamp assembly by turning it
clockwise.
6. For the driver side, reinstall the
windshield washer bottle filler
neck by firmly pushing it straight
into the bottle. Ensure that the
filler neck clip engages into the 3. Remove the bulb socket by
underhood electrical center turning counterclockwise and
retainer. pulling straight out.
4. Remove the bulb from the Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Side Similar
socket by pulling it straight out.
Stoplamps, and Back-Up 1. Back-Up Lamp
5. Install the new bulb in the bulb
Lamps socket. 2. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
Trunk Deck Inboard Taillamp 6. Install the bulb socket by turning Signal Lamp
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on clockwise.
page 2-14. 7. Install the trunk deck trim.
2. Remove the push pins and pull
back the trunk deck trim.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-34 Vehicle Care
6. Install the bulb socket into the

{ Caution taillamp assembly by turning it
clockwise.
Improper lamp assembly removal
and installation can cause leaks 7. Install the trunk trim and
and water intrusion which may push pins.
cause damage to the taillamp. Do
not remove the taillamp assembly License Plate Lamp
to replace a bulb. Use the trunk To replace one of these bulbs:
opening to access the bulb.
To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on 3. Turn the bulb socket (1)
page 2-14. counterclockwise to remove it
from the lamp assembly (3).
2. Remove the push pins and pull
the trunk trim away from the 4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of
taillamp assembly. the bulb socket.
3. Remove the bulb socket from 5. Push the replacement bulb
the taillamp assembly by turning straight into the bulb socket and
it counterclockwise. turn the bulb socket clockwise to
Passenger Side Shown, Driver install it into the lamp assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the
socket by turning the bulb Side Similar 6. Push the lamp assembly back
counterclockwise one-quarter 1. Push the lamp assembly toward into position until the release tab
turn and pulling it straight out. the right. locks into place.
5. Install a new bulb into the 2. Pull the lamp assembly down to
socket. remove.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-35
Replacement Bulbs Electrical System Electrical System

Bulb Overload
Exterior Lamp
Number High Voltage Devices and The vehicle has fuses and circuit
Back-Up Lamp 7440 Wiring breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
Deck Lid Taillamp 194
Front Parking/Turn 7444 NA
{ Warning When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
Signal Lamp PLATINUM Exposure to high voltage can and closes, protecting the circuit
Front 194 cause shock, burns, and even until the current load returns to
Sidemarker Lamp death. The high voltage normal or the problem is fixed. This
components in the vehicle can greatly reduces the chance of circuit
High/Low-Beam HIR– only be serviced by technicians overload and fire caused by
Headlamp (Base) 2 (9012) with special training. electrical problems.
License Plate Lamp W5W LL High voltage components are Fuses and circuit breakers protect
Stoplamp/Taillamp/ 7443 LL identified by labels. Do not power devices in the vehicle.
Turn Signal Lamp remove, open, take apart, Replace a bad fuse with a new one
or modify these components. of the identical size and rating.
For replacement bulbs not listed High voltage cable or wiring has
here, contact your dealer. orange covering. Do not probe, If there is a problem on the road and
tamper with, cut, or modify high a fuse needs to be replaced, the
same amperage fuse can be
voltage cable or wiring.
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-36 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Wiring Fuses Engine Compartment

An electrical overload may cause The wiring circuits in the vehicle are Fuse Block
the lamps to go on and off, or in protected from short circuits by The engine compartment fuse block
some cases to remain off. Have the fuses. This greatly reduces the is on the driver side of the engine
headlamp wiring checked right away chance of damage caused by compartment, near the battery.
if the lamps go on and off or electrical problems.
remain off.
Windshield Wipers
To check a fuse, look at the
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
{ Caution
If the band is broken or melted, Spilling liquid on any electrical
If the wiper motor overheats due to
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace component on the vehicle may
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
a bad fuse with a new one of the damage it. Always keep the
wipers will stop until the motor cools
identical size and rating. covers on any electrical
and will then restart.
Fuses of the same amperage can component.
Although the circuit is protected
be temporarily borrowed from
from electrical overload, overload
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
due to heavy snow or ice may
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
cause wiper linkage damage.
possible.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the To identify and check fuses, circuit
windshield wipers. breakers, and relays, see Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on
If the overload is caused by an
page 10-36 and Instrument Panel
electrical problem and not snow or
Fuse Block on page 10-40.
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-37

2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-38 Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not be equipped Mini Mini

with all of the fuses, relays, and Usage Usage
Fuses Fuses
features shown.
15 MGU Coolant Pump Lighting Control,
Mini Interior Switch
Usage (eAssist)
Fuses Backlighting
1 Transmission Control 16 Aero Shutter/eAssist
Ignition 33 Right Front
Module Battery Heated Seat
2 Engine Control 17 Seat Cooling Fans/
Heated Steering 34 Antilock Brake
Module Battery System Valve
Wheel
3 Air Conditioning 35 Amplifier
Compressor Clutch 19 Aero Shutter
23 Adaptive Cruise 37 Right High Beam
5 Engine Control
Module Ignition Control/Power Pack 38 Left High Beam
(eAssist)
8 Ignition Coils – Even 46 Cooling Fan
29 Passive Entry/Passive
9 Ignition Coils – Odd Start Battery 47 Emissions
10 Engine Control 30 Canister Vent 48 SAIR Valve (eAssist)
Module Solenoid/BPIM 49 Right HID Lighting
11 Emissions Battery (eAssist)
50 Left HID Lighting
13 Transmission Control 31 Left Front
Heated Seat 51 Horn/Dual Horn
Module/Chassis
Control Module 32 Right Rear Stop. Turn 52 Cluster Ignition
Ignition Tail Lamp, RAP 53 Inside Rearview
14 SAIR Solenoid Relay, Ambient Mirror/Rear Camera
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-39
Mini J-Case Usage Mini Usage

Usage
Fuses Fuses Relays
54 Reflected LED 6 Front Wiper 7 Powertrain
Display, Console LED
12 Starter 9 Cooling Fan K2
Display, Heating,
Ventilation and Air 21 Rear Power Window 13 Cooling Fan K1
Conditioning Module 22 Sunroof 15 Run/Crank
55 Outside Rearview 24 Front Power Window 16 Air Pump Emissions
Mirror
25 Accessory Relay 17 Window/Mirror
56 Windshield Washer Defogger
26 Antilock Brake
60 Heated Mirror System Pump
62 Rear Camera/Park Micro Usage
27 Electric Parking Brake Relays
Assist/Side Blind
Zone Alert 28 Rear Defogger 1 Air Conditioning
66 Trunk Release 41 Vacuum Pump Compressor Clutch
67 Chassis Control 42 Cooling Fan K2 2 Starter Solenoid
Module 44 Transmission 4 Front Wiper Speed
69 Battery Voltage Auxiliary Pump 5 Front Wiper Control
Sensor (eAssist)
6 Air Pump Solenoid
70 Canister Vent 45 Cooling Fan K1 Emissions/Cabin
Solenoid (eAssist) 59 Air Pump Emissions Pump (eAssist)
71 Memory Seat 10 Cooling Fan K3
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-40 Vehicle Care
Micro Usage To access the fuses on vehicles not

Relays equipped with a storage bin:
1. Pull the lower edge of the cover
11 Transmission Oil
rearward. The clips on the lower
Pump (eAssist)
edge will release, and the upper
14 Low Beam HID edge will fall away from the
22 Air Pump Solenoid instrument panel.
Emissions (eAssist) 2. To replace the cover, hook the
upper edge of the cover on the
Instrument Panel Fuse instrument panel, and swing the
lower edge of the cover into
Block place.
The instrument panel fuse block is To access the fuses on vehicles
equipped with a storage bin: 3. Press the lower edge of the
in the instrument panel, on the cover until the clips engage.
driver side of the vehicle. 1. Push forward on the top edge of
the bin to unlatch it.
2. Press in on the sides of the bin
to release it from the instrument
panel.
3. Pivot the door downward,
allowing it to hang from the
instrument panel.
4. To close the bin, swing it upward
and push in until closed.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-41
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

5 Display 16 Not Used
6 Power Outlet – 17 Heater, Ventilation
Console Bin and Air Conditioning
Controller
7 Power Outlet –
Forward/ 18 Logistics
Console Rear
19 Not Used
8 Trunk Release,
20 Ignition Switch
Brake Pedal Apply,
Keyless Start 21 Not Used
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Indicators, Hazard 22 Steering Wheel
Switch Illumination, Controls
The vehicle may not be equipped
CHMSL/Brake
with all of the fuses, relays, and
Relay, Sidemarker 23 Left Low Beam/DRL,
features shown.
Lamps, Washer Left Front Turn
Mini Fuses Usage Relay, Run/Crank Lamp, Left Rear
1 Telematics Relay Park/Stoplamp,
Child Lock Relay
2 Rear Turn Stoplamp, 9 Trunk Lamp, Right
Courtesy Lamps, Low Beam/DRL, 24 Theft Deterrent LED,
Back-up Lamps, Right Front Turn Key Capture
Shift Lock Solenoid, Lamp, Right Rear Solenoid, Run Relay
Puddle Lamps Park/Stoplamp 25 Tilt/Telescope
3 LED Indicator Light 14 Diagnostic Link Steering Column
Connector 26 110V AC
4 Radio
15 Airbag/SDM
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-42 Vehicle Care
J–Case Usage Wheels and Tires Warning (Continued)

Fuses
10 Door Unlock Tires and a serious crash. See
Every new GM vehicle has Vehicle Load Limits on
11 Front Heater,
high-quality tires made by a page 9-10.
Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning Blower leading tire manufacturer. See . Underinflated tires pose
the warranty manual for the same danger as
Circuit Usage information regarding the tire overloaded tires. The
Breakers warranty and where to get resulting crash could
12 Power Seat– service. For additional cause serious injury.
Passenger information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently
manufacturer. to maintain the
13 Power Seat–Driver recommended pressure.
Relays Usage
{ Warning Tire pressure should be
checked when the tires
K1 Not Used
. Poorly maintained and are cold.
improperly used tires are
K2 Logistic dangerous.
. Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
K3 Power Outlet Relay . Overloading the tires can or broken by a sudden
cause overheating as a impact — such as when
result of too much flexing. hitting a pothole. Keep
There could be a blowout tires at the recommended
(Continued) pressure.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-43
See Tire Pressure for traction or performance as winter

Warning (Continued) High-Speed Operation on tires on snow or ice-covered roads.
page 10-51 for inflation pressure See Winter Tires on page 10-43.
. Worn or old tires can
cause a crash. If the tread adjustment for high-speed
driving. Winter Tires
is badly worn,
replace them. This vehicle was not originally
All-Season Tires equipped with winter tires. Winter
. Replace any tires that tires are designed for increased
This vehicle may come with
have been damaged by traction on snow and ice-covered
all-season tires. These tires are
impacts with potholes, designed to provide good overall
roads. Consider installing winter
curbs, etc. tires on the vehicle if frequent
performance on most road surfaces
driving on snow or ice-covered
. Improperly repaired tires and weather conditions. Original
roads is expected. See your dealer
can cause a crash. Only equipment tires designed to GM's
for details regarding winter tire
the dealer or an specific tire performance criteria
availability and proper tire selection.
have a TPC specification code
authorized tire service molded onto the sidewall. Original
Also, see Buying New Tires on
center should repair, page 10-58.
equipment all-season tires can be
replace, dismount, and identified by the last two characters With winter tires, there may be
mount the tires. of this TPC code, which will decreased dry road traction,
. Do not spin the tires in be “MS.” increased road noise, and shorter
tread life. After changing to winter
excess of 56 km/h Consider installing winter tires on
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
(35 mph) on slippery the vehicle if frequent driving on
handling and braking.
surfaces such as snow, snow or ice-covered roads is
mud, ice, etc. Excessive expected. All-season tires provide If using winter tires:
spinning may cause the adequate performance for most . Use tires of the same brand and
winter driving conditions, but they tread type on all four wheel
tires to explode. may not offer the same level of positions.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-44 Vehicle Care

. Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
speed rating as the original Useful information about a tire is section.
equipment tires. molded into its sidewall. The
Winter tires with the same speed examples show a typical (2) TPC Spec (Tire
rating as the original equipment tires passenger vehicle tire and a Performance Criteria
may not be available for H, V, W, Y, compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter equipment tires designed to
tires with a lower speed rating are GM's specific tire performance
chosen, never exceed the tire's criteria have a TPC specification
maximum speed capability. code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
Summer Tires exceed all federal safety
This vehicle may come with high guidelines.
performance summer tires. These (3) DOT (Department of
tires have a special tread and
Transportation): The
compound that are optimized for
maximum dry and wet road Department of Transportation
performance. This special tread and (DOT) code indicates that the
compound will decrease Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example tire is in compliance with the
performance in cold climates, and U.S. Department of
on ice and snow. We recommend (1) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle
installing winter tires on the vehicle combination of letters and Safety Standards.
if frequent driving in cold numbers used to define a
temperatures or on snow or ice particular tire's width, height, DOT Tire Date of
covered roads is expected. See aspect ratio, construction type, Manufacture: The last four
Winter Tires on page 10-43. digits of the TIN indicate the tire
manufactured date. The first two
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-45
digits represent the week (01– performance factors: treadwear, (2) Temporary Use Only: The
52) and the last two digits, the traction, and temperature compact spare tire or temporary
year. For example, the third resistance. For more information use tire should not be driven at
week of the year 2010 would see Uniform Tire Quality speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).
have a four-digit DOT date Grading on page 10-60. The compact spare tire is for
of 0310. (7) Maximum Cold Inflation emergency use when a regular
(4) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load that road tire has lost air and gone
(TIN): The letters and numbers can be carried and the flat. If the vehicle has a compact
following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to spare tire, see Compact Spare
of Transportation) code are the support that load. Tire on page 10-70 and If a Tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN). Goes Flat on page 10-63.
The TIN shows the (3) Tire Identification Number
manufacturer and plant code, (TIN): The letters and numbers
tire size, and date the tire was following the DOT (Department
manufactured. The TIN is of Transportation) code are the
molded onto both sides of the Tire Identification Number (TIN).
tire, although only one side may The TIN shows the
have the date of manufacture. manufacturer and plant code,
(5) Tire Ply Material : The type tire size, and date the tire was
of cord and number of plies in manufactured. The TIN is
the sidewall and under the tread. molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
(6) Uniform Tire Quality Compact Spare Tire Example
have the date of manufacture.
Grading (UTQG): Tire (1) Tire Ply Material : The type
manufacturers are required to of cord and number of plies in
grade tires based on three the sidewall and under the tread.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-46 Vehicle Care
(4) Maximum Cold Inflation criteria have a TPC specification vehicle tire engineered to
Load Limit: Maximum load that code molded onto the sidewall. standards set by the U.S. Tire
can be carried and the GM's TPC specifications meet or and Rim Association.
maximum pressure needed to exceed all federal safety (2) Tire Width: The three-digit
support that load. guidelines. number indicates the tire section
(5) Tire Inflation: The width in millimeters from
temporary use tire or compact Tire Designations sidewall to sidewall.
spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
420 kPa (60 psi). For more number that indicates the tire
The following is an example of a
information on tire pressure and height-to-width measurements.
typical passenger vehicle
inflation see Tire Pressure on For example, if the tire size
tire size.
page 10-50. aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
(6) Tire Size: A combination of item 3 of the illustration, it would
letters and numbers define a mean that the tire's sidewall is
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, 60 percent as high as it is wide.
construction type, and service (4) Construction Code: A letter
description. The letter T as the code is used to indicate the type
first character in the tire size of ply construction in the tire.
means the tire is for temporary (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a The letter R means radial ply
use only. construction; the letter D means
metric tire sizing system. The
(7) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in diagonal or bias ply
Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger construction; and the letter B
Specification): Original means belted-bias ply
equipment tires designed to construction.
GM's specific tire performance
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-47
(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of automatic transmission, power before a tire has built up heat
the wheel in inches. windows, power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure
(6) Service Description: These conditioning. on page 10-50.
characters represent the load Aspect Ratio: The relationship Curb Weight: The weight of a
index and speed rating of the of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and
tire. The load index represents Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including the
the load carrying capacity a tire cords between the plies and the maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
is certified to carry. The speed tread. Cords may be made from and coolant, but without
rating is the maximum speed a steel or other reinforcing passengers and cargo.
tire is certified to carry a load. materials. DOT Markings: A code molded
Bead: The tire bead contains into the sidewall of a tire
Tire Terminology and signifying that the tire is in
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto compliance with the U.S.
Air Pressure: The amount of the rim. Department of Transportation
air inside the tire pressing (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
outward on each square inch of Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code
the tire. Air pressure is in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
or psi (pounds per square inch). 90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
the tread. identify the tire manufacturer,
Accessory Weight: The production plant, brand, and
combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire, date of production.
accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-10.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-48 Vehicle Care
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure: outward when mounted on a
Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to vehicle. The side of the tire that
Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated. contains a whitewall, bears
page 9-10. The maximum air pressure is white lettering, or bears
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight molded onto the sidewall. manufacturer, brand, and/or
Rating for the rear axle. See Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is
Vehicle Load Limits on load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same
page 9-10. maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall
pressure for that tire. of the tire.
Intended Outboard Sidewall :
The side of an asymmetrical tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
that must always face outward Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and
when mounted on a vehicle. weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and
vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure. production options weight. Recommended Inflation
Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A manufacturer's recommended
tire used on light duty trucks and number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as shown
some multipurpose passenger on the tire placard. See Tire
vehicles. 68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9-10. Pressure on page 10-50 and
Load Index: An assigned Vehicle Load Limits on
number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution : page 9-10.
that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions.
carrying capacity of a tire. Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-49
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow 68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated
tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear cargo load. See Vehicle Load
extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the tread Limits on page 9-10.
90 degrees to the centerline of of a tire when only 1.6 mm Vehicle Maximum Load on the
the tread. (1/16 in) of tread remains. See Tire: Load on an individual tire
Rim: A metal support for a tire When It Is Time for New Tires due to curb weight, accessory
and upon which the tire beads on page 10-57. weight, occupant weight, and
are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality cargo weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire Grading Standards): A tire Vehicle Placard: A label
between the tread and the bead. information system that provides permanently attached to a
consumers with ratings for a vehicle showing the vehicle
Speed Rating: An tire's traction, temperature, and
alphanumeric code assigned to capacity weight and the original
treadwear. Ratings are equipment tire size and
a tire indicating the maximum determined by tire
speed at which a tire can recommended inflation pressure.
manufacturers using See “Tire and Loading
operate. government testing procedures. Information Label” under Vehicle
Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into the Load Limits on page 9-10.
the tire and the road surface. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
The amount of grip provided. Tire Quality Grading on
page 10-60.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
the road. number of designated seating
positions multiplied by
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-50 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Caution (Continued)

How the vehicle is loaded
affects vehicle handling and ride
Tires need the correct amount of comfort. Never load the vehicle
air pressure to operate Overinflated tires, or tires that
have too much air, can with more weight than it was
effectively. designed to carry.
result in:
{ Caution . Unusual wear. When to Check
Neither tire underinflation nor . Poor handling. Check the tires once a month or
overinflation is good. more. Do not forget the compact
. Rough ride. spare, if the vehicle has one.
Underinflated tires, or tires . Needless damage from The cold compact spare tire
that do not have enough air,
can result in: road hazards. pressure should be at 420 kPa
(60 psi). See Compact Spare
. Tire overloading and Tire on page 10-70.
The Tire and Loading
overheating which could
Information label on the vehicle How to Check
lead to a blowout.
indicates the original equipment
. Premature or Use a good quality pocket-type
tires and the correct cold tire
irregular wear. gauge to check tire pressure.
inflation pressures. The
Proper tire inflation cannot be
. Poor handling. recommended pressure is the
determined by looking at the tire.
minimum air pressure needed to
. Reduced fuel economy. Check the tire inflation pressure
support the vehicle's maximum
(Continued) when the tires are cold, meaning
load carrying capacity. See
the vehicle has not been driven
Vehicle Load Limits on
for at least three hours or no
page 9-10.
more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-51
Remove the valve cap from the Tire Pressure for Vehicles with P245/45R19 and
tire valve stem. Press the tire P245/40R20 size tires require
High-Speed Operation inflation pressure adjustment when
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. driving the vehicle at speeds of
If the cold tire inflation pressure
{ Warning 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set
the cold inflation pressure to
matches the recommended Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h 270 kPa (39 psi).
pressure on the Tire and (100 mph) or higher, puts an
Loading Information label, no additional strain on tires. Return the tires to the
further adjustment is necessary. recommended cold tire inflation
Sustained high-speed driving
pressure when high-speed driving
If the inflation pressure is low, causes excessive heat buildup
has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits
add air until the recommended and can cause sudden tire failure.
on page 9-10 and Tire Pressure on
pressure is reached. If the You could have a crash and you page 10-50.
inflation pressure is high, press or others could be killed. Some
on the metal stem in the center high-speed rated tires require Tire Pressure Monitor
of the tire valve to release air. inflation pressure adjustment for
high-speed operation. When System
Recheck the tire pressure with speed limits and road conditions The Tire Pressure Monitor System
the tire gauge. are such that a vehicle can be (TPMS) uses radio and sensor
Return the valve caps on the driven at high speeds, make sure technology to check tire pressure
valve stems to prevent leaks the tires are rated for high-speed levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
and keep out dirt and moisture. operation, in excellent condition, the air pressure in your tires and
and set to the correct cold tire transmit tire pressure readings to a
inflation pressure for the receiver located in the vehicle.
vehicle load. Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-52 Vehicle Care
by the vehicle manufacturer on the Please note that the TPMS is not a wheels on the vehicle that prevent
vehicle placard or tire inflation substitute for proper tire the TPMS from functioning properly.
pressure label. (If your vehicle has maintenance, and it is the driver's Always check the TPMS malfunction
tires of a different size than the size responsibility to maintain correct tire telltale after replacing one or more
indicated on the vehicle placard or pressure, even if under-inflation has tires or wheels on your vehicle to
tire inflation pressure label, you not reached the level to trigger ensure that the replacement or
should determine the proper tire illumination of the TPMS low tire alternate tires and wheels allow the
inflation pressure for those tires.) pressure telltale. TPMS to continue to function
As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been properly.
vehicle has been equipped with a equipped with a TPMS malfunction See Tire Pressure Monitor
tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the Operation on page 10-52.
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire system is not operating properly. See Radio Frequency Statement on
pressure telltale when one or more The TPMS malfunction indicator is page 13-15.
of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure
under-inflated. telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for Tire Pressure Monitor
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then Operation
should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated. This vehicle may have a Tire
soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start-ups as The TPMS is designed to warn the
significantly under-inflated tire long as the malfunction exists. driver when a low tire pressure
causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is condition exists. TPMS sensors are
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation illuminated, the system may not be mounted onto each tire and wheel
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire assembly, excluding the spare tire
tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS and wheel assembly. The TPMS
vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety sensors monitor the air pressure in
ability. of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-53
the tires and transmits the tire pressure levels can be viewed. For The TPMS can warn about a low
pressure readings to a receiver additional information and details tire pressure condition but it does
located in the vehicle. about the DIC operation and not replace normal tire
displays see Driver Information maintenance. See Tire Inspection
Center (DIC) on page 5-27. on page 10-56, Tire Rotation on
The low tire pressure warning light page 10-56 and Tires on
may come on in cool weather when page 10-42.
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This { Caution
could be an early indicator that the
When a low tire pressure condition air pressure is getting low and Tire sealant materials are not all
is detected, the TPMS illuminates needs to be inflated to the proper the same. A non-approved tire
the low tire pressure warning light pressure. sealant could damage the TPMS
located on the instrument cluster. sensors. TPMS sensor damage
A Tire and Loading Information caused by using an incorrect tire
If the warning light comes on, stop
label, attached to your vehicle,
as soon as possible and inflate the sealant is not covered by the
shows the size of the original
tires to the recommended pressure vehicle warranty. Always use only
equipment tires and the correct
shown on the Tire and Loading the GM approved tire sealant
inflation pressure for the tires when
Information label. See Vehicle Load available through your dealer or
they are cold. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9-10. included in the vehicle.
Limits on page 9-10, for an example
A message to check the pressure in of the Tire and Loading Information
a specific tire displays in the Driver label and its location. Also see Tire
Information Center (DIC). The low Pressure on page 10-50.
tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at
each ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-54 Vehicle Care
TPMS Malfunction Light and

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or
Message process was not done or not being near facilities using radio
completed successfully after wave frequencies similar to the
The TPMS will not function properly rotating the tires. The TPMS could cause the TPMS
if one or more of the TPMS sensors malfunction light and the DIC sensors to malfunction.
are missing or inoperable. When the message should go off after
system detects a malfunction, the If the TPMS is not functioning
successfully completing the properly it cannot detect or signal a
low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process. See
about one minute and then stays on low tire condition. See your dealer
"TPMS Sensor Matching for service if the TPMS malfunction
for the remainder of the ignition Process" later in this section.
cycle. A DIC warning message also light and DIC message comes on
displays. The malfunction light and
. One or more TPMS sensors are and stays on.
DIC warning message come on at missing or damaged. The
malfunction light and the DIC TPMS Sensor Matching
each ignition cycle until the problem Process
is corrected. Some of the conditions message should go off when the
that can cause these to come TPMS sensors are installed and Each TPMS sensor has a unique
on are: the sensor matching process is identification code. The identification
performed successfully. See code needs to be matched to a new
. One of the road tires has been your dealer for service. tire/wheel position after rotating the
replaced with the spare tire. The vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
spare tire does not have a
. Replacement tires or wheels do
not match the original equipment more of the TPMS sensors. The
TPMS sensor. The malfunction TPMS sensor matching process
light and DIC message should tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
other than those recommended should also be performed after
go off after the road tire is replacing a spare tire with a road
replaced and the sensor could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying tire containing the TPMS sensor.
matching process is performed The malfunction light and the DIC
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor New Tires on page 10-58.
message should go off at the next
Matching Process” later in this ignition cycle. The sensors are
section. matched to the tire/wheel positions,
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-55
using a TPMS relearn tool, in the Settings menu. See Driver 8. Proceed to the passenger side
following order: driver side front tire, Information Center (DIC) on front tire, and repeat the
passenger side front tire, passenger page 5-27. procedure in Step 7.
side rear tire, and driver side rear. 4. Use the DIC controls on the right 9. Proceed to the passenger side
See your dealer for service or to side of the steering wheel to rear tire, and repeat the
purchase a relearn tool. scroll to the Tire Pressure procedure in Step 7.
There are two minutes to match the screen under the DIC info page. 10. Proceed to the driver side rear
first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match all four 5. Press and hold the V (Set/ tire, and repeat the procedure
Reset) button located in the in Step 7. The horn sounds two
tire/wheel positions. If it takes times to indicate the sensor
longer, the matching process stops center of the DIC controls.
identification code has been
and must be restarted. The horn sounds twice to signal matched to the driver side rear
The TPMS sensor matching the receiver is in relearn mode tire, and the TPMS sensor
process is: and the TIRE LEARNING matching process is no longer
ACTIVE message displays on active. The TIRE LEARNING
1. Set the parking brake. the DIC screen. ACTIVE message on the DIC
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with 6. Start with the driver side display screen goes off.
the engine off or place the front tire.
vehicle power mode in ON/RUN/ 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
START. See Ignition Positions 7. Place the relearn tool against or press STOP to turn the
(Keyless Access) on page 9-15 the tire sidewall, near the valve ignition off.
or Ignition Positions (Key stem. Then press the button to 12. Set all four tires to the
Access) on page 9-17. activate the TPMS sensor. recommended air pressure
A horn chirp confirms that the level as indicated on the Tire
3. Make sure the Tire Pressure info sensor identification code has
page option is turned on. The and Loading Information label.
been matched to this tire and
info pages on the DIC can be wheel position.
turned on and off through the
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-56 Vehicle Care
Tire Inspection
. The tire has a puncture, cut, alignment. See When It Is Time
or other damage that cannot for New Tires on page 10-57
We recommend that the tires, be repaired well because of and Wheel Replacement on
including the spare tire, if the the size or location of the page 10-62.
vehicle has one, be inspected damage.
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month. Tire Rotation
Replace the tire if: Tires should be rotated every
. The indicators at three or 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
more places around the tire Maintenance Schedule on
can be seen. page 11-2.
. There is cord or fabric Tires are rotated to achieve a
showing through the tire's uniform wear for all tires. The
rubber. first rotation is the most
important.
. The tread or sidewall is
cracked, cut, or snagged Anytime unusual wear is Use this rotation pattern when
deep enough to show cord or noticed, rotate the tires as soon rotating the tires.
fabric. as possible, check for proper tire
inflation pressure, and check for Do not include the compact
. The tire has a bump, bulge, damaged tires or wheels. If the spare tire in the tire rotation.
or split. unusual wear continues after the Adjust the front and rear tires to
rotation, check the wheel the recommended inflation
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label after
the tires have been rotated.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-57
See Tire Pressure on

page 10-50 and Vehicle Load Warning (Continued)
Limits on page 9-10. towel can be used; however, use
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor a scraper or wire brush later to
System. See Tire Pressure remove all rust or dirt.
Monitor Operation on
page 10-52. Lightly coat the center of the
Check that all wheel nuts are wheel hub with wheel bearing
properly tightened. See “Wheel grease after a wheel change or
Nut Torque” under Capacities tire rotation to prevent corrosion
and Specifications on or rust build-up. Do not get
page 12-2. grease on the flat wheel Treadwear indicators are one way to
mounting surface or on the tell when it is time for new tires.
Treadwear indicators appear when
{ Warning wheel nuts or bolts.
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the When It Is Time for New Inspection on page 10-56 and Tire
parts to which it is fastened, can Tires Rotation on page 10-56.
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come Factors such as maintenance, The rubber in tires ages over time.
off and cause an accident. When temperatures, driving speeds, This also applies to the spare tire,
changing a wheel, remove any vehicle loading, and road conditions if the vehicle has one, even if it is
affect the wear rate of the tires. never used. Multiple factors
rust or dirt from places where the
including temperatures, loading
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
conditions, and inflation pressure
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
maintenance affect how fast aging
(Continued) takes place. GM recommends that
tires, including the spare if
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-58 Vehicle Care
equipped, be replaced after six at least a month, remove the tires or number is molded onto the tire's
years, regardless of tread wear. The raise the vehicle to reduce the sidewall near the tire size. If the
tire manufacturer date is the last weight from the tires. tires have an all-season tread
four digits of the DOT Tire design, the TPC Spec number
Identification Number (TIN) which is Buying New Tires will be followed by MS for mud
molded into one side of the tire
sidewall. The first two digits GM has developed and matched and snow. See Tire Sidewall
represent the week (01–52) and the specific tires for the vehicle. The Labeling on page 10-44.
last two digits, the year. For original equipment tires installed GM recommends replacing worn
example, the third week of the year were designed to meet General tires in complete sets of four.
2010 would have a four-digit DOT Motors Tire Performance Criteria Uniform tread depth on all tires
date of 0310. Specification (TPC Spec) will help to maintain the
Vehicle Storage system rating. When performance of the vehicle.
replacement tires are needed, Braking and handling
Tires age when stored normally GM strongly recommends
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park performance may be adversely
a vehicle that will be stored for at
buying tires with the same TPC affected if all the tires are not
least a month in a cool, dry, clean Spec rating. replaced at the same time.
area away from direct sunlight to GM's exclusive TPC Spec If proper rotation and
slow aging. This area should be free system considers over a dozen maintenance have been done,
of grease, gasoline, or other critical specifications that impact all four tires should wear out at
substances that can deteriorate the overall performance of the about the same time. See Tire
rubber. Rotation on page 10-56.
vehicle, including brake system
Parking for an extended period can performance, ride and handling, However, if it is necessary to
cause flat spots on the tires that traction control, and tire replace only one axle set of
may result in vibrations while pressure monitoring worn tires, place the new tires
driving. When storing a vehicle for on the rear axle.
performance. GM's TPC Spec
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-59
Winter tires with the same speed sure they are the same size,
rating as the original equipment { Warning load range, speed rating, and
tires may not be available for H, Mixing tires of different sizes, construction (radial) as the
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated brands, or types may cause original tires.
tires. Never exceed the winter loss of control of the vehicle, Vehicles that have a tire
tires’ maximum speed capability resulting in a crash or other pressure monitoring system
when using winter tires with a vehicle damage. Use the could give an inaccurate
lower speed rating. correct size, brand, and type low-pressure warning if non-TPC
of tires on all wheels. Spec rated tires are installed.
{ Warning See Tire Pressure Monitor
Tires could explode during System on page 10-51.
improper service. Attempting { Warning The Tire and Loading
to mount or dismount a tire Information label indicates the
could cause injury or death. Using bias-ply tires on the original equipment tires on the
Only your dealer or authorized vehicle may cause the wheel vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
tire service center should rim flanges to develop cracks on page 9-10.
mount or dismount the tires. after many miles of driving.
A tire and/or wheel could fail Different Size Tires and
suddenly and cause a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
Wheels
the wheels on the vehicle. If wheels or tires are installed that
are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
If the vehicle tires must be performance, including its braking,
replaced with a tire that does not ride and handling characteristics,
have a TPC Spec number, make stability, and resistance to rollover
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-60 Vehicle Care
may be affected. If the vehicle has Uniform Tire Quality nominal rim diameters of
electronic systems such as antilock 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
Grading
or to some limited-production
control, electronic stability control, Quality grades can be found tires.
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance where applicable on the tire
of these systems can also be sidewall between tread shoulder While the tires available on
affected. and maximum section width. For General Motors passenger cars
example: and light trucks may vary with
{ Warning respect to these grades, they
Treadwear 200 Traction AA must also conform to federal
If different sized wheels are used, Temperature A safety requirements and
there may not be an acceptable additional General Motors Tire
level of performance and safety if The following information relates
to the system developed by the Performance Criteria (TPC)
tires not recommended for those standards.
wheels are selected. This United States National Highway
increases the chance of a crash Traffic Safety Administration All Passenger Car Tires Must
and serious injury. Only use GM (NHTSA), which grades tires by Conform to Federal Safety
specific wheel and tire systems treadwear, traction, and Requirements In Addition To
developed for the vehicle, and temperature performance. This These Grades.
have them properly installed by a applies only to vehicles sold in
GM certified technician. the United States. The grades Treadwear
are molded on the sidewalls of The treadwear grade is a
See Buying New Tires on most passenger car tires. The comparative rating based on the
page 10-58 and Accessories and Uniform Tire Quality Grading wear rate of the tire when tested
Modifications on page 10-3. (UTQG) system does not apply under controlled conditions on a
to deep tread, winter tires, specified government test
compact spare tires, tires with course. For example, a tire
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-61
graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction performance on the laboratory
one-half (1½) times as well on tests, and does not include test wheel than the minimum
the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering, required by law. Warning: The
graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature grade for this tire is
performance of tires depends characteristics. established for a tire that is
upon the actual conditions of properly inflated and not
Temperature
their use, however, and may overloaded. Excessive speed,
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A underinflation, or excessive
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat
differences in road to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure.
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled Wheel Alignment and Tire
Traction conditions on a specified indoor Balance
The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to
and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
provide the longest tire life and best
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and overall performance. Adjustments to
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead wheel alignment and tire balancing
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade are not necessary on a regular
specified government test C corresponds to a level of basis. Consider an alignment check
surfaces of asphalt and performance which all if there is unusual tire wear or the
concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet vehicle is significantly pulling to one
have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety side or the other. Some slight pull to
Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and the left or right, depending on the
assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of crown of the road and/or other road
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-62 Vehicle Care
surface variations such as troughs Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel

or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor Caution (Continued)
vibrating when driving on a smooth System (TPMS) sensors with new
road, the tires and wheels may need GM original equipment parts. ground clearance, and tire or tire
to be rebalanced. See your dealer chain clearance to the body and
chassis.
for proper diagnosis. { Warning
Wheel Replacement Using the wrong replacement Used Replacement Wheels
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or nuts can be dangerous. It could
affect the braking and handling of
{ Warning
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and the vehicle. Tires can lose air, Replacing a wheel with a used
wheel nuts should be replaced. and cause loss of control, causing one is dangerous. How it has
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. a crash. Always use the correct been used or how far it has been
Some aluminum wheels can be wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel driven may be unknown. It could
repaired. See your dealer if any of nuts for replacement. fail suddenly and cause a crash.
these conditions exist. When replacing wheels, use a
Your dealer will know the kind of new GM original equipment
wheel.
wheel that is needed. { Caution
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity, The wrong wheel can also cause
diameter, width, offset, and be problems with bearing life, brake
mounted the same way as the one it cooling, speedometer or
replaces. odometer calibration, headlamp
aim, bumper height, vehicle
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-63
Tire Chains If a Tire Goes Flat

{ Warning
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
{ Warning while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause
are maintained properly. See Tires permanent damage to the tire.
Do not use tire chains. There is on page 10-42. If air goes out of a Re-inflating a tire after it has been
not enough clearance. Tire chains tire, it is much more likely to leak driven on while severely
used on a vehicle without the out slowly. But if there ever is a underinflated or flat may cause a
proper amount of clearance can blowout, here are a few tips about blowout and a serious crash.
cause damage to the brakes, what to expect and what to do: Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
suspension, or other vehicle that has been driven on while
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
parts. The area damaged by the severely underinflated or flat.
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
tire chains could cause loss of toward that side. Take your foot off Have your dealer or an authorized
control and a crash. the accelerator pedal and grip the tire service center repair or
Use another type of traction steering wheel firmly. Steer to replace the flat tire as soon as
device only if its manufacturer maintain lane position, and then possible.
recommends it for the vehicle's gently brake to a stop, well off the
tire size combination and road road, if possible.
conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
{ Warning
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow may require the same correction as Lifting a vehicle and getting under
and readjust or remove the used in a skid. Stop pressing the it to do maintenance or repairs is
traction device if it contacts the accelerator pedal and steer to dangerous without the
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. straighten the vehicle. It may be appropriate safety equipment and
If traction devices are used, install very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake training. If a jack is provided with
them on the front tires. to a stop, well off the road,
the vehicle, it is designed only for
if possible.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-64 Vehicle Care
When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),

Warning (Continued) { Warning use the following example as a
guide to assist in the placement of
changing a flat tire. If it is used for Changing a tire can be the wheel blocks (1).
anything else, you or others could dangerous. The vehicle can slip
be badly injured or killed if the off the jack and roll over or fall
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack causing injury or death. Find a
is provided with the vehicle, only level place to change the tire. To
use it for changing a flat tire. help prevent the vehicle from
moving:
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
and wheel damage by driving slowly 2. Put an automatic
to a level place, well off the road, transmission in P (Park) or a
if possible. Turn on the hazard manual transmission in
warning flashers. See Hazard 1. Wheel Block
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
Warning Flashers on page 6-3. 2. Flat Tire
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle The following information explains
is raised. how to repair or change a tire.
4. Do not allow passengers to

remain in the vehicle.
5. Place wheel blocks on both
sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
being changed.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-65
Tire Changing 2. Remove the spare tire cover. tools from under it. Then remove
the spare tire on an angle to
Removing the Spare Tire and clear the mounting stud and
Tools battery.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10-63.
2. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen and
remove the wheel nut caps.
Do not try to remove plastic caps
3. Turn the retainer nut from the cover or center cap.
counterclockwise and remove
the spare tire. Place the spare 3. Pull the cover or center cap
1. Screwdriver tire next to the tire being away from the wheel. Store the
2. Tow Hook (If Equipped) changed. wheel cover in the cargo area
until you have the flat tire
3. Jack 4. The jack and tools are stored repaired or replaced.
below the spare tire. Remove
4. Wrench (In Bag) them from their container and
5. Trim Removal (If Equipped) place them near the tire being
changed.
6. Fastener (If Equipped)
To make removal easier for
To access the spare tire and tools:
eAssist models, tilt the spare tire
1. Open the trunk. up and remove the jack and
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-66 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued) { Warning

you could be badly injured or Lifting a vehicle and getting under
killed. Never get under a vehicle it to do maintenance or repairs is
when it is supported only by dangerous without the
a jack. appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
{ Warning anything else, you or others could
Raising the vehicle with the jack be badly injured or killed if the
improperly positioned can vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
4. Turn the wheel wrench
damage the vehicle and even is provided with the vehicle, only
counterclockwise to loosen all
the wheel nuts, but do not make the vehicle fall. To help use it for changing a flat tire.
remove them yet. avoid personal injury and vehicle
5. Place the jack near the flat tire. damage, be sure to fit the jack lift 7. Attach the jack lift assist tool to
head into the proper location the jack by fitting both ends of
6. Put the compact spare tire before raising the vehicle. the jack and tool over one
near you. another.
8. Place the jack under the vehicle.
{ Warning
Getting under a vehicle when it is
lifted on a jack is dangerous.
If the vehicle slips off the jack,
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-67
{ Caution
Make sure that the jack lift head
is in the correct position or you
may damage your vehicle. The
repairs would not be covered by
your warranty.
10. Raise the vehicle by turning the 11. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
jack handle clockwise. Raise 12. Remove the flat tire.
the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough
room for the road tire to clear { Warning
the ground.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
9. Position the jack lift head at the off and cause an accident. When
jack location nearest the flat tire. changing a wheel, remove any
The location is indicated by a rust or dirt from places where the
notch on the bottom edge of the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
body side. The jack must not be (Continued)
used in any other position.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-68 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued) { Warning Warning (Continued)

an emergency, a cloth or a paper Never use oil or grease on bolts aftermarket manufacturer when
towel can be used; however, use or nuts because the nuts might using accessory locking wheel
a scraper or wire brush later to come loose. The vehicle's wheel nuts. See Capacities and
remove all rust or dirt. could fall off, causing a crash. Specifications on page 12-2 for
original equipment wheel nut
15. Reinstall the wheel nuts. torque specifications.
Tighten each nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub. { Caution
16. Lower the vehicle by turning
the jack handle Improperly tightened wheel nuts
counterclockwise. can lead to brake pulsation and
rotor damage. To avoid expensive
{ Warning brake repairs, evenly tighten the
wheel nuts in the proper
Wheel nuts that are improperly or sequence and to the proper
incorrectly tightened can cause torque specification. See
the wheels to become loose or Capacities and Specifications for
13. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel nut torque specification.
come off. The wheel nuts should
the wheel bolts, mounting
be tightened with a torque wrench
surfaces, and spare wheel.
to the proper torque specification
14. Place the compact spare tire after replacing. Follow the torque
on the wheel-mounting surface. specification supplied by the
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-69
{ Caution
Wheel covers will not fit on the
vehicle's compact spare. If you try
to put a wheel cover on the
compact spare, the cover or the
spare could be damaged.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

and Tools
1. Turn the wrench
17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
a crisscross sequence, as
{ Warning counterclockwise to remove the
shown. Storing a jack, a tire, or other fastener.
18. Lower the jack all the way and equipment in the passenger 2. Replace the fastener with the
remove the jack from under the compartment of the vehicle could one provided in the foam.
vehicle. cause injury. In a sudden stop or 3. Turn the wrench clockwise to
collision, loose equipment could tighten the fastener.
19. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly strike someone. Store all these in
with the wheel wrench. 4. Replace the foam, jack and
the proper place.
When reinstalling the wheel cover or tools, and the tire.
center cap on the full-size tire, 5. Turn the retainer nut clockwise
tighten all five plastic caps hand to secure the tire.
snug with the aid of the wheel
wrench and tighten them with the 6. Place the floor cover on the
wheel wrench an additional wheel.
one-quarter of a turn.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-70 Vehicle Care
To store the compact spare tire, use Stop as soon as possible and check
the shorter mounting bolt. that the spare tire is correctly { Caution
The compact spare is for temporary inflated after being installed on the
vehicle. The compact spare tire is When the compact spare is
use only. Replace the compact installed, do not take the vehicle
spare tire with a full-size tire as designed for temporary use only.
The vehicle will perform differently through an automatic car wash
soon as you can. with guide rails. The compact
with the spare tire installed and it is
recommended that the vehicle spare can get caught on the rails
Compact Spare Tire speed be limited to 80 km/h which can damage the tire, wheel,
(50 mph). To conserve the tread of and other parts of the vehicle.
{ Warning the spare tire, have the standard tire
repaired or replaced as soon as Do not use the compact spare on
Driving with more than one convenient and return the spare tire
compact spare tire at a time could other vehicles.
to the storage area.
result in loss of braking and Do not mix the compact spare tire or
When using a compact spare tire, wheel with other wheels or tires.
handling. This could lead to a
the ABS and Traction Control They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
crash and you or others could be
systems may engage until the spare and its wheel together.
injured. Use only one compact tire is recognized by the vehicle,
spare tire at a time. especially on slippery roads. Adjust
driving to reduce possible { Caution
If this vehicle has a compact spare wheel slip.
Tire chains will not fit the compact
tire, it was fully inflated when new; spare. Using them can damage
however, it can lose air over time.
the vehicle and the chains. Do not
Check the inflation pressure
use tire chains on the compact
regularly. It should be 420 kPa
(60 psi). spare.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-71
Jump Starting 3. Press p then scroll w or x

until Jump Start displays.
Jump Starting (On-board 4. Press V to activate the jump
with eAssist Only) start.
If the vehicle fails to crank, it may 5. The system will then ask for
be jump started by using the eAssist confirmation. If Yes is selected,
battery to charge the 12-volt battery. the jump start will begin and the
Use the following procedure to display will show WAIT TO
activate the on-board jump start START.
using the DIC controls. 6. When the jump start is complete,
the display will show ATTEMPT
DIC Buttons
START or JUMP START
The vehicle may be equipped with DISABLED.
an ignition key or an electronic
keyless ignition with pushbutton Keyless Access
start. With the brake pedal not applied,
press and hold the ENGINE START/
Key Access
STOP button for more than
Place the ignition key in the ON/ five seconds. This will place the
RUN position and proceed as vehicle in the Service Only Mode.
follows: Proceed as follows:
1. Press o then scroll w or x 1. Press o then scroll w or x
until the Settings menu displays. until the Settings menu displays.
2. Press V to enter the 2. Press V to enter the
Settings menu. Settings menu.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-72 Vehicle Care
3. Press p then scroll w or x battery charge level, power

capability, or an issue with the Warning (Continued)
until Jump Start displays.
eAssist system. In these cases, the
4. Press V to activate the jump display will not be available because
. They contain gas that can
of the power issue, or the DIC will explode or ignite.
start.
display JUMP START DISABLED . They contain enough
5. The system will then ask for
SEE OWNERS MANUAL. electricity to burn you.
confirmation. If Yes is selected,
the jump start will begin and the If you do not follow these steps
display will show WAIT TO Jump Starting (with or exactly, some or all of these
START. without eAssist) things can hurt you.
6. When the jump start is complete, For more information about the
the display will show ATTEMPT vehicle battery, see Battery on
START or JUMP START
DISABLED.
page 10-27. { Caution
If the battery has run down, try to
If the vehicle is started, the use another vehicle and some Ignoring these steps could result
on-board jump start function will be jumper cables to start your vehicle. in costly damage to the vehicle
automatically disabled. If the vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to that would not be covered by the
cranks but does not start, the do it safely. vehicle warranty. Trying to start
procedure may be repeated again. the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
If the vehicle start is still
unsuccessful, the jump start can be
{ Warning will not work, and it could damage
the vehicle.
attempted using the following jump Batteries can hurt you. They can
starting procedure under “Jump be dangerous because:
Starting (with or without eAssist).” The vehicle has a battery cover
On-board jump starting may be
. They contain acid that can which must be removed to gain
unavailable due to the 12-volt burn you. access to the battery for jump
battery charge level, the eAssist (Continued) starting.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-73
The jump start positive (+) terminal 1. Check the other vehicle. It must
is under a trim cover. It is in under have a 12-volt battery with a
the battery cover on the driver side negative ground system.
of the vehicle. You should always
use this remote positive (+) terminal. { Caution
The jump start negative (-) ground
post is on the driver side shock If the other vehicle does not have
tower. a 12-volt system with a negative
ground, both vehicles can be
These locations are used instead of damaged. Only use a vehicle that
a direct connection to the battery. has a 12-volt system with a
negative ground for jump starting.
1. Clips
2. Pivot Points 2. Position the two vehicles so that
To remove the battery cover: they are not touching.
1. Release the two rear clips (1). 3. To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
2. Lift the battery cover up towards brake firmly on both vehicles
the front of the vehicle to release involved in the jump start
it from the pivot points (2) and procedure. Put an automatic
remove. transmission in P (Park) or a
3. Reverse Steps 1–2 to reinstall manual transmission in Neutral
the battery cover. before setting the parking brake.
1. Jump Start Positive (+) Terminal
2. Jump Start Negative (-)
Grounding Post
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-74 Vehicle Care
{ Caution { Warning { Warning

If any accessories are left on or Using a match near a battery can Fans or other moving engine
plugged in during the jump cause battery gas to explode. parts can injure you badly. Keep
starting procedure, they could be People have been hurt doing this, your hands away from moving
damaged. The repairs would not and some have been blinded. parts once the engine is running.
be covered by the vehicle Use a flashlight if you need more
warranty. Whenever possible, turn light. 5. Connect one end of the red
off or unplug all accessories on Be sure the battery has enough positive (+) cable to the jump
either vehicle when jump starting. water. You do not need to add start positive (+) terminal (1).
water to the battery installed in Use a remote positive (+)
4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF your new vehicle. But if a battery terminal if the vehicle has one.
and switch off all lights and has filler caps, be sure the right 6. Do not let the other end of the
accessories in both vehicles, amount of fluid is there. If it is low, red positive (+) cable touch
except the hazard warning add water to take care of that metal. Connect it to the
flashers if needed. first. If you do not, explosive gas positive (+) terminal of the good
could be present. battery. Use a remote
{ Warning Battery fluid contains acid that
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
An electric fan can start up even can burn you. Do not get it on
when the engine is not running you. If you accidentally get it in
and can injure you. Keep hands, your eyes or on your skin, flush
clothing and tools away from any the place with water and get
underhood electric fan. medical help immediately.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-75
7. Connect one end of the black Towing the Vehicle

negative (–) cable to the { Caution
negative (–) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote If the jumper cables are { Caution
negative (−) terminal if the connected or removed in the
vehicle has one. wrong order, electrical shorting Incorrectly towing a disabled
may occur and damage the vehicle may cause damage. The
Do not let the other end touch vehicle. The repairs would not be damage would not be covered by
anything until the next step. The covered by the vehicle warranty. the vehicle warranty. Do not lash
other end of the negative (–) or hook to the chassis
Always connect and remove the
cable does not go to the dead components — including the front
jumper cables in the correct order,
battery. It goes to a remote
making sure that the cables do and rear subframes, suspension
negative (–) post on the driver
not touch each other or other control arms, and links — during
side shock tower.
metal. towing and recovery of a disabled
8. Connect the other end of the vehicle, or when securing the
black negative (–) cable to the vehicle to a flatbed car carrier.
jump start negative (-) grounding Jumper Cable Removal
Use the proper nylon strap
post (2). Reverse the sequence exactly when harnesses around the tires to
9. Start the engine in the vehicle removing the jumper cables. secure them to the flatbed car
with the good battery and run carrier.
the engine at idle speed for at
least four minutes.
Have the vehicle towed on a wheel
10. Try to start the vehicle that had lift tow truck. A flatbed car carrier
the dead battery. If it will not could damage the vehicle. The
start after a few tries, it wheel lift tow truck must raise the
probably needs service. rear of the vehicle and wheel dollies
must be used to lift the front wheels
off the ground.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-76 Vehicle Care
Consult your dealer or a Here are some important things to Dinghy Towing
professional towing service if the consider before recreational vehicle
disabled vehicle must be towed. towing:
To tow the vehicle behind another . What is the towing capacity of
vehicle for recreational purposes, the towing vehicle? Be sure to
such as behind a motor home, see read the tow vehicle
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” manufacturer's
following. recommendations.
. How far will the vehicle be
Recreational Vehicle towed? Some vehicles have
Towing restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another . Does the vehicle have the
vehicle – such as behind a motor proper towing equipment? See
home. The two most common types your dealer or trailering { Caution
of recreational vehicle towing are professional for additional advice
known as dinghy towing and dolly and equipment If the vehicle is towed with all four
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the recommendations. wheels on the ground, the
vehicle with all four wheels on the drivetrain components could be
. Is the vehicle ready to be
ground. Dolly towing is towing the towed? Just as preparing the damaged. The repairs would not
vehicle with two wheels on the vehicle for a long trip, make sure be covered by the vehicle
ground and two wheels up on a the vehicle is prepared to be warranty. Do not tow the vehicle
device known as a dolly. towed. with all four wheels on the
ground.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-77
The vehicle was not designed to be 3. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. Appearance Care
towed with all four wheels on the
ground. If the vehicle must be
towed, a dolly should be used. See Exterior Care
“Dolly Towing” following. Locks
Dolly Towing Locks are lubricated at the factory.
Use a de-icing agent only when
absolutely necessary, and have the
locks greased after using. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-12.
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
{ Caution wash it often and out of direct
sunlight.
Towing the vehicle from the rear
could damage it. Also, repairs { Caution
would not be covered by the
Tow the vehicle with the two rear vehicle warranty. Never have the Do not use petroleum-based,
wheels on the ground and the front vehicle towed from the rear. acidic, or abrasive cleaning
wheels on a dolly. agents as they can damage the
vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic
To tow the vehicle with two wheels
parts. If damage occurs, it would
on the ground and a dolly:
not be covered by the vehicle
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. warranty. Approved cleaning
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park). (Continued)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-78 Vehicle Care
washed. This could cause damage repaired. Foreign materials such as

Caution (Continued) that would not be covered by the calcium chloride and other salts, ice
vehicle warranty. melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
products can be obtained from sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
your dealer. Follow all If using an automatic car wash,
comply with the car wash industrial chimneys, etc., can
manufacturer directions regarding damage the vehicle's finish if they
correct product usage, necessary instructions. The windshield wiper
and rear window wiper, if equipped, remain on painted surfaces. Wash
safety precautions, and the vehicle as soon as possible.
appropriate disposal of any must be off. Remove any
accessories that may be damaged If necessary, use non-abrasive
vehicle care product. cleaners that are marked safe for
or interfere with the car wash
equipment. painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
{ Caution washing and after, to remove all Occasional hand waxing or mild
polishing should be done to remove
cleaning agents completely. If they
Avoid using high-pressure are allowed to dry on the surface, residue from the paint finish. See
washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) they could stain. your dealer for approved cleaning
to the surface of the vehicle. Use products.
of power washers exceeding Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to Do not apply waxes or polishes to
8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,
avoid surface scratches and water
in damage or removal of paint decals, simulated wood, or flat paint
spotting.
and decals. as damage can occur.
Finish Care
This symbol e is on any Application of aftermarket clearcoat
underhood compartment electrical sealant/wax materials is not
center that should not be power recommended. If painted surfaces
are damaged, see your dealer to
have the damage assessed and
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-79
The bright metal moldings on the Cleaning Exterior Lamps/

{ Caution vehicle are aluminum. To prevent Lenses and Emblems
damage always follow these
Machine compounding or cleaning instructions: Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
aggressive polishing on a soft cloth, and a car washing soap
. Be sure the molding is cool to
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish to clean exterior lamps, lenses and
may damage it. Use only the touch before applying any emblems. Follow instructions under
non-abrasive waxes and polishes cleaning solution. "Washing the Vehicle" previously in
that are made for a basecoat/ . Use a cleaning solution this section.
clearcoat paint finish on the approved for aluminum. Some Lamp covers are made of plastic,
vehicle. cleaners are highly acidic or and some have a UV protective
contain alkaline substances and coating.
can damage the moldings.
To keep the paint finish looking new, Use only lukewarm water, a soft
keep the vehicle garaged or . Always dilute a concentrated cloth, and mild car washing soap to
covered whenever possible. cleaner according to the clean exterior lamps and lenses. Do
manufacturer’s instructions. not clean or wipe them while they
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
. Do not use chrome cleaners. are dry.
Moldings
. Do not use cleaners that are not Do not use any of the following on
{ Caution intended for automotive use. lamp covers:
. Use a nonabrasive wax on the
. Abrasive or caustic agents.
Failure to clean and protect the
vehicle after washing to protect . Washer fluids and other cleaning
bright metal moldings can result and extend the molding finish.
in a hazy white finish or pitting. agents in higher concentrations
than suggested by the
This damage would not be
manufacturer.
covered by the vehicle warranty.
. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,
or other harsh cleaners.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-80 Vehicle Care

. Ice scrapers or other hard items. Shutter System blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
. Aftermarket appearance caps or a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
covers while the lamps are treatments may cause wiper
illuminated, due to excessive streaking.
heat generated. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged. Damage can be
{ Caution caused by extreme dusty
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
Failure to clean lamps properly snow and ice.
can cause damage to the lamp
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
cover that would not be covered
blades before using them. If frozen
by the vehicle warranty. to the windshield, carefully loosen
them or thaw them. Damaged wiper
Air Intakes blades should be replaced. See
The vehicle may have a shutter Wiper Blade Replacement on
Clear debris from the air intakes, system designed to help increase page 10-29 for more information.
between the hood and windshield, fuel economy. Keep the shutter
when washing the vehicle. system clean for proper operation. Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wipers. If the wiper motor overheats,
Windshield and Wiper Blades the windshield wipers will stop until
the motor cools and the wiper
Clean the outside of the windshield
control is turned off. See Electrical
with glass cleaner.
System Overload on page 10-35 for
Clean rubber blades using lint-free more information.
cloth or paper towel soaked with
windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-81
Weatherstrips Wheels and Trim — Aluminum

Apply Dielectric silicone grease on or Chrome { Caution
weatherstrips to make them last Use a soft, clean cloth with mild To avoid surface damage, do not
longer, seal better, and not stick or soap and water to clean the wheels. use strong soaps, chemicals,
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at After rinsing thoroughly with clean abrasive polishes, cleaners,
least once a year. Hot. dry climates water, dry with a soft, clean towel. brushes, or cleaners that contain
may require more frequent A wax may then be applied. acid on aluminum or
application. Black marks from chrome-plated wheels. Use only
rubber material on painted surfaces
can be removed by rubbing with a
{ Caution approved cleaners. Also, never
drive a vehicle with aluminum or
clean cloth. See Recommended Chrome wheels and other chrome chrome-plated wheels through an
Fluids and Lubricants on trim may be damaged if the automatic car wash that uses
page 11-12. vehicle is not washed after driving silicone carbide tire cleaning
Tires on roads that have been sprayed brushes. Damage could occur
with magnesium, calcium, and the repairs would not be
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to or sodium chloride. These
clean the tires. covered by the vehicle warranty.
chlorides are used on roads for
conditions such as ice and dust.
{ Caution Always wash the chrome with Steering, Suspension, and
soap and water after exposure. Chassis Components
Using petroleum-based tire
dressing products on the vehicle Visually inspect front and rear
may damage the paint finish and/ suspension and steering system for
damaged, loose, or missing parts or
or tires. When applying a tire
signs of wear. Inspect the hydraulic
dressing, always wipe off any
power steering for proper hook-up,
overspray from all painted binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
surfaces on the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-82 Vehicle Care
Visually check constant velocity material to parts repaired or Interior Care

joints, rubber boots, and axle seals replaced to restore corrosion
for leaks. protection. To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Body Component Lubrication Original manufacturer replacement Immediately remove any soils. Note
parts will provide the corrosion that newspapers or dark garments
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, protection while maintaining the
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and that can transfer color to home
vehicle warranty. furnishings can also permanently
steel fuel door hinge unless the
components are plastic. Applying Finish Damage transfer color to the vehicle's
silicone grease on weatherstrips interior.
Quickly repair minor chips and
with a clean cloth will make them scratches with touch-up materials Use a soft bristle brush to remove
last longer, seal better, and not stick available from your dealer to avoid dust from knobs and crevices on the
or squeak. corrosion. Larger areas of finish instrument cluster. Using a mild
damage can be corrected in your soap solution, immediately remove
Underbody Maintenance hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
dealer's body and paint shop.
At least twice a year, spring and fall, repellent from all interior surfaces or
use plain water to flush dirt and Chemical Paint Spotting permanent damage may result.
debris from the vehicle's Airborne pollutants can fall upon Your dealer may have products for
underbody. Your dealer or an and attack painted vehicle surfaces cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
underbody car washing system can causing blotchy, ring-shaped specifically designed for the
do this. If not removed, rust and discolorations, and small, irregular surfaces being cleaned to prevent
corrosion can develop. dark spots etched into the paint permanent damage. Apply all
Sheet Metal Damage surface. See “Finish Care” cleaners directly to the cleaning
previously in this section. cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
If the vehicle is damaged and on any switches or controls.
requires sheet metal repair or Cleaners should be removed
replacement, make sure the body quickly. Never allow cleaners to
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-83
remain on the surface being 3.8 L (1 gal) of water. Cleaning the windshield with water
cleaned for extended periods A concentrated soap solution will during the first three to six months
of time. leave a residue that creates of ownership will reduce tendency
Cleaners may contain solvents that streaks and attracts dirt. Do not to fog.
can become concentrated in the use solutions that contain strong
or caustic soap. Speaker Covers
interior. Before using cleaners, read
and adhere to all safety instructions . Do not heavily saturate the Vacuum around a speaker cover
on the label. While cleaning the upholstery when cleaning. gently, so that the speaker will not
interior, maintain adequate be damaged. Clean spots with just
. Do not use solvents or cleaners water and mild soap.
ventilation by opening the doors and containing solvents.
windows. Coated Moldings
To prevent damage, do not clean Interior Glass
Coated moldings should be cleaned.
the interior using the following To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
cleaners or techniques: dampened with water. Wipe droplets
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a
left behind with a clean dry cloth. sponge or soft lint-free cloth
. Never use a razor or any other dampened with water.
sharp object to remove a soil Commercial glass cleaners may be
from any interior surface. used, if necessary, after cleaning . When heavily soiled, use warm
the interior glass with plain water. soapy water.
. Never use a brush with stiff
bristles.
{ Caution
. Never rub any surface
aggressively or with excessive To prevent scratching, never use
pressure. abrasive cleaners on automotive
. Do not use laundry detergents or glass. Abrasive cleaners or
dishwashing soaps with aggressive cleaning may damage
degreasers. For liquid cleaners, the rear window defogger.
use approximately 20 drops per
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-84 Vehicle Care
Fabric/Carpet/Suede 3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces
soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and
Start by vacuuming the surface
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to Radio Displays
using a soft brush attachment. If a
a clean area frequently to
rotating brush attachment is being For vehicles with high gloss
prevent forcing the soil in to the
used during vacuuming, only use it surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
fabric.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the
as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
following techniques: longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could
the soil to the cleaning cloth. scratch the surface. Then use the
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners
solution followed only by plain or solvents. Periodically hand wash
. For solid soils, remove as much the microfiber cloth separately,
water.
as possible prior to vacuuming. using mild soap. Do not use bleach
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
To clean:
removed, it may be necessary to and air dry before next use.
1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
colorfast cloth with water. cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
Microfiber cloth is recommended hidden area for colorfastness before { Caution
to prevent lint transfer to the using a commercial upholstery
fabric or carpet. Do not attach a device with a
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
formation occurs, clean the entire suction cup to the display. This
2. Remove excess moisture by may cause damage and would
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
not be covered by the warranty.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Vehicle Care 10-85
Instrument Panel, Leather, Cargo Cover and

Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Caution (Continued) Convenience Net
Low Gloss Paint Surfaces and these solvents can permanently Wash with warm water and mild
Natural Open Pore Wood change the appearance and feel detergent. Do not use chlorine
Surfaces of leather or soft trim and are not bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
Use a soft microfiber cloth recommended. then dry completely.
dampened with water to remove Care of Safety Belts
dust and loose dirt. For a more Do not use cleaners that increase
thorough cleaning, use a soft Keep belts clean and dry.
gloss, especially on the instrument
microfiber cloth dampened with a panel. Reflected glare can decrease
mild soap solution. visibility through the windshield { Warning
under certain conditions.
{ Caution Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
Soaking or saturating leather, { Caution a crash, they might not be able to
especially perforated leather, as Use of air fresheners may cause provide adequate protection.
well as other interior surfaces, permanent damage to plastics Clean safety belts only with mild
may cause permanent damage. and painted surfaces. If an air soap and lukewarm water.
Wipe excess moisture from these freshener comes in contact with
surfaces after cleaning and allow any plastic or painted surface in
them to dry naturally. Never use the vehicle, blot immediately and
heat, steam, spot lifters, or spot clean with a soft cloth dampened
removers. Do not use cleaners with a mild soap solution.
that contain silicone or wax-based Damage caused by air fresheners
products. Cleaners containing would not be covered by the
(Continued) vehicle warranty.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
10-86 Vehicle Care

. Use the floor mat with the
Floor Mats correct side up. Do not turn
Reinstall by lining up the floor mat
retainer openings over the carpet
it over. retainers and snapping into position.
{ Warning . Do not place anything on top of Make sure the floor mat is properly
If a floor mat is the wrong size or the driver side floor mat. secured in place.
is not properly installed, it can . Use only a single floor mat on Verify the floor mat does not
interfere with the pedals. the driver side. interfere with the pedals.
Interference with the pedals can . Do not place one floor mat on
cause unintended acceleration top of another.
and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash Removing and Replacing the
and injury. Make sure the floor Floor Mats
mat does not interfere with the Pull up on the rear of the floor mat
pedals. to unlock each retainer and remove.
Use the following guidelines for

proper floor mat usage:
. The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the pedals. Always
check that the floor mats do not
interfere with the pedals.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information technicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
the required maintenance for the tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help blades.
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair
Maintenance Schedule
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance. It may
{ Caution
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 also help to maintain the value of Damage caused by improper
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the maintenance can lead to costly
Special Application Services responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application repairs and may not be covered
all required maintenance performed. by the vehicle warranty.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Your dealer has trained technicians Maintenance intervals, checks,
Additional Maintenance who can perform required inspections, recommended fluids,
and Care maintenance using genuine and lubricants are important to
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have keep the vehicle in good working
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 up-to-date tools and equipment for condition.
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many
Recommended Fluids, dealers have extended evening and
Lubricants, and Parts Saturday hours, courtesy The Tire Rotation and Required
Recommended Fluids and transportation, and online Services are the responsibility of the
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 scheduling to assist with service vehicle owner. It is recommended to
Maintenance Replacement needs. have your dealer perform these
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Your dealer recognizes the Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records importance of providing keep the vehicle in good working
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15 competitively priced maintenance condition, improves fuel economy,
and repair services. With trained and reduces vehicle emissions.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use

. Frequently towing a trailer.
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
Maintenance
. Used for high speed or
There may need to be more competitive driving. Schedule
frequent checks and services. The
Additional Required Services -
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery Owner Checks and Services
Normal are for vehicles that: service.
At Each Fuel Stop
. Carry passengers and cargo Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
. Check the engine oil level. See
within recommended limits on Engine Oil on page 10-11.
the Tire and Loading Information Required Services - Severe chart.
label. See Vehicle Load Limits Once a Month
on page 9-10. { Warning . Check the tire inflation
. Are driven on reasonable road Performing maintenance work can pressures. See Tire Pressure on
surfaces within legal driving page 10-50.
be dangerous and can cause
limits. serious injury. Perform . Inspect the tires for wear. See
. Use the recommended fuel. See maintenance work only if the Tire Inspection on page 10-56.
Recommended Fuel on required information, proper tools, . Check the windshield washer
page 9-56. and equipment are available. fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
Refer to the information in the If they are not, see your dealer to page 10-24.
Maintenance Schedule Additional have a trained technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own Engine Oil Change
Required Services - Normal chart.
Service Work on page 10-3. When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
The Additional Required Services -
SOON message displays, have the
Severe are for vehicles that are:
engine oil and filter changed within
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven
in hot weather. under the best conditions, the
. Mainly driven in hilly or engine oil life system might not
mountainous terrain. indicate the need for vehicle service
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
for more than a year. The engine oil

. Check engine coolant level. See . Visually inspect steering,
and filter must be changed at least Engine Coolant on page 10-19. suspension, and chassis
once a year and the oil life system . Check windshield washer fluid components for damaged, loose,
must be reset. Your trained dealer level. See Washer Fluid on or missing parts or signs of
technician can perform this work. page 10-24. wear. See Exterior Care on
If the engine oil life system is reset page 10-77.
accidentally, service the vehicle
. Visually inspect windshield wiper
blades for wear, cracking,
. Check restraint system
within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the components. See Safety System
last service. Reset the oil life or contamination. See Exterior
Care on page 10-77. Replace Check on page 3-19.
system when the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on worn or damaged wiper blades. . Visually inspect fuel system for
page 10-14. See Wiper Blade Replacement damage or leaks.
on page 10-29. . Visually inspect exhaust system
Tire Rotation and Required . Check tire inflation pressures. and nearby heat shields for
Services Every 12 000 km/ See Tire Pressure on loose or damaged parts.
7,500 mi page 10-50. . Lubricate body components. See
Rotate the tires, if recommended for . Inspect tire wear. See Tire Exterior Care on page 10-77.
the vehicle, and perform the Inspection on page 10-56.
following services. See Tire
. Check starter switch. See Starter
. Visually check for fluid leaks. Switch Check on page 10-28.
Rotation on page 10-56.
. Check engine oil level and oil
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. . Check automatic transmission
life percentage. If needed, See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on shift lock control function. See
change engine oil and filter, and page 10-15. Automatic Transmission Shift
reset oil life system. See Engine . Inspect brake system. Lock Control Function Check on
Oil on page 10-11 and Engine page 10-28.
Oil Life System on page 10-14.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Check ignition transmission lock.
See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 10-29.
. Check parking brake and
automatic transmission park
mechanism. See Park Brake and
P (Park) Mechanism Check on
page 10-29.
. Check accelerator pedal for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
. Visually inspect gas strut for
signs of wear, cracks, or other
damage. Check the hold open
ability of the strut. See your
dealer if service is required.
. Inspect sunroof track and seal,
if equipped. See Sunroof on
page 2-23.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @
Except eAssist: Visually inspect accessory drive
belts. (5)
@
eAssist Only: Visually inspect accessory drive
belts. (5)
@
Replace brake fluid. (6) @
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Footnotes — Maintenance (5) Or every 10 years, whichever

Schedule Additional Required comes first. Inspect for fraying,
Services - Normal excessive cracking, or damage;
(1) Or every two years, whichever replace, if needed.
comes first. More frequent (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
replacement may be needed if the comes first.
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition.
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
If driving in dusty conditions, inspect
the air filter at each engine oil
change.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 10-18.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@ @ @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @
Except eAssist: Visually inspect accessory drive
belts. (5)
@
eAssist Only: Visually inspect accessory drive
belts. (5)
@
Replace brake fluid. (6) @
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Footnotes — Maintenance (5) Or every 10 years, whichever Special Application

Schedule Additional Required comes first. Inspect for fraying,
Services - Severe excessive cracking, or damage; Services
(1) Or every two years, whichever replace, if needed. . Severe Commercial Use
comes first. More frequent (6) Or every 10 years, whichever Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
replacement may be needed if the comes first. components every 5 000 km/
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy 3,000 mi.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, . Have underbody flushing service
or areas with high dust levels.
performed. See "Underbody
Replacement may also be needed if
Maintenance" in Exterior Care
there is a reduction in air flow,
on page 10-77.
excessive window fogging, or odors.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition.
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
If driving in dusty conditions, inspect
the air filter at each engine oil
change.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 10-18.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Additional Battery Brakes

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are
Maintenance and Care the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving.
Your vehicle is an important additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include
investment and caring for it properly . To avoid break-down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing
may help to avoid future costly start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping.
repairs. To maintain vehicle battery with full cranking power. . Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
maintenance services may be . Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
required. the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts
It is recommended that your dealer connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle.
perform these services — their corrosion-free.
trained dealer technicians know Fluids
your vehicle best. Your dealer can Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
also perform a thorough . Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
assessment with a multi-point squeak or show signs of and components. See
inspection to recommend when your cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and
vehicle may need attention. Lubricants on page 11-12 for GM
. Trained dealer technicians have
The following list is intended to access to tools and equipment approved fluids.
explain the services and conditions to inspect the belts and . Engine oil and windshield
to look for that may indicate recommend adjustment or washer fluid levels should be
services are required. replacement when necessary. checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Hoses Shocks and Struts rubber; cracks or cuts in the

Hoses transport fluids and should Shocks and struts help aid in control tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
be regularly inspected to ensure for a smoother ride. split in the tire.
that there are no cracks or leaks. . Signs of wear may include
. Trained dealer technicians can
With a multi-point inspection, your steering wheel vibration, bounce/ inspect and recommend the right
dealer can inspect the hoses and sway while braking, longer tires. Your dealer can also
advise if replacement is needed. stopping distance, or uneven provide tire/wheel balancing
tire wear. services to ensure smooth
Lamps vehicle operation at all speeds.
Properly working headlamps, . As part of the multi-point Your dealer sells and services
taillamps, and brake lamps are inspection, trained dealer name brand tires.
important to see and be seen on technicians can visually inspect
the road. the shocks and struts for signs Vehicle Care
of leaking, blown seals, To help keep the vehicle looking like
. Signs that the headlamps need or damage, and can advise
attention include dimming, failure new, vehicle care products are
when service is needed. available from your dealer. For
to light, cracking, or damage.
The brake lamps need to be Tires information on how to clean and
checked periodically to ensure protect the vehicle’s interior and
Tires need to be properly inflated, exterior, see Interior Care on
that they light when braking. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining page 10-82 and Exterior Care on
. With a multi-point inspection, the tires can save money and fuel, page 10-77.
your dealer can check the lamps and can reduce the risk of tire
and note any concerns. failure.
. Signs that the tires need to be
replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
or fabric showing through the
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Wheel Alignment Wiper Blades

Wheel alignment is critical for Wiper blades need to be cleaned
ensuring that the tires deliver and kept in good condition to
optimal wear and performance. provide a clear view.
. Signs that the alignment may . Signs of wear include streaking,
need to be adjusted include skipping across the windshield,
pulling, improper vehicle and worn or split rubber.
handling, or unusual tire wear. . Trained dealer technicians can
. Your dealer has the required check the wiper blades and
equipment to ensure proper replace them when needed.
wheel alignment.
Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the
best viewing, keep the windshield
clean and clear.
. Signs of damage include
scratches, cracks, and chips.
. Trained dealer technicians can
inspect the windshield and
recommend proper replacement
if needed.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE
viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. See
Engine Oil on page 10-11.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10-19.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, in
Canada 19299819).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2 Category
Release Pawl LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 55560894 A3128C
2.5L L4 Engine 20972654 A3174C
3.6L V6 Engine 22753242 A3176C
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G
2.5L L4 Engine 12640445 PF64
3.6L V6 Engine 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
CJ2 13356914 CF184
C67 13356916 CF185
Spark Plugs
2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108
2.5L L4 Engine 12627160 41-115
3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 60 cm (23.6 in) 92231676 —
Passenger Side – 47.5 cm (18.7 in) 22846938 —
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Odometer
Reading
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Odometer
Reading
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Odometer
Reading
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12-2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, in either the glove box or
the trunk area, has the following
information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
This legal identifier is in the front
. Model designation.
corner of the instrument panel, on . Paint information.
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
. Production options and special
outside. The VIN also appears on equipment.
the Vehicle Certification and Service Do not remove this label from the
Parts labels and certificates of title vehicle.
and registration.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
2.4L L4 Engine 9.6 L 10.1 qt
2.5L L4 Engine 7.4 L 7.8 qt
3.6L V6 Engine 9.4 L 9.9 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Fuel Tank
2.4L L4 Engine 60.0 L 15.8 gal
2.5L L4 Engine 70.0 L 18.5 gal
3.6L V6 Engine 70.0 L 18.5 gal
Wheel Nut Torque 150 Y 110 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4 Engine R Automatic 0.75–0.90 mm (0.030–
0.035 in)
2.5L L4 Engine L Automatic 0.09–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
3.6L V6 Engine 3 Automatic 0.09–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.5L L4 Engine
2.4L L4 Engine
Belt removal and installation
requires special tools. See your
dealer for service.
3.6L V6 Engine
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Radio Frequency with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11 reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of your dealership or the general
manager.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800–222–1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with the new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business Bureaus,
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers to
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge or write to: the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited United States and Puerto Rico
c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Center
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and The inquiry should be accompanied www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN). 1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time Telephone Devices (TTYs))
you file your complaint to the final Roadside Assistance:
decision, should be completed in 1-800-243-8872
about 70 days. We believe our From U.S. Virgin Islands:
impartial program offers advantages 1-800-496-9994
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Canada Assistance Center. Any TTY user in I (Service History): View

the U.S. can communicate with printable dealer-recorded service
General Motors of Canada Limited
Chevrolet by dialing: records and self-recorded service
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in records.
CA1-163-005
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive D (Preferred Dealer
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Information): Select a preferred
www.gm.ca Online Owner Center dealer and view dealer location,
1-800-263-3777 (English) Online Owner Experience maps, phone numbers, and hours.
1-800-263-7854 (French) (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com J (Warranty Tracking
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Information): Track the vehicle’s
The Chevrolet online owner
Telephone devices (TTYs)) warranty information.
experience is a one-stop resource
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
that allows interaction with J (Recall Information): View
Chevrolet and keeps important active recalls or search by Vehicle
Overseas vehicle-specific information in one Identification Number (VIN). See
place. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Please contact the local General
on page 12-1.
Motors Business Unit. Membership Benefits
E (Vehicle Information): H (Other Account Information):
Customer Assistance for View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Download owner manuals and view
radio, and OnStar account
Text Telephone (TTY) vehicle-specific how-to videos.
information.
Users G (Maintenance Information): F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
View maintenance schedules,
To assist customers who are deaf, with online help representatives.
required alerts, OnStar onboard
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
vehicle diagnostic information, and
and who use Text Telephones
schedule service appointments. your vehicle.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Chevrolet Owner Centre GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has

(Canada) chevroletowner.ca a Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.ca
Reimbursement Program or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner for details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program
. Access third party enthusiast For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
sites and social media networks. This program is available to 1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone
. Locate owner resources such as qualified applicants for cost (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
lease-end, financing, and reimbursement of eligible For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
warranty information. aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800.
. required for the vehicle, such as
Retrieve your favorite articles, Service is available 24 hours a day,
hand controls or a wheelchair/
quizzes, tips, and multimedia 365 days a year.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
galleries organized into the
Features and Auto Care For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance
Sections. offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance,
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information
. Download the owner manual for
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text ready:
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
Telephone (TTY) users, call
. Find the 1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and
Chevrolet-recommended home telephone number.
maintenance services for your . Telephone number of your
vehicle. location.
. Location of the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13

. Model, year, color, and license claims are made too often, or the
. Flat Tire Change: Service to
plate number of the vehicle. same type of claim is made many change a flat tire with the spare
. Odometer reading, Vehicle times. tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
Identification Number (VIN), and must be in good condition and
Services Provided properly inflated. It is the owner's
delivery date of the vehicle.
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: responsibility for the repair or
. Description of the problem. replacement of the tire if it is not
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest covered by the warranty.
Coverage
service station. . Battery Jump Start: Service to
Services are provided up to 5 years/
. Lock-Out Service: Service to jump start a dead battery.
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
comes first. unlock the vehicle if you are Services Not Included in
locked out. A remote unlock may Roadside Assistance
In the U.S., anyone driving the be available if you have OnStar.
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a For security reasons, the driver . Impound towing caused by
person driving the vehicle without must present identification violation of any laws.
permission from the owner is not before this service is given.
covered.
. Legal fines.
. Emergency Tow from a Public . Mounting, dismounting,
Roadside Assistance is not a part of Road or Highway: Tow to the
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. or changing of snow tires,
nearest Chevrolet dealer for chains, or other traction devices.
Chevrolet and General Motors of warranty service, or if the vehicle
Canada Limited reserve the right to was in a crash and cannot be
. Towing or services for vehicles
make any changes or discontinue driven. Assistance is also given driven on a non-public road or
the Roadside Assistance program at when the vehicle is stuck in the highway.
any time without notification. sand, mud, or snow.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Services Specific to Assistance advisor may give safety related. If it is, please call
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles permission to get local your dealership, let them know this,
emergency road service. You will and ask for instructions.
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement receive payment, up to $100,
is approximately $5 Canadian. If your dealer requests you to bring
after sending the original receipt the vehicle for service, you are
Diesel fuel delivery may be to Roadside Assistance.
restricted. Propane and other urged to do so as early in the work
Mechanical failures may be day as possible to allow for
fuels are not provided through covered, however any cost for
this service. same-day repair.
parts and labor for repairs not
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle covered by the warranty are the
registration is required. owner responsibility. Courtesy Transportation
. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Program
Assistance: Must be over Scheduling Service To enhance your ownership
250 kilometers from where your Appointments experience, we and our participating
trip was started to qualify. dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
When the vehicle requires warranty Transportation, a customer support
General Motors of Canada
service, contact your dealer and program for vehicles with the
Limited requires
request an appointment. By Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
pre-authorization, original
scheduling a service appointment Coverage period in Canada),
detailed receipts, and a copy of
and advising the service consultant extended powertrain, and/or
the repair orders. Once
of your transportation needs, your hybrid-specific warranties in both
authorization has been received,
dealer can help minimize your the U.S. and Canada.
the Roadside Assistance advisor
inconvenience.
will help to make arrangements Several Courtesy Transportation
and explain how to receive If the vehicle cannot be scheduled options are available to assist in
payment. into the service department reducing inconvenience when
immediately, keep driving it until it warranty repairs are required.
. Alternative Service: If
can be scheduled for service,
assistance cannot be provided
unless, of course, the problem is
right away, the Roadside
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Courtesy Transportation is not a one-way or round-trip shuttle service Courtesy Rental Vehicle
part of the New Vehicle Limited within reasonable time and distance Your dealer may arrange to provide
Warranty. A separate booklet parameters of your dealer's area. you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
entitled “Limited Warranty and reimburse you for a rental vehicle
Owner Assistance Information” Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
furnished with each new vehicle for an overnight warranty repair.
provides detailed warranty coverage If the vehicle requires overnight Rental reimbursement will be limited
information. warranty repairs, and public and must be supported by original
transportation is used instead of receipts. This requires that you sign
Transportation Options your dealer's shuttle service, the and complete a rental agreement
Warranty service can generally be expense must be supported by and meet state/provincial, local, and
completed while you wait. However, original receipts and can only be up rental vehicle provider requirements.
if you are unable to wait, GM helps to the maximum amount allowed by Requirements vary and may include
to minimize inconvenience by GM for shuttle service. In addition, minimum age requirements,
providing several transportation for U.S. customers, should you insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
options. Depending on the arrange transportation through a You are responsible for fuel usage
circumstances, your dealer can offer friend or relative, limited charges and may also be
one of the following: reimbursement for reasonable fuel responsible for taxes, levies, usage
expenses may be available. Claim fees, excessive mileage, or rental
Shuttle Service amounts should reflect actual costs usage beyond the completion of the
Shuttle service is the preferred and be supported by original repair.
means of offering Courtesy receipts. See your dealer for
Transportation. Dealers may provide information regarding the allowance It may not be possible to provide a
shuttle service to get you to your amounts for reimbursement of fuel like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
destination with minimal interruption or other transportation costs.
of your daily schedule. This includes
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Additional Program value, and safety performance can these parts is not known. Such parts
Information be compromised in subsequent are not covered by the GM New
collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
All program options, such as shuttle related failures are not covered by
service, may not be available at Collision Parts that warranty.
every dealer. Please contact your
Genuine GM Collision parts are new Aftermarket collision parts are also
dealer for specific information about
parts made with the same materials available. These are made by
availability. All Courtesy
and construction methods as the companies other than GM and may
Transportation arrangements will be
parts with which the vehicle was not have been tested for the vehicle.
administered by appropriate dealer
originally built. Genuine GM As a result, these parts may fit
personnel.
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/
General Motors reserves the right to ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not
unilaterally modify, change, appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent
or discontinue Courtesy are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
Transportation at any time and to GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle
resolve all questions of claim New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
eligibility pursuant to the terms and failure related to such parts is not
Recycled original equipment parts
conditions described herein at its covered by that warranty.
may also be used for repair. These
sole discretion.
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in Repair Facility
Collision Damage Repair prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you
If the vehicle is involved in a parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that
collision and it is damaged, have the undamaged sections of the vehicle. meets your needs before you ever
damage repaired by a qualified A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer
technician using the proper part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center
equipment and quality replacement maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and
parts. Poorly performed collision designed appearance and safety state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
repairs diminish the vehicle resale performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
center that has GM-trained If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information:
technicians and comparable company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and
equipment. insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Insuring the Vehicle Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number.
Protect your investment in the GM Genuine Manufacturer replacement . Owner name, address, and
vehicle with comprehensive and parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
collision insurance coverage. There you may be charged at the end of
are significant differences in the the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle license plate number.
quality of coverage afforded by . Vehicle make, model, and
various insurance policy terms.
If a Crash Occurs model year.
Many insurance policies provide If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification
reduced protection to the GM emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN).
vehicle by limiting compensation for leave the scene of a crash until all
damage repairs by using matters have been taken care of. . Insurance company and policy
aftermarket collision parts. Some Move the vehicle only if its position number.
insurance companies will not puts you in danger, or you are . General description of the
specify aftermarket collision parts. instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle.
When purchasing insurance, we officer.
recommend that you ensure that the Choose a reputable repair facility
Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts.
vehicle will be repaired with GM to police and other parties involved
original equipment collision parts. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
in the crash. section.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What
insurance carrier, consider switching Roadside Assistance Program on Will You See after an Airbag
to another insurance carrier. page 13-5. Inflates? on page 3-26.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Managing the Vehicle Damage If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions
Repair Process company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle.
In the event that the vehicle requires repair valuation based on that
damage repairs, GM recommends insurance company's collision policy Owner Information
that you take an active role in its repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written
repair. If you have a pre-determined contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended
repair facility of choice, take the In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational
vehicle there, or have it towed there. of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. The
Specify to the facility that any long as the cost stays within Owner Manual includes the
required replacement collision parts reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all
be original equipment parts, either
models.
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
recycled parts will not be covered by Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty
the GM vehicle warranty. Manual.
Service Manuals
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, RETAIL SELL PRICE:
but you must live with the repair. Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
Depending on your policy limits, and repair information on the shipping fees.
your insurance company may engines, transmission, axle,
suspension, brakes, electrical, Without Portfolio: Owner
initially value the repair using Manual only.
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with steering, body, etc.
the repair professional, and insist on RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Service Bulletins
Genuine GM parts. Remember, $25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
if the vehicle is leased, you may be Service Bulletins give additional shipping fees.
obligated to have the vehicle technical service information
repaired with Genuine GM parts, needed to knowledgeably service
even if your insurance coverage General Motors cars and trucks.
does not pay the full cost.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Current and Past Models Reporting Safety To contact NHTSA, you may call
Technical Service Bulletins and the Vehicle Safety Hotline
Manuals are available for current
Defects toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
and past model GM vehicles. (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Reporting Safety Defects http://www.safercar.gov; or
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday to the United States write to:
8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time Government Administrator, NHTSA
For Credit Card Orders Only If you believe that your vehicle 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see has a defect which could cause Washington, D.C. 20590
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com. a crash or could cause injury or You can also obtain other
Or write to: death, you should immediately information about motor
Helm, Incorporated inform the National Highway vehicle safety from
Attention: Customer Service Traffic Safety Administration http://www.safercar.gov.
47911 Halyard Drive (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Plymouth, MI 48170 General Motors.
Prices are subject to change without If NHTSA receives similar
notice and without incurring complaints, it may open an
obligation. Allow ample time for investigation, and if it finds that
delivery. a safety defect exists in a group
All listed prices are quoted in U.S. of vehicles, it may order a recall
funds. Make checks payable in U.S. and remedy campaign.
funds. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data

to the Canadian to General Motors Recording and
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Privacy
If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors. The vehicle has a number of
defect, notify Transport Canada computers that record information
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
immediately, and notify General about the vehicle’s performance and
Chevrolet Motor Division how it is driven. For example, the
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Chevrolet Customer Assistance vehicle uses computer modules to
Transport Canada at
Center monitor and control engine and
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170 transmission performance, to
Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170 monitor the conditions for airbag
Road Safety Branch deployment and deploy them in a
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
80 rue Noel crash, and, if equipped, to provide
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1 antilock braking to help the driver
(French), or write:
control the vehicle. These modules
General Motors of Canada Limited may store data to help the dealer
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: technician service the vehicle.
CA1-163-005 Some modules may also store data
1908 Colonel Sam Drive about how the vehicle is operated,
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
retain personal preferences, such as
radio presets, seat positions, and
temperature settings.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a GM will not access this data or
better understanding of the share it with others except: with the
This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and consent of the vehicle owner or,
event data recorder EDR. The main injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are if the vehicle is leased, with the
purpose of an EDR is to record, in recorded by your vehicle only if a consent of the lessee; in response
certain crash or near crash-like non-trivial crash situation occurs; no to an official request by police or
situations, such as an air bag data are recorded by the EDR under similar government office; as part of
deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no GM's defense of litigation through
obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender, the discovery process; or, as
understanding how a vehicle’s age, and crash location) are required by law. Data that GM
systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties, collects or receives may also be
designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could used for GM research needs or may
vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type be made available to others for
systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data research purposes, where a need is
typically 30 seconds or less. The routinely acquired during a crash shown and the data is not tied to a
EDR in this vehicle is designed to investigation. specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR,
. How various systems in your special equipment is required, and OnStar®
vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is If the vehicle is equipped with
. Whether or not the driver and needed. In addition to the vehicle OnStar® and has an active
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as subscription, additional data may be
buckled/fastened; law enforcement, that have the collected through the OnStar
.
special equipment, can read the system. This includes information
How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
depressing the accelerator and/ about the vehicle’s operation; about
the vehicle or the EDR. collisions involving the vehicle; the
or brake pedal; and,
use of the vehicle and its features;
. How fast the vehicle was and, in certain situations, the
traveling. location and approximate GPS
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
speed of the vehicle. Refer to the door openers. RFID technology in Changes or modifications to any of
OnStar Terms and Conditions and GM vehicles does not use or record these systems by other than an
Privacy Statement on the OnStar personal information or link with any authorized service facility could void
website. other GM system containing authorization to use this equipment.
personal information.
Infotainment System
If the vehicle is equipped with a
Radio Frequency
navigation system as part of the Statement
infotainment system, use of the This vehicle has systems that
system may result in the storage of operate on a radio frequency that
destinations, addresses, telephone comply with Part 15 of the Federal
numbers, and other trip information. Communications Commission (FCC)
See the infotainment manual for rules and with Industry Canada
information on stored data and for Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
deletion instructions.
Operation is subject to the following
Radio Frequency two conditions:
Identification (RFID) 1. The device may not cause
harmful interference.
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire 2. The device must accept any
pressure monitoring and ignition interference received, including
system security, as well as in interference that may cause
connection with conveniences such undesired operation of the
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) device.
transmitters for remote door locking/
unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Press = to:

. Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview .
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Services . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation voice commands.
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Requires the available Directions
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a and Connections service plan.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor Press Q to connect to a live
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic
OnStar Additional Services.
. Verify account information or
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 update contact information.
The OnStar system status light is .
next to the OnStar buttons. If the Get driving directions. Requires
status light is: the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
. Solid Green: System is ready. . Receive On-Demand
. Flashing Green: On a call. Diagnostics for a check of the
. Red: Indicates a problem. vehicle’s key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Press Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
14-2 OnStar
Press the OnStar Emergency button OnStar Services Navigation

> to get a priority connection to an
Emergency Advisor available OnStar navigation requires the
24/7 to: Emergency Directions and Connections
With Automatic Crash Response, service plan.
. Get help for an emergency.
the built-in system can automatically Press Q to receive directions or
. Be a Good Samaritan or connect to help in most crashes,
respond to an AMBER Alert. have them sent to the vehicle
even if help cannot be requested. navigation screen, if equipped.
. Get assistance in severe Destinations can also be forwarded
Press > to connect to an
weather or other crisis and to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
evacuation routes. Emergency Advisor. GPS
technology is used to identify the The OnStar mapping database is
vehicle location and can provide continuously updated. For coverage
critical information to emergency maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)
personnel. The Advisor is also or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
trained to offer critical assistance in Turn-by-Turn Navigation
emergency situations.
1. Press Q to connect to a live
Security Advisor.
OnStar provides services like Stolen 2. Request directions.
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition 3. Directions are downloaded to the
Block, and Roadside Assistance, vehicle.
if equipped. OnStar can unlock the
vehicle doors remotely, if equipped 4. Follow the voice-guided
with automatic door locks, and can commands.
help police locate the vehicle if it is
stolen.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds After the call ends, press the “Go”
During a Planned Route with the last direction given, then button on the navigation screen to
responds with “OnStar ready,” begin driving directions.
Cancel Route then a tone. If directions are downloaded to the
1. Press =. System responds: Get My Destination navigation system, the route can
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say only be canceled through the
“Cancel route.” System 1. Press =. System responds: navigation system.
responds: “Do you want to “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
Destinations can also be
cancel directions?” 2. Say “Get my destination.” downloaded on the go. For
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: System responds with address information about eNav, Destination
“OK, request completed, thank and the distance to the Download, and coverage maps see
you, goodbye.” destination, then responds with www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Route Preview
Other Navigation Services
1. Press =. System responds: Available from OnStar Connections
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
2. Say “Route preview.” System to send destinations from calls to be made and received from
responds with the next three MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
maneuvers. Navigation or screen-based controlled through the OnStar
navigation system. When ready, the RemoteLink® mobile app. For
Repeat coverage maps, see
directions will be downloaded to the
1. Press =. System responds: vehicle. www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Destination Download: Press Q,
then request the Advisor to
download directions to the
navigation system in the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
14-4 OnStar
OnStar Mobile App Calling 911 Emergency Store a Name Tag for Speed
Download the OnStar RemoteLink Dialing
1. Press =. System responds:
mobile app to select Apple®, “OnStar Ready,” followed by 1. Press =. System responds:
Android™, and BlackBerry® devices a tone. “OnStar ready.”
to check vehicle fuel level, oil life,
or tire pressure; to start the vehicle 2. Say “Call.” System responds: 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
(if equipped) or unlock it; or to “Please say the name or number “Please say the number you
connect to an OnStar Advisor. For to call.” would like to store.”
OnStar RemoteLink information and 3. Say “911” without pausing. 3. Say the entire number without
compatibility, see www.onstar.com System responds: “911.” pausing. System responds:
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada). “Please say the name tag.”
4. Say “Call.” System responds:
Hands-Free Calling “OK, dialing 911.” 4. Pick a name tag. System
responds: “About to store <name
1. Press =. System responds: Retrieve My Number tag>. Does that sound OK?”
“OnStar ready.”
1. Press =. System responds: 5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
2. Say “Call.” System responds: “OnStar ready.” again. System responds: “OK,
“Please say the name or number storing <name tag>.”
to call.” 2. Say “My number.” System
responds: “Your OnStar Place a Call Using a Stored
3. Say the entire number without Hands-Free Calling number is,”
pausing, including a “1” and the Number
then says the number.
area code. System responds: 1. Press =. System responds:
“OK calling.” End a Call
“OnStar ready.”
Press =. System responds: “Call 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
ended.” responds: “OK, calling
<name tag>.”
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
OnStar 14-5
Verify Minutes and Expiration OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works
Press = and say “Minutes” then Information Automatic Crash Response,
“Verify” to check how many minutes Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
remain and their expiration date. Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
Diagnostics eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
perform a vehicle check every account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
month. It will check the engine, receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
transmission, antilock brakes, and ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
major vehicle systems. It also may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
checks the tire pressures, if the vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
vehicle is equipped with the Tire information. conditions:
Pressure Monitoring System. If an
Reactivation for Subsequent . Call 888-4-ONSTAR
On-Demand Diagnostics check is
Owners (888-466-7827).
needed between e-mails, press Q,
. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
and an Advisor can run a check. Press Q and follow the prompts to
. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible after acquiring the vehicle. . Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
The Advisor will update vehicle
records and will explain the OnStar . Press Q to speak with an
service offers and options available. Advisor.
OnStar services require a vehicle
electrical system, wireless service,
and GPS satellite technologies to be
available and operating for features
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
14-6 OnStar
to function properly. These systems vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a system can provide in-vehicle
may not operate if the battery is crash, or wireless phone network access to all of the OnStar services,
discharged or disconnected. congestion or jamming. except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
OnStar service cannot work unless See Radio Frequency Statement on Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
your vehicle is in a place where page 13-15. OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca
OnStar has an agreement with a (Canada)
wireless service provider for service Services for People with
in that area, and the wireless Disabilities The website provides access to
service provider has coverage, Advisors provide services to help account information, allows
network capacity, reception, and subscribers with physical disabilities management of the OnStar
technology compatible with OnStar and medical conditions. subscription, and viewing of videos
service. Service involving location of each service. Get subscription
information about the vehicle cannot Press Q for help with: plan pricing and sign up for OnStar
work unless GPS signals are .
Vehicle Diagnostics. Click on the
Locating a gas station with an “My Account” tab on the home
available, unobstructed, and attendant to pump gas.
compatible with the OnStar page. The website navigation and
hardware. OnStar service may not
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., services provided may vary by
work if the OnStar equipment is not that meets accessibility needs. country.
properly installed or it has not been . Providing directions to the OnStar Personal Identification
properly maintained. If equipment or closest hospital or pharmacy in
software is added, connected,
Number (PIN)
urgent situations.
or modified, OnStar service may not A PIN is needed to access some of
work. Other problems beyond the TTY Users the OnStar services, like Remote
control of OnStar may prevent OnStar has the ability to Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
service such as hills, tall buildings, communicate to the deaf, Assistance. You will be prompted to
tunnels, weather, electrical system hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired change the PIN the first time when
design and architecture of the customers while in the vehicle. The speaking with an Advisor. To
available dealer-installed TTY
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
OnStar 14-7
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar Roadside Assistance and a route or may ask for a call back
and provide the Advisor with the locksmith to help gain access to the after the vehicle is driven into an
current number. vehicle. open area.
Warranty Global Positioning Cellular and GPS Antennas
OnStar equipment may be System (GPS) Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the New . Obstruction of the GPS can antenna to prevent blocking cellular
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The occur in a large city with tall and GPS signal reception. Cellular
manufacturer of the vehicle buildings; in parking garages; reception is required for OnStar to
furnishes detailed warranty around airports; in tunnels, send remote signals to the vehicle.
information. underpasses, or parking
garages; or in an area with very
Unable to Connect to OnStar
Languages dense trees. If GPS signals are Message
The vehicle can be programmed to not available, the OnStar system If there is limited cellular coverage
respond in multiple languages. should still operate to call or the cellular network has reached
Press Q and ask an Advisor. OnStar. However, OnStar could maximum capacity, this message
Advisors are available in English, have difficulty identifying the may come on. Press Q to try the
Spanish and French. Available exact location. call again or try again after driving a
languages may vary by country. . In emergency situations, OnStar few miles into another cellular area.
can use the last stored GPS
Potential Issues location to send to emergency Vehicle and Power Issues
OnStar cannot perform Remote responders. OnStar services require a vehicle
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle electrical system, wireless service,
. A temporary loss of GPS can
Assistance after the vehicle has and GPS satellite technologies to be
cause loss of the ability to send
been off continuously for five days. available and operating for features
a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
After five days, OnStar can contact to function properly. These systems
The Advisor may give a verbal
may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
14-8 OnStar
Add-on Electrical Equipment OnStar - libcurl and unzip FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
acknowledgments AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
The OnStar system is integrated
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
into the electrical architecture of the Certain OnStar components include EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
vehicle. Do not add any electrical libcurl and unzip software. Below COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
equipment. See Add-On Electrical are the notices and licenses LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
Equipment on page 9-66. Added associated with this software: DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
electrical equipment may interfere
libcurl: WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
with the operation of the OnStar
CONTRACT, TORT OR
system and cause it to not operate. COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
NOTICE OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
Privacy
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
The complete OnStar Privacy Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
Statement may be found at THE SOFTWARE.
www.onstar.com (U.S.), All rights reserved.
or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Except as contained in this notice,
Permission to use, copy, modify,
Privacy-sensitive users of wireless the name of a copyright holder shall
and distribute this software for any
communications are cautioned that not be used in advertising or
purpose with or without fee is
the privacy of any information sent otherwise to promote the sale, use
hereby granted, provided that the
via wireless cellular communications or other dealings in this Software
above copyright notice and this
cannot be assured. Third parties without prior written authorization of
permission notice appear in all
may unlawfully intercept or access the copyright holder.
copies.
transmissions and private
communications without consent. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
OnStar 14-9
unzip: Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, materials provided with the

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, distribution. The sole exception
Info-ZIP copyright and license. The Rich Wales, Mike White to this condition is redistribution
definitive version of this document This software is provided “as is,” of a standard UnZipSFX binary
should be available at ftp:// without warranty of any kind, (including SFXWiz) as part of a
ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/ express or implied. In no event shall self-extracting archive; that is
license.html indefinitely. Info-ZIP or its contributors be held permitted without inclusion of
liable for any direct, indirect, this license, as long as the
Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All normal SFX banner has not
rights reserved. incidental, special or consequential
damages arising out of the use of or been removed from the binary or
For the purposes of this copyright inability to use this software. disabled.
and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as 3. Altered versions–including, but
the following set of individuals: Permission is granted to anyone to
use this software for any purpose, not limited to, ports to new
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, including commercial applications, operating systems, existing ports
Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, and to alter it and redistribute it with new graphical interfaces,
Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed freely, subject to the following and dynamic, shared, or static
Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris restrictions: library versions–must be plainly
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, marked as such and must not be
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, 1. Redistributions of source code misrepresented as being the
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, must retain the above copyright original source. Such altered
Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, notice, definition, disclaimer, and versions also must not be
Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, this list of conditions. misrepresented as being
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, 2. Redistributions in binary form Info-ZIP releases–including, but
George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai (compiled executables) must not limited to, labeling of the
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, reproduce the above copyright altered versions with the names
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, notice, definition, disclaimer, and “Info-ZIP” (or any variation
this list of conditions in thereof, including, but not limited
documentation and/or other to, different capitalizations),
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
14-10 OnStar
“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or

“MacZip” without the explicit
permission of Info-ZIP. Such
altered versions are further
prohibited from
misrepresentative use of the
Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
and “MacZip” for its own source
and binary releases.
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Armrest

What Will You See after an Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Accessories and
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Assistance Program,
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
When Should an Airbag Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Assistance Systems for
Active Emergency Braking
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-22 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Airbags Assistance Systems for
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . 9-37
Adding Equipment to the Parking and Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Add-On Electrical
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Additional Information
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Audio System
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Adjustments
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-15
Alarm Automatic
Air Filter, Passenger
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Alert Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-52 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Airbag System
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Antenna Automatic Transmission
How Does an Airbag
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Antilock Brake Shift Lock Control
Passenger Sensing
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
What Makes an Airbag
Appearance Care
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont'd) Cautions, Danger, and

High Intensity Discharge Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . 10-71, 10-72
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-34 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Voltage and Charging
Stoplamps, and Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-17
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Check
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-29
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Bluetooth
Ignition
Overview . . . . . . . . . 7-18, 7-20, 7-24
Brake C Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-29
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Child Restraints
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-20
California Infants and Young
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-57 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Perchlorate Materials Lower Anchors and
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-41
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 3-51
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Capacities and Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Cleaning
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Carbon Monoxide Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Cargo Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Headlamps, Front Turn
Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Signal, Sidemarker, and
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
INDEX i-3
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Door
Compartments Cruise Control, Active . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Connections Text Telephone (TTY) Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Control Customer Information Driver Assistance Systems . . . . 9-45
Traction and Electronic Service Publications Driver Information
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33 Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Customer Satisfaction Driving
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Characteristics and
Coolant D Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Engine Temperature Danger, Warnings, and Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-27
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Daytime Running Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Courtesy Transportation Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Diagnostics
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
i-4 INDEX
Driving (cont'd) Engine Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Check and Service Engine Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-1
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Dual Automatic Climate Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6 F
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Features
Coolant Temperature Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
E Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Filter,
E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-21 Cooling System Messages . . .5-33 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Electrical Equipment, Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Electrical System Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Engine Compartment Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 FlexFuel
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 E85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Overheated Protection Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Instrument Panel Fuse Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Fluid
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-15
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Emergency Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-27 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Energy Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Forward Collision Alert
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 (FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65 Front Seats
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .3-10
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
INDEX i-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56 Gauges Headlamps (cont'd)

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58 Engine Coolant Daytime Running
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Filling a Portable Fuel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Headlamps, Front Turn
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Signal, Sidemarker, and
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-57 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 High Intensity Discharge
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Warning Lights and (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-24 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56 General Information High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-1
Requirements, California . . . . .9-57 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-25
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61 Heated
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Engine Compartment Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Heated and Ventilated Front
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 GM Mobility Reimbursement Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Instrument Panel Fuse Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Heater
H Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
G Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3 High Voltage Devices and
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Gasoline Headlamps High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-51
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-33
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
i-6 INDEX
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 J Lamps (cont'd)

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Jack
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
How to Wear Safety Belts Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . .10-71, 10-72
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
I K Lane Departure Warning
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-34 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-15, 9-17
Keyless Entry Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Ignition Transmission Lock
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 LATCH System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Replacing Parts after a
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Indicator Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 L LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Infants and Young Children, Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-44 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Lamps LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Information Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Lighting
Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Exterior Lamps Off LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Instrument Panel Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Lights
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-20 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-17 Antilock Brake System
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
INDEX i-7
Lights (cont'd) Lower Anchors and Tethers Messages (cont'd)

Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 for Children (LATCH Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-21 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Object Detection System . . . . .5-35
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-37
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-1 M Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-22 Maintenance Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15 Maintenance Schedule Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Recommended Fluids Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Service Electric Parking and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Traction Control System Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Messages Mirrors
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Automatic Dimming
Locks Battery Voltage and Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-33 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-20
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-24
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
i-8 INDEX
Monitor System, Tire OnStar® Additional Parking

Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Brake and P (Park)
OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29
N OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-26
Navigation OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Parking or Backing
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Passenger Airbag Status
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Ordering Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11 Passenger Compartment Air
Outlets Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
O Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-27
Object Detection System Overheated Engine Perchlorate Materials
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Protection Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Personalization
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Off-Road Overview, Infotainment Phone
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-18, 7-20, 7-24
Oil Port
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14
P USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Park Power
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-34 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
OnStar®
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
INDEX i-9
Power (cont'd) Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Reporting Safety Defects

Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-24 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Recommended U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Pregnancy, Using Safety Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56 Restraints
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Recommended Fluids and Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Privacy Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Retained Accessory
Radio Frequency Records Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Program Recreational Vehicle Ride Control Systems
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Proposition 65 Warning, Reimbursement Program, Roads
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Remote Keyless Entry Roadside Assistance
R (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Radio Frequency Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Roof
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Radios Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13 Running the Vehicle While
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-33 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Replacing LATCH System
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Replacing Safety Belt
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-20
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
i-10 INDEX
S Seats (cont'd) Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-5 Shift Lock Control Function
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Check, Automatic
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Securing Child Shifting
How to Wear Safety Belts
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 3-51 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Security Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Side Blind Zone
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-20
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Signals, Turn and
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-19
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Safety Defects Reporting
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
Service Spare Tire
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Accessories and Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Specifications and
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15 StabiliTrak
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7
Maintenance, General OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Seats
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Publications Ordering Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Heated and Ventilated
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7 Starting the Vehicle
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Service Electric Parking
Brake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
INDEX i-11
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 T Tires (cont'd)

Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Terminology and
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Taillamps
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Uniform Tire Quality
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Theft-Deterrent
Storage Areas Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 2-18
Cargo Management System . . . 4-3 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-62
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 When It Is Time for New
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Tires
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Towing
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Umbrella . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-61
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-61
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-76
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-52
System Track Events and
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Active Emergency Braking . . . .9-51 Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Forward Collision Traction
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48 Control System (TCS)/
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15, 7-1 StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-51
Systems Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Driver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45 Traction Control/Electronic
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
i-12 INDEX
Trailer V W
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Vehicle Warning
Transmission
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-54
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Identification Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Transportation Program,
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Turn and Lane-Change
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Wheels
Turn Signal
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Alignment and Tire
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
U Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-22 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Umbrella Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Vehicle Care When It Is Time for New
Uniform Tire Quality Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-40
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-46 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49 Voltage Devices and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Updates
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
INDEX i-13
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Winter
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-29
Wiring, High Voltage
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
2014 - 2nd crc - 5/14/13
i-14 INDEX
2 NOTES

2014 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.

/Canada-5772216) - Black plate (1,1)

2014 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2014 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Danger, Warnings, and information relating to a specific

" : Charging System

In Brief Steering Wheel Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-21

22. Shift Lever. See Automatic Initial Drive

See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote

Remote Vehicle Start

Canceling a Remote Start Door Locks passenger doors. See Remote

(RAP) is active. See Retained Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster

Press and hold the top or bottom of

Power Seats Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seat: To adjust the lumbar support:

See Power Seat Adjustment on

To return the seatback to the upright

If equipped, the "1," "2," SET, and

Heated and Ventilated C : If available, press to ventilate Safety Belts

ON: Turns the lamp on. Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on the

2 : Turns on the headlamps

Climate Control System

1. Fan Control 5. Temperature Control

Vehicle Features Storing Radio Station Presets SiriusXM Satellite Radio

laptop computers, MP3 players, CD Steering Wheel Controls

Cruise Control SET–: Press briefly to set the Driver Information

Power Outlets Sunroof

Sunroof Switch Sunshade Switch eAssist Features

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

With an active OnStar subscription,

Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry If the passenger door is open when

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic the trunk without removing the RKE

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

2. Turn to ON/RUN. The security 1. Place the recognized

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

Remote Vehicle Start to have the vehicle in view. Check

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

Keyless Access Key Cylinder Access

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Power Door Locks

3. Move the cap forward and press

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Safety Locks The rear door power windows are Doors

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

trunk and lift to open. See Remote

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Vehicle Alarm System

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows